IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)
/T/
i
z
1.0
i.l
I^IM 125
^ 1^ 12.0
u
m
||l.25 1 1.4 |L6
^ ^ —
^ — 6"
►
^/
Hiotographic
Sdences
Corporation
^■^"- >.^
23 WIST MAIN STRGIT
WEBSTM.N.Y. US80
(716)872-4503
'^
^9
p
y.^
%^
z
^^
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHM/ICMH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microraproductions / Institut Canadian da microraproductions historiquas
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquas
Tha Instituta has anamptad to obtain tha bast
original copy availabia for filming. Faaturas of this
copy which may ba bibliographically uniqua.
which may altar any of tha imagas in tha
raproduction. or which may significantly changa
tha uaual mathod of filming, ara chaekad balow.
D
Coloured covers/
Couvarture da coulaur
I I Covers damaged/
D
D
Couvarture endommagte
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaur^ et/ou pellicul4e
Cover title missing/
Le titre de couverture manque
Coloured maps/
Cartes gtegraphiquas en couleur
Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
Planches et/ou iSlustrations en couleur
Bound with other material/
ReiiA avec d'autres documents
Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distorsion le long de la marge intArieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouttas
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais. lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas 6tA filmtes.
L'Instltut a microfilm* le meiileur exemplaire
qu'il lui a it* possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique. qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite. ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la m^thoda normaia de filmage
sont indiquAs ci-dessous.
Tl
to
I I Coloured pages/
Pages de couleur
Pages damaged/
Pages endommagias
Pages restored and/oi
Pages restaurias et/ou pelliculAes
Pages discoloured, stained or foxei
Pages dicoiories, tacheties ou piquies
Pages detached/
Pages ditachias
Showthroughy
Transparence
Quality of prir
Quality inigala de {'impression
Includes supplementary matarii
Comprend du metiriel supplimentaira
Only edition available/
Seuie Edition disponible
I I Pages damaged/
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
r/H Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
[ I Pages detached/
r"^ Showthrough/
I j Quality of print varies/
I I Includes supplementary material/
I I Only edition available/
D
Pages wholly or partially obscured by orrata
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou pertieilement
obscurcies par un feuiilet d'errata, une pelure.
etc., ont M filmtes A nouveau de fapon A
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
Tl
P<
o1
fil
O
b(
tt
si
ot
fil
si
oi
Tl
si
Tl
w
IVI
di
er
b<
ri(
re
m
Q
Additionel comments:/
Commentaires supplimentaires:
Pagination as follows : [i]-xi, (U [9]- 191 p.
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est film* au taux de rMuction indiqu* ci-dessous.
10X 14X 18X r>y
26X
•mv
12X
7
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
Th« copy filmad h«r« has be«n reproduced thank*
to the generoaity of:
Stminary of Qutbac
Library
L'exempiaire film* fut reproduit grAce k la
gin^roait* da:
Stminaira de Quebec
BIbliotMqiM
Tha imagaa appearing hara ara tha bast quality
possibia considaring tha condition and lagibility
of tha original copy and in Icaaping with tha
filming contract spacifications.
Original copios in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illuatratad imprea-
sion, or the bacic cover when appropriate. All
other original copies ara filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the laat page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
Les images suivantea ont M reproduites avec la
plus grand soin, compta tenu de la condition at
de la nattet* da l'exempiaire film*, et en
conformit* avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
Les exemplairea originaux dont la couvarture en
papier est imprimAe sont filmis en commen9ant
par la premier plat et en terminant soit par la
darniire page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impreasion ou d'iilustratlon. soit par le second
plat, salon la caa. Toua les sutres exemplairea
originaux sont filmis an commandant par la
premiere page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impreaaion ou d'illuatration at en terminant par
la derniAre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the aymboi — ^- (meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the aymboi V (meaning "END"),
whichever appliaa.
Un dee aymbolaa suivants apparattra sur la
darniAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le
caa: le aymbole **- signifie "A SUIVRE". le
symbols V signifie "FIN".
IMapa, plates, charta, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratioa. Thoaa too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames aa
required. The following diagrams illuatrata the
method:
Les cartaa. planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre
filmte A dea taux da reduction diffirants.
Loraque la document eat trop grand pour Atra
reproduit en un seul clichA, il est f ilmA A partir
de I'angle supArieur gauche, de gauche h droite.
et de heut en bas, en prenant la nombre
d'images nAcessaira. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrant la m4thode.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
^
■A' ^
6)
NOUVELLE '
GRAMMAIRE FRANCAISE,
COMFBISINO
VOCABULARIES AND EXERCISES; A COMPLETE G
TO THE SYNTAX, ETC.; AND A READIN(
PAS
EMILE COULON,
AneknOivtdu OiiUge <fe SL €krmttin-m.Laife ; a eiuittte <b PXeoU , , , .mM
MandS, pour PadmUtim d la Marine, d VAnUe, d PXeole /WyMe^T
et d PSoole OentnOe det Artt et Mmt{faaim$; tfo.
FBKNCH MA9TKE IN TBI MODSfOBAMaAH OP UPPW CANADA, A«. TOROWO OKAIIMAR 80HO0M ;
MB. FBAHK'B AOADIMT, BTO. BTO.
IXilHNlH FOB TBI FBBNCB AND aiBUAN LANOUAOBS IN TB£ CIOTBBSWT Of TOBOOTO
FOH 1860 AND 1861.
SBOOND EDITIOK.
/\ ;? ! «■-
r
.^ '».
TORONTO;
PRINTED A.VD PUBLISHED BY W. C. CHEWKTt\<!^ kiTO )8tES;it>feA8t.
1862. "
Entered according to Act of the Provincial Legislature, in the year of our
.TA^"* thongand ei^t hundred and sixty-two, by Eirtt. CotrioN. in
the Office of the Registrar of the P. ovince of Canada.
da
PKINTKD AT THE 8TKAM PBK88 K»TABLI9Hll»fT OF W. C. OHKWETT A
CO,, TORONTO.
EKRATA.
' Read un
Instea
" on
<(
" french
((
f " faithful
«
1 " '^
(•
If " gardener
It
m " Seule
«
1 " Dieu,m. pl.x.
(i
i " ^^^
((
■«a
1 " alt^ree
«
ir
1 " good
((
in
" verb
«
" five shirts
«
_
" le vaisseau
«
" les tableaux
tt
" these people
((
" have tliey, f. pi.
<(
-
" number
<<
>—
" very
«
1 " of to go
((
-
[ " 2nd conjugation
((
\
k. " Verbs of
i<
1 ' " ennuie
tt
" reau-de-vie
ti
" quick
«
j *• tlie
«
I " nous serons
t(
" j'acquerrai
tt
•• bout
<(
" jo v^tis
u
1
1 " its
tt
1
J •' faUoir
It
on,
frech,
faithfol,
of,
gardner,
scule,
Dieu, m. pi. s.
and,
altera,
good,
verbe,
five pair of shirts,
le vaisseaux,
les tabbleaux,
this people,
have thej, f.
namber,
ery,
(of to go),
first conjugation.
VERBSOF,
enunie,
6au-de vie,
quick,
ths,
nous seront,
j'acquierrai,
bont,
je V ties,
it,
failloir,
page 11
From From *
top bottom
line. line.
6
" 11
4
" 19
9
" 21
" 22
17
12
" 22
12
" 23
17
" 25
3
" 26
7
" 26
4
" 27
12
" 29
14
" 30
5
" 80
20
" 30
23
" 31
17
" 46
8
" 49
3
" 60
1
" 61
16
" 63
3
" 64
11
" 01
3 .
" 62
11
1
" 81
4
" 114
4
" nn
14
14
" 148 2 col.
" 149 1
<(
" 149 9
It
" 161
7
" 154
R
5
h
fi
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
JU> (tranger,, qui mettent avant toutleur amour-propre d «a,.
ler correclement h fran^au, n'osmt pa. mger no. MaH
ir^ ^ U. a«,orU^ luurair. Jle.J4:,^J:^27aZ
I'ournepa.le.compraidn!. P'oraepaawr
" Ih vanlent le .tyhptm que le, idie,, pare, gu, le, idle, a«.
paraennentdtoule. le. ^Uon., et gueU. Frlr^^ZlZt
J«ee. du ttyle dan. Imr langue." ^ ^'
„. _ ^, Mne.de Slaa.
in E„l!r".f r^^"'' "P'""' '"»'»»i»gi» Toronto, what itfa
.n Europe the language of select Society ; and tbe special aim I
have already successfully kept iu "ewof eztendingft, 1 TJ
Tubtr 'T"'!i'r "■' "^y *«*• '» « -"ffioieoVaVo^'for
publishing a Second Edition of my work
pri^W^rw/*^"/ ^'' •"*" '" ^•^'^' -' »"» been uiy
tt bo?h L T T"?; "' """y yo^S ladies of the Jt
tamiUes both m Toronto and from other parte of the Province
I have therefore, been able to ascertain their requiremZlind
Zre ^ t' °""'"S ""^ »P«*'"g of *•>!« specially useful
est standing in French as well as in German *
1 may state that at examinations for entering the British «™,
^^ . - ., -muea to cac-xx « uner period of study, especially ip
VI
PHKt Ace.
Tarmti,, AprU, 1862.
BsiILB Cdvian.
OEKEBAI, OBSBBVATIOWa.
The first part as revised, contards all (hat is needed fn, a.
rongh and complete l^nning ^^ ^^"^ * ***^
-WS::^:;:^^^^^ i^eapplic^tio. of the vo-
suchintrieate^l^trtlt^^^^ "' ''^^' ^^^-
The few rules thus itttmr«!^^ru ^ ^°""S '^"'^ent.
remember, as is th'" ajt ^^^^^^ ^^^f -^^ <^ifficult to
Second Part or Grammar InL?!^^ '^'''°^'' ^^'*^ "^^ *J»e
time andplJe ' "^"^'''' *^^"^ ^" *^«' Proper oider.
vn
In these eMMue., 1 hare devisted from tho oidiaarv m«.ti.„
a.d b.v, «„,l..d .„!, .hos. wonfa which ^r/irtirS™
M ¥«,»ch, «d which .re io»«i.ble ia Es^Jh.
THE nSCOSD PAXT,
The second part I have entirely remodelled. It offers complete
and comprehensive mles to the Sjntai. "ompiew
.W,^i'{..'"r^ '.'^'"° ''"™''''" *» *■•« manner in which I hare
«I«saied the formation of the feminine in adj^^dre, the pronX
and especially .„ verte, it win be found mo« corr;,* as wdl^
more a-mpk than what ha, hUherto been publiahedrL^JblL"
stndy of the irregular verH I haveintrodaced fpaB. 144^7 ,3'
Beside this I have been careful to place thedeHvative tenw.
next to those from which they are formed, so aa to ™deZ
arduous and sow manner in which they' were CTbefo^
which so greatly impeded the progress of students, and t ^Zr
^rion h''- 7-«"«"-"yf-'-«, H wouM?uffice
rult 2r ?*' ^ ^1 "'*'''' '^o sender of nouns, and the
T^.y:^r "°""^ " '' '"' "" ^""^ ^-"y "'^^l-'e «o the
The difficulty experienced when writing French comnositioo
mth respect of the using of .he preposition, eitherl^tr!^'
nouns or other prepositions, is at on^ removed by trelisTIuJ
apphcanon of them p 16?. They wiff prove beneficial Se to
the beginner and the advanced student.
tHE THEM) FABT.
■ The Third Part is entirely different in its contents from the
former ed.t.on, n which the subjects were toodiversifiedtnd Z
long to retain with advantage.
• • •
VIII
I'ttEli'ACE.
Ihe method is prociselj the same, with this addition, that the
verbs, 10 foil are printed in italics, so as to command the atten-
tion of the scholar and enable him to be exercised upon the dif-
lerent parts of the verbs.
aut?ore^"^^^^ ""^^^^ '^^"^ ^"* ^ '^'^''"'"'^ ^'^"^ S^"*^ ^°S*^^
I have adapted the translation of each to the other, so as to
bring out in a forcible and clear manner, the differences of the
them*""^"'^''' ''"^ '"^ ^^' *° '"^'^^^ ^""^ *^^ construction of
With regard to the 1st and 2nd parts, I am indebted te the
Rev. Mr. Checkley, the learned Rector of the Model Grammar
School, who kmdlj revised the English of it
In reproducing this little work, my anxious desire has been to
render It worthy of my friends and pupils, and such as shall se-
cure the favour of Canadians in general.
E. C.
it the
itten-
adif.
glish
as to
the
m of
I the
iinar
n to
se-
CONTENTS.
Abbrartotlonf -^ -.
A«ento and other algni, their iue ' 80
A4JecUvei, their pli^.?. ._ 4, "2
" autun ■• 1??
pomeulTe 14-107
radliv with e, wcoept. 16^
£&?i^'f!:.::r::. *^S?
ineur, tew *" ga
ta«,y( if *"
M
««
Irregular la atr
In <H«wr
Tery Irregaiar..,,
ftm. In eau, ou...,
plnml.
88-97
.. 98
.. 98
.. 98
.. 99
99
teii,*""f •'•" «9
i^.^K *v .*"?if*'"'o' comparison... 85
Adretba, thdr place, their foikatlon. 168
166
Of doubt
of order i>.
ofpuoe ::::::::::::::::::•• ?^
^; - ••••
ofafllrmatlon
ofc(MnpariM>n
^irf, eee^their dURBrence paoi 112
t*»wand vingt jni
^<*ft>Uowedbyana4ieotiTe .■..~*.*.*.'."1* 35
2«<w'«'i how conjugated ., 124
CWn how oonjantod . 128
ComjumUTeofequall^ 29-100
" ofmiperloriiy IMOO
irregalar „ loj
Oondltiooal peat ng
Conjugation, lint !.. iii Z 48-ial
« S^nd 63-128
__ . foorth 66-132
Ooi^nnetiona ,m
Oonaonants \\ jj
Could, 8hoald« would .."V.*.V.'.V. "47-117
De U, (neyer ueed'aa'artlcle).*!
i>am*— remarks ,
«•••••••••
•*•■••••«,««..•
•••••••«•««««
164
163
166
ofintefrogatToi"::::::" \^
" of mannw ..^.... |!5
« of negation „ .'..."■.'::.■;:::;;."" iw
« of quantity . .: iS
Ago-how expressed i ; - ^^
^^remarka on the en^ "• ^
As-as ;.;;;;;;; ^^-m
At— how expressed ...'.""'*"'.* ** m
:i^r' 5f8***'«»r' *hat It requirts:::::: «
Be, (to) to do gy
SSffifSir'!!::*^*^'*"" ^
Ob (tile (e)of) ::""":; -S?
g^.^:!!^?'^ ••■"■•-■■'•■••'•••'"•'•■•••• iS
Otfti^ eewB. ^•"*"i.".".".*.'.".".*.*.".*" Ill
DatlTe case , jg
".".*.'."! 13
i>gmi» gtwnd... ...V.'/.!V.7.V.7.""!V.V.!iV."^^«
^man^me and second .*.'.'.*.*.""" 10*
Dtoresis .;;;;;;;; ^^
WcUonary "!!'. !!76-84
Wd ^Q_^
Diphthongs, au tau ;:;;;:;;:. n
PO ~ .„ Aa
5o,(td) • S
Doubling*, J IZZZZZ 60
^/,i, i, •, mute 10
^ Into (i (In Terbe) qq
t^te, (endings of nouns) ."'."* 94
5ir^'*° 90
Bndlngs e, et,etU ug
Entre
91
■^<re,howcoqjugiiJbed "*.'.'.'.".'.*."*.™y* lie
.^BU— remark n
su uidiu !!.'.r.'.!"."'.!"!!"" 118
Every body, everey day .'.'.* '.". ".'. *" .'." 34
^(»dj.) remark 100
Sx-ffSyi.!?!:::::::::: "•- H
fbitor time .Z'. aa
Fond (to be) .'..".".".'.'.".■" M
Formation of words..., .'.'.'.' 109
Fwrmatton of tenses— regutaTTerhe.".'."." 141
" irregular Terba... 144
Genders, (how many) 13.93
Genders of adJeetlYM and articles IS
Oenihrecase 55
CJONTENTS.
tt»ng from (to)
" * • ~...~..i. w
w^'^"!!!^!:!:: «»
Imperfect Indicative .™ 2^
Inrremarkopon) •^
Itateijectkmi .^, ' »
IiitenwtlTeIwiteae,i ^ ^ S
JilJ!r""" — •...•-«...^^ .110
**»* (to) ,„. -yV
LaMthnn . "0
Lettert ;.".""■; ••""•*• .i?
uk«ft») ...;;' ^
Ukeaow. /tir> •**"• "
■yMH vuuw^ , -^
ZoTf^ne ^ 22
>•••••••§•••
" *A(J« 68
2»'^. (to) 5x
»&?^.S2?'*'^'«^«Pn"«H»i...."."!."' M
j^mK' * "• •• ••• ••••■• « ,,, ,,^ ^ AA
V&bn'Z: ""• •."."*.'" M4
Moon ifgbt :.::::::::: - !*
Sloretfaan ... 98
Mot ..™:.. i»
My-eii; t!iy«ei#iihow";;^iii;^*::;:::;;; ,55
IJ*"* wmwh...
£», after a eompBratfr* .""! Ji
Part 1st
« 2iid - »
" 3rd ;;; ss
Participles' V.V.* "• 17.3
Ppepotfthaur ., '•• J2?
Kggfttoni Miow«d By*iii;i"«rto: '*^
S«^te*«iito::::r"' •,?!
•^^d.^ikr^aV.. - rJ}^
#» tlan-A-ir "'"•" 18-111
«• S!rr°!* — 4o.63.iu
" SiSS!!.:.r::: ]t}U
110
23
' •>.»..,...«. ...^. 15
RronottBi,«;<%,a,^e»M
P0MeB8ltec»»» .,.,
38
47
iwrfCtWMe after)....
* ••*•••■*»«»««•»..««..„, 104
172
Noon
wltti Terbi ......".'.'.".*.".'.'* la
joone with MAi^faiti"::: ^*
Nu^wmwki':: •
gumb^v,,, (how many) „
^ambers csnttnal, ordinal.. ,m
Someraf nonm.,
lOe
Obay (to).
(M(bow) —• g
O«d«wlon(wlth elMra) *'
Oft— vremark
AUDmor
^nnotMCSana
flSDurd Mmme tm not -..^
atatuwtaaa .^.^^ - • lf2
Bftpetit!onofiHofi«,j^ii"i;^;;;;;";; ^
Sttmr .r^ • 8Jr
Sheirho
Shall .
so'me or aT(wHh"nou«):::::::::- g
Speech (parts of) ' ®^'^12
Steal (to)^ '^ " W
?r fei»«r«"«i^i^'."::::::::
•••••••#••••««.,«,
obwmtioni .:::::::::::::::::;::;:":" ^■|]^M«*p»^«t'o?«7Sv'r:.v:::::::""'"^
OA
14$
ougHBhoaid"';:::.'::::::: -••- *j< i*** (to)
70 I TeriDlnanons, future
and 'Mnditlonal.
TO!
4T
» PAQM 68
9
88
173
.... — i.40-ie2-
• 43.164
be of the
gationa) 133
1 TerhB)., H8
poaitiapB
6»
^excevt. 63
>.. ••• • ds
-. ...1M0.M
••••*••••*•• JOB
— 167
-. 167
uidpro*
~. 168
91
118
~. 110
,19-111
....40r«3.111
18-112
16.113
M ... 82-1I6
JT
110
23
•«•••«•«• 16
38
." 47
.......91-119
ne* 115
>n...... 104
CONTENTS.
^^ general of the peraonal
121
Hi
Thfa or that. ' ' '"^
lout .. 3945
"*"*■ • 63
Va9 to (with Terbs) ^
Terba (auxfltory) ,,„,^
remarka
«
(4
«
«
«
l<
M
M
«
4(
M
|n ctr, ffer, ytr, der, etc.,
ID «mr,— remarka
afflrmaUrelj and nt^Mvely i55
126
161
'^Kj^.i-tcoijugitio,;";
^ 2nd «
" 3rd "
" 4ai «
•' lat M
'* 2nd -
*• 3rd «
" 4th «
146
148
• 164
•••••• ''•••.•«.«. 166
«"»arlm ...68-146
•••••..•.. 148
"..•.••••~....«.. 164
«
w
u
M
«
M
«
2nd
3rd « ~* *8-128
4th «
neuter with iare
passive ™^''
»flectlT;;*th*eir*i^uita;itr
reflecUyeandIn,?r«.ffi? „,
in.peraon.r *"*«™^*^^ 1^
interrogatiTei^-;;iVh noi-;;):::;:::: ^
^•"tf/andcwrf IM
Teiirfre, how coijBgated." }^
VowelaandthrfiI«>»«.i- *'* •••••• 8*
> and their aoonda .,
64-130 Was, were
66-182
.. 134
.. 134
.. Itt
67
Whatever .... ** ~ W
WiU.Bhall "''"■■^ 30
W<irds-.theb*' fcralitii^" ** ^^^"^
Ft «han«ad Into i*.,
.61-126
'..••M. 172
182
188
~...~. 130
«7
• lot"
^E
....... oO
40'
4»
::::::: S
... 6M10
9*
«•• •«• 60,.
M-SS-lOi.
■••»• «B
...... n
Rl... 47
1
ABBREVIATIONS OCCURRING IN THE FIRST PART.
m. or ad. means adjective.
'^'Jv- do. adverb.
^ ^o. feminiae gender.
*• ^ do- feminine and singular.
™ <5o- masculine gender.
ra. s. .... do. masculine and singular.
m. orf pi. do. masculine or feminine plural
m.orf.8.. do. masculine or feminine singular
Pa'^ do. participle.
P^ do. plural.
P'^* do. pronoun.
P'® do. preposition.
*• do. singular.
^' do. verb.
of the precedmg ^^^d «ith I «Sis7 '" """'' "'^''"'* '^'^
FIRST PART,
PREMIERE LEgON-pfRST LESSON.
OF LETTERS.
Vtmeh : A, E, I, 0, U, T.
THEIR SOUND.
A
a has the sound of a in cat, bat, hat
i>«i>a, op4ra, affaUe, aimabU.
E
« «.•*«,« any accent, Im the «mnd of « in o«t W „ *
I
• has the sound of ..in fed, also nnp/t.
-«....age; c«,,, eivilit, ; .J,,,,,,,^ ,^^^^^^^^
O
o J»as the sound ofoa in boat, coat.
i^ofa^e, soup ; j^osUion, position ; autoniS, authority.
U
w has no equivalent in English.
B
chute, fall • 5„<, end
aim : fi>/«/« »««.
/ - V "^' *oiuCWH.
10
LETTERS.
y called i-grec, (Greek i) has the sound of the French ,', also
of the French n, when placed after a vowel followed by another
Towel or a consonant.
physique; y, there; moyen, means; pays, country:
moyenne, average.
Important Remark— The French vowels unlike the English
never vary in sound, and consequently should never be departed
from.
remarks upon TtiB VOWEL E.
4 with the acute accent ( V,) sounds like a in fate, as : bonlS
kindness ; chariU, charity ; rf^<f, summer. '
i with grave 0^,) sounds like ay in ray, as mbre, mother •
phre, father. '
g Tfith the circumflex (-g) sounds something like 5 but a
little longer, as mime, same.
e called mute or silent, and withoat any mark over it, in
monosyllables or in words of but one syllable, as : me, te, cej has
the sound of the u in but, nwt, as given before ; but at the end
of a word of more than one syllable, sounds little or not at all,
as : Jedonne, I give ; Je prie, I pray.
Important REMARK.—The terminations («, es, unaccented)
at the end of any word, must not be heard, unless it be of one
syllable, as : de, des.
.S»«, termination of the 8rd plural in verbs, is never heard.
XtXTTSBS.
DEDXiiME XE5(Mr_SEC0M) LESsiw^'^,
mmmoms and others, and their sounds
<>•> oi/> sound like wo in m>ai> . .„•• ly
dom. ■ ' ^""S i royaum,,, king-
2 "'««'*' like •» io cool : 04, where ; p<«,> fo,
2 «.^d,.„^„a„glike„i„,„,:^;,;^-
^ ' "^^ * 1° str : «a«r, sister.
j^^ iJrenoJi « .V «, e«, I have had ; Mus^Hmes, We
r™ «„ ^ASAL VOWELS.
ihej are i— .
1.
AN, EN, generally the same.
en/ant, child.
2.
IN, WN, AIN aim; nearly the same,
./in, end ;/r«n, check : pain, bread Innf . /• • i.
dmein, design ; efe.«m, drawifg. ' ^' •^'^*^' ^""S^'*'-
' eacn , ««, one, a ; aucun, any, none.
4.
don^'^'^^!^'^^^'^'^'^ ^'^ome in mind
^-n, gift ; ^,,p^, b,y . ^^^^^ ^^^^ . ^^^^^^ ^«ind. .
5.
*VM««
.''!!1V*?1'^^'^^ ",^*^« ^^'^^I ^««t be borne
-I «v., pna* j.«di»,.«omor ; wi», care
in mind.
12
LETTERS.
REMAEK.-cn, after * or y sounds generally like in, as c^lien.
dog ; paycn, pagan. ^ , w c«iej»,
N. B.— Their sound can only be learned from the Teacher. '
OF CONSONANTS AND THEIR NAMES.
r
There is no W in
French. It is used
for foreign words,
chiefly taken from
English or German.
We pronounce it
like letter v, or give
it the value of u. J
0- and before
a,OfU'y sound hard
as : go, CO, gardien,
camarade.
But g followed by
6,i,y ; is soft; and c
with a crooked mark
under it, p, sounds
like 8 as : gargon.
Letters.
B
C
D
F
a
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
B
s
T
V
X
z
w
Former
sound.
U .
c^
dd
e£f
g«
ash
Ji
ka
ell
emm
enn
p6
ku
err
ess
t^
v6
iks
sed
double vi
New SoDnda bjr
which vfvtj one
of the letters is
nuscaline.
be
oe
de
fe
. ge
he
je
ke
le
. me
ne
pe
ke
re
86
te
ze
double ve
IS. B.-Generally speaking, consonanta are not heard at the end of
Trench words, unless Mowed by some vowel, so : part, part ; p<n-t. port :
t silent ; hntpartie, part ; p<»-te, door ; t heard. ^ .
As soon aa the pupUs have acquired a good knowledge of the smnd and
value of the French v<ywel», dipJUhmga and c<monanU ; then let them berin
to learn the vocabularies, and read the thuid part or Leebure
t, as chienf
Teaolier.
ES.
-
oondsby
every one
letters is
i
)e
y'"
e
te
'"'it-
«
e
■■-*
;e
e
3
e
1
^0
8
e
3
ABTICLE. lo
TROISIEME LEgON—THIRD LESSON.
ARTICLE.
TTiere is no other v^ay of expressing the article, than that
below :
given
Masculine singular,
before a consonant
or h aspirate.
The le
Of or from the du
At or to the au
Some or any du
Fern, sing,,
before a con-
sonant or h
aspirate.
la
de la
d la
de la
Masc, or fern.,
sing, before a
vowel or A
silent.
r
deV
dV
deV
Masc. or fern, pi.,
before a consonant
or a vowel an h
aspirate or silent.
de^
aux
des
Rem— (/e/6, d les, die, deles; can never be used as articles.
DU GENRE ET DU NOMBEE.~OP GENDEE AND NUMBER
There are but ttvo genders in French : the masculine and
teminine ; there is no neuter gender.
Adjectives and Articles agree in gender and number with the
nouns to which they relate.
hon m. good.
honne f. Jo.
Ions. m. pi. do.
bonnes f. pi. do.
Le bon p^re.
La bonne mire,
Le bon/rire.
La bonne soeur,
Les bons plres,
Les bonnes mbres,
et i sil. and.
est s sil. is.
« has, verb,
d to, prep.
The good father.
The good mother. .
The good brother.
The good sister.
The good fathers.
The good mothers.
14
I
J'ai une bonne mhre,
Tu as une bonne soeur,
II a un bon en/ant,
On a un ami,
■Nous avons desfiU^
Vous avez deaJUles^
lis ontun/riref
1»0SSESSIV« ADJECTIVES.
I have a good mother,
Thou hast a good sister.
He has a good child.
One has a friend.
We have (some) sons.
You have (some) daughters.
Thej have a brother.
QUATRIEME LE^ON.-FOUBTH LESSON.
ADJECTIESPOSSESSIES.-POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
(See Possessive Adjectiyes, Part II.)
fnon m. s.
ton m. B.
son m. s.
fna f. s.
ta
sa
mes m. or f. pi.
^' s. tea do.
f. s. ses do.
Plural.
notre m. or f. singular, nos m. or f. pi
voire do. u ^os do.
leur do. a i^^j,^ ^^
These possessive adjectives can only precede no«n« • *i,*^^'''^
with them in gender anrl n««,K J^Preceae nouns ; they agree
with mine, tk^X ' '"' ""'' ""'' ^' ^^^^^^^^^^^
My good father.
My good mother.
Thy g;ood sisters.
His or her good children*
1
our.
your.
their.
Man bonplre^
Ma bonne mhre,
Tes bonnes soeurs,
Sesjeunes enfants,
-4«Ve ^ Have I ?
asku? hast thou?
a-t-il? has he ?
a-t-elle ? has she ?
avez-vous? haveyoa
il,
ellCf
ih,
elleSf
he or it
she or it
they m.
theyi:
II f elle,ilsf elles;
must take the
gender and num-
J ber of the nouns
J they reprepent.
4
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.
ere.
is, her.
ir.
mr.
^ agree
unded
elles;
the
i
num-
^
MUDS
at.
■■>■;.
u.
Son livre est bon, His book is good.
II est petit, It is smalJ.
Sa plume est bonne, His pen is good.
EWe est petite, It ig small.
JW^es /r^m ont un grand jardin ; ils ont aussiwi petit jardin
My brothere have a large garden ; they have also a small garden.
Jaieudelor,m. I have had some gold.
Tu as eu de V argent, m. Thou hast had some silver.
llaeudu fer, m. He has had some iron.
On a eu dupain, m. One has had some bread.
^om avons eudespommes, f. pi. We have had some apples.
VoHs avez eu un couteau, m. s. You have had a knife
Ibont eu des canifs, m. pi. The have had some penknives.
Elk a eu des encrters, m. pi. She has had some inkstands.
Mind the Kemark, page 11, for eu.
cinquiI:me LEgoN— fifth lesson.
ADJECTIFS
DEMONSTRATIFS.
Ce m. s. this or that, before a con-
sonant or h aspirate.
Cet m. s. this or that, before a
Cette f. s. this or that, before a vowel f Cette plume, this pen.
or n. r>nnarknnnl- .>« I- •! r^ . . - . _
DEMONSTRATIVE
ADJECTIVES.
Ce cadeau, this gift.
Ce hameau, this hamlet.
Cetencrier, that inkstand.
Cet homme, this man.
or a consonant, an A asp. or sil.
Ces m. or f. pi. these or those,
before any word plural.
m J^rench, the genitive or possessive ease is expressed by de
of; placed after the nominative or accusative, whilst in Eo^sh'
the genitive or possessive comes before the nominative or accusal
Cette ardoise, that slate.
Ceg pommes, these apples.
Ces en/ants, those children.
Le livre de mon plre,
My father's book.
16
l|ni
i
I
na
ii
III
il!i
BILATITB PRONOUNS.
The dative is expressed by d as :
t/Vcm d mon phre, j ,^'* x
'^^^^^^^ nncle.
ami, m. frie^^j
a^ire, m. tree.
Jiomme, h sil. man.
^""or^y yet, still,
•/e suiaj'eune,
Tu €8 sinffuh'er,
On eitfOcUy
Nous sommes trutes,
Vous etes malades,
lis sont riches,
young,
ill; sick,
jealous.
riche, m. or f. s. rich.
pauvre, do poor.
j'eune, do
malade, do
Jaloux, m.
I am young,
Thou art strange.
One is sorry.
We are sad.
You are ill.
They are rich.
(See Adjectives; andFor„.tion of ttePlural in the Adjectives, Part II.)
SIXllME LEfON.-SIXTH LESSON.
PRONOMS KELATIFS ET I^LUS.-RELATIVE AND AB
SOLUTE PRONOUNS. ^^'
Qui, who, whom ; relates to persons only f When they are not
Que, what; relates to things only, ' "j PJ'eceded by any
I noun or pronoun.
ABSOLUTE.
Qui est Id. ^ Who is there?
Qui avez-vous vu f whom have you seen ?
Qua.e..ous? What have you? What is the matter with you ?
BELATIVE PRONOUNS.
It
RELATIVE.
(1.) N. B.-Qui„ ». or f., 8. or pi. ruminative of a verb and r^r^^A^A k
a noun or pronoun, means which who that- . ' ™^' '^'^ P'^ceded by
things, and may be of either genderldntmw! " '^ ^^"^ ^^
(2.) Que, m. f. s. pi. accusative governed bv a vppb «t.^ «« j j v
(See Relative Pronouns, Part II)
Z'hommeciniannevoiturc e^ The maa who ha, a carriage
y. ' is rich.
i« pn,«. qu'<m a rfonn^e. d The plum, which one haa given
«, en/ant ^, iOk,. ,„ ^^^ arebeautiftl
»r is for you.
they have brought.
The i of qui is never dropped before a vowel,
ihe e of que is always dropped before a vowel.
latante, aunt. ^cAe/^, bought.
lechapeau,m. hat. ^,^rf,,, j^^^^
la montre, f. watch. ,,ou.^, ' fonnd.
lecam/,m. pen-knife. ?«, jgad.
0«, or ; oti, where ; mats, but ; pour, for : <r^. very • fort
veiy, much ; dans, in ; ,.., „pon ; % of, or from.^ ' "^ '
/e uomw, m. la voisine, f.
?e coMsm, m. /« cowsm<?, f.
^'am», m. Vamie, f.
hjardinier, m. la jardinihre, f.
>
The neighbour.
The cousin.
The friend.
The gardener.
la huref, the letter f ; U fern J, the wife; the woman.'
should be began at once; and Avoir and Etre known, bef^
the Exercises are written. »""wn, oeioro
If.
POSgESSIVK PaONOUNS.
SEPTlllME LEgON.-SEVENTH LESSON.
QUELQUES VOGABULAIRES.-SOME VOCABULARIES.
DES PRONOMS P088E88IFS AU 8INGULIER.-80ME P08aE8SrVE
PRONOUNS IN THE 8INGLLAR.
Pius, more, Mpins, less. Que, than.
agriahU, in..or f. s,, agreeable.
^*f«> ^ useful.
jolt, m. jdie, t fl, pretty.
f<»tigu6, m,/atiguiie, t s., tired.
fattle, m. or f. s,
difficile, do.
^hle do.
honntte, do.
Aowf, m. haute, f. s.
habile, ra. or f. s.
easy.
difficult.
faithful,
honest, poUte.
high.
clever.
>■ Adjectife.
BCBSTANTIFS.
le chien, m. the dog.
le chat, m. the cat.
J
PBONOMS P0S8ESSIPS.
le mien, m. la mienne, f. mine.
, — .„.. /e <te„^ m. /« tienne, f. thine,
^co^pa^ne, f. the country. ^. .^., ,. la sienne, t l.is,l.ers.
to ri^e, f. the town. le ndtre, m. /a ndtre, f oura.
?e v^/rc, m. la vStre, f. yours.
le leur, m. /a ^cwr, f. theirs.
(See Possessive Pronouns, Part II.)
le soleilj m.
la lune, f.
la tdche, f.
le thhme, m.
the sun.
the moon,
the task,
the exercise.
ro«^''''?.^""~^T'''''^ ^'°°^"°' ''^^^^ P^^^'ede nouns; they
DMOKSIBATIVB PB0K0UK8. j-,
COMPARATIFS.-COMPAEATIVES.
mom. before, and ,^ after- "*"'""' *•' P'^i-g
^l^or'^'piu, Cher sue le mien,
Thy book « dearer than mine.
That child w not «o fall as— or leaJ-A.n i. T" ,
So that the tc.«.i„ation .., wh Jh iT^^Z '? "'
theoomparatiTe of tuoerioritv !. . v ^ ""' " *^"'«J '» «"«>
p".. uL :h, adjeXnv'piii.ir'''^''''^' '" ^-^ •"
(See the f„™.ti„, „, Co.p„.tives U Adjectives, P.« n.)
HUml)ME lEgON.-EIGHTH LESSON.
„, PRONOMS
DEMONSTRATIPS.
DJEMONSTRATIVE
PRONOUNS.
I;
celui, m, B. that or the one.
celle, f. s. do.
«^, m. pi. these, those the ones.
celles, f. pi. do.
cela, m.B. has no pi., that.
^h do. do. this.
.CThewordto^is„ode.tood.]J_r^en^..
(See Demonstrative Pronouns, Part H )
'MPORT^ ri Remark Th^ v i- ^.
-ning^andasitTtlZ ^^l^lf^T^'f '"""
^hat, before a noun relating in h k„
J-to penholder is good o. ^ 7' T' ""' ' '^J""'^"-
— » - -- -— • -^^'fjrn
These'pronouns must not
be confounded with the ad-
I J^c'ives of the same name;
y for pronouns never precede
nouns, but simply take the
place of the nouns, and also
their ^cnrftfr and numficr.
\
20
DEMONSTBATIVB PRONOUNS.
2.
That, m the piace of a noun or before a relative pronoun or
followed by a preposition, by cc, celui, ceUe; pronouns.
That which you say is true, Ce que vous ditea est vrai.
3.
That representing a masculine noun understood :
That of your brother is gilt, Celui de votrefrire est dori.
4.
That, preceded by a noun or other pronoun, by one, aai
relative pronouns. * '
The lesson that I have is long, La le^on que fax est longue.
The pen that is broken, La plume qui est cassie.
5.
That, meaning tha£ thing, by cela.
That is dirty, Cela est sale.
> 6,
That, when it cannot be changed into which, this, or
v^hom ; that is, when it is a conjunction, connecting verbs or
sentences together, must be translated in French by que, the e of
which is cut off before a vowel.
i:know <Aa^ you are here, Je sais que vous ties id.
You say <Aa« he is there. Vous dites qu'il est U.
Another important Remark.— As the French have no
different words for that and this, and these and those, they make
use of the adverbs ci, here, and Id, there ; when any comparison
IS made between two nouns preceded by ce, cetle, cet or ces ; and
not determined by any thing that follows, or again after the
demonstrative pronouns celui, cette, ceux, ceUes; for the same rea-
sons.
Ce cahier-ci est plus gros que This copy book is larger than
cecahier-U, that copy book.
Celui-ci est ban, celm-Id est This one is good, that one is
mauvais, ^ad.
N. B.—The words ci and Id must be preceded by a hyphen(.).
EECAPITULATION AND EXERCISE.
%l
*rai 4U en/antj adj.
Tu as iti cruel, adj.
M a iU d Vicole, subst.
On a 4U muet, adj.
Nous avons it6 aveugles adj. ,, « „„,c „ceu uima
Vous aveziU libre ors. pi. adj. Y^uIaVe beTn frZ'
Jls out iU sauva^es, adj. They have been wild.
IlEMARKs.---Ifthe pupils are too young, the following exer-
TL "'^^ ^''"^ *^' ^°'^' ^^^'^'^^ *^^^' writing them
I have been a child.
Thou hast been cruel.
He has been at school.
One has beendunb.
We have been blind.
NEUVlilME LEgON—NINTH LESSON.
thEme.
than n..ne/^7_HaTe they seen my m. horse and my /doe •
they are veiy faithfnl p;._Th.t / poor woman is very m the
js poorer and more Ul than that man.-Our ftther>s L ht
W«T ^-'^'»' ^"S i» P««y. »»• ; it ia prettier m. and
« hat than that «. ,Uoh („„,) j ha,e?_Oarohad is yonnL
cou8m.-Th« / task is more difficult than thalf / which
wH. T/r^'"' '"-^'■''^ honseof the^rdeneris
larger/ than that /. of your n*ighbour.-Thy m. hat m is
r^Z: "'" ""•' ""^ """' ^^'^ '"S^ 1»^ «"' »• of %
_Jhe/ moon is smaller/ than the sun m._Where is von.
have lost my m. pen-knife in the m garden
ot
22
T00ABUI,AIIIC8.
|»y neighbour—Where have you lost your pe»-knife T «. «,.,
" nch but I .m richer.-The„. hat that (See ' 17 !
have found is for my f »i,f«, „i.„ v , \ P' ^'••* *""'• ?»<»
-Haat thou »eu7yt toiT-Th^ ""?*"' ?.• <^°*P- ^«-)
good / mother .«d a^ery tlrl kr "i f ""^ " '''^
lanre / !.«•. /• . ' ^ ™' "»*her.— I hare aent a f
--TI.,Wefound their/. K^^^^
I have bought mm it o^tl^'J . ^ ^''^ '^ "^^ ^'^*^^'-
DJXl^ME LEgON.-TENTH LESSON.
lajleur, f.
la pomtne, f.
la poire, f.
to c^we, f.
to cA^m^re^ f.
to /aW«, f.
to chaise, f.
lejour, m.
le moig, m.
Z'a», m.
to semaine, f.
tlie flower,
the apple,
the pear,
the cherry,
the room,
the table,
the chdr.
the day.
the month,
the year,
the week.
VOCABULAIRES.
J'aime,
it aime,
ami,
arroad,
mang6,
regu,
vendu,
icrit,
80uvent, adv.
toujours, adv.
il^ a, imp. V.
est,
tontf
I love; I like.
hel6ves.
loved.
watered.
eaten.
received.
Sold.
written.
often.
always.
there is, there are.
belongs.
belong.
C"*^
? TO.— She
> ace. you
ee p. 18.)
WW a very
sent a /
sfcill very
3 very ill.
y mother
but I am
I. — Have
father. —
r is the
iives with
catire.
Proper wAistts.
are.
( is called.
'»*app€lle, I c6lls himself.
Sd. s. 1 calls herself,
[calls itself.
»'appellent^ ( iremUd.
{
3d.pl. ( call thems^lvfes.
Charles,
Louis,
LOUlSCy
Frangoisj
Senriy
Guillaume,
^douardj
Emile,
Georges,
Alphonse,
NOMS PRO?RES.-PROPER NAMES.
John,
Charles,
Lewis.
Louisa,r
Francis.
Henry.
Williatn.
Edward.
-^milius.
George.
Alphoniso.
Douvres, Dover.
Londres, London.
Bruzelles, x like ss. Brussels.
Paris, s silent. Paris.
Vimne, Vienna.
Quibec, Quebec.
Mont-rial, tsA. Montreal.
Terre-neuve, New found land.
[Rem. In, is expressed before
cities by d : In Paris, d Paris ;
before countries, by en: In Eng-
land, en Angleterre, f.]
I shall be alone.
Thou shalt be dead.
Je serai seulm. senle f.
2^u serasmort^ m. morte, f. ,„„„ ,^^,, ,, ^^
Jl sera ^nstru^t, m. instmiie, f. He will be learned
On sera heureux, m. heureuse, f. Ohe will be happy.
7^ ««-o,» braves, pi. f. or m. We will be brave
lT.Tr'''"''; P^- "^- Y«^ ^"J »>« present.
lis seront absents, pi. m. They will be aw»y.
Adverbs follow the verb ;
Eng. il^ 'often "have 4peare.
J'aisouvent deipoires.
Fr. I have often some pears.
I3XERCISE.
The gardens which ace. we have seen p/. in (at) the/ countrv
rJe:l,^f:/i-l^^ -^, *^-> («ee p. V, ^ z^z
, oe...^ .„ ««.-one is iiappier/. than our neighbour. /
24
POSSESSIVE PaONOUNS.
This mother is very happy. /-(Henry's sisters) are still very
young, p^.— Our s. (neighbour's children) are tired. »/.— I love
the (neighbour's children ;) they are very clever. jp/.-These
chemes/. are very good. /. pl^l (often) write to my pi friends
who are in London.— We have received a /. letter from Lewis :
he IS m Paris.-My/. cousin (is called) Louisa.-My sister has
some;,/, chairs in her/: room—There are some i>?. dogs in that/,
little/ town. -r o J
onziI:me LEgoN.— eleventh lesson.
PRONOMS POSSESIFS AU PLURIEL.-POSSESSIVE PRO-
NOUNS IN THE PLURAL.
les mtenSf m. pi.
les iunsj do.
les siensj do.
les notresj do.
les vStreSj do.
les leurSf do.
les miennesy f. pi.
les iienneSf do.
les sienneSf do.
les nStres. do.
les votres, do.
les leursj do.
mine,
thine,
his, hers,
ours,
yours,
theirs. .
ADJEOTIFS INDfiPINIS.— INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES.
Tout m. s. touie, f. s. tons, m. pi. toutes, f. pi. all, whole.
Tout not followed by the article, means every, each.
Tout is generally followed by the article before the next noun,
_and means the whole, or all.
Tout le jour, m.
Tous les Jours f
Tous les hommes,
Tout le monde,
The whole day.
Every day.
All men.
Every body, the whole world.
are still very
ed. pi — ^I love
3r. pi — These
► my jj/. friends
' from Lewis ;
-My sister has
dogs in that/.
3S0N.
ISIVE PRO-
ne.
ine.
\, hers,
rs.
urs.
lirs. .
DTIVES.
whole,
h.
a next noun,
un cheh'n,
un sou,
Dieu,
la ferre,
la nuit,
lejour,
le soir,
le matin,
la prairie.
INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES.
VOCABULAIRE.
g-
m. pi. s. a shiiliD^.
m. pi. i. a half-penny.
m. pi. «. God.
f. pi. «. the earth,
f- pi. «. the night,
m. pi. s. the day.
!"• pi. s. the evening,
m. pi. 8. the morning,
f- pi. «. the meadow.
Ani,
pleuri,
crU, m.ei.
envoys,
payi,
j'icris,
avec,
aussi,
de,
25
done, finished.
cried.
created,
sent,
paid for.
I write,
with, together,
also, too, as.
of, from.
Jf hole world.
EXERCISE.
I write every ^?. day^^. to London and rto) Paris -Vnn. /
uncles are richer^;, than mine, m vl hut hY« ^^"^'-Your p?.
richer.j.^.-We.havebou^hr/l, / , '^' ^^' "^ «*»"
pennies ) TT«1 -^ °'^ ^^' ^PP^^« ^«' *^enty (half-
pennies/— Have you written all /. »Z thpSA W W* J' ^"«*«
sentevervm «/ ,1a r«7 «"/-i>«. tnese ;?/. letters.— I have
easy. „. ^,_He ht p" d^foUlf / r;!*'"", ""''?"''■ ""
have found all / «/ .1, • . ' ■'^ *'*^'- ''•'emes.— We
my neighbour _TI.„r\' •■">""»«'»• i"?- (See p. 19.) of
Those j't:~fb!ht r "t^ t'^ *" -^ «~' ^"-^•
W^. ohildren ha e C4^^'t^'''"'r'"r"'•^■P^-
often write to his p, broThe" W^n^ ^^ *^""" ""'' ""^'^-I
his friends who a^ in ott~T t""" ""^ ""'""' ""> '*"«" '<•
K children and rBerii^"!?' ^"" •'"" *» Jol'-'-Your
watered our ,. flowttni yZ g at'wr"-'^^ """'
books and (your) p/. pe„3 CZ t Itll "' ^^'-P''
present from their j,;. aunts. '^"""^^ " ^
N. B. — Attention must be nairl *« tT,«
the no„„, in gender and nnmbTr 1 iu, ^T","'/''"' "^J"*''' ^'">
-a correct .peaMn, and writ^ ^tf p::^^^:''' '"' '"' ""^'
»2
2B
*" INDlnHlTZ ADJIOTITES.
DOUZliiME LEgON—TWELFTH LESSON.
Du, de, de la, deV, d,, j~^^ „,„ ^^ y^
before every noun, and never nnderatood i in EnglW,. '^
« «&i;^^" '"• * '"' " ''' ^ '"'> "»» -^" ^ ""d i" French
JVtow curieuxy m. cun'euse, f.
^M ^to«« savant, m. c f
7/ ^totV «o^e, in. or f,
iVoM« itions puUsantSj m. pi.
iPoM« ^<«e« regu8, do.
i?s ^<aicn« mquiets. do.
J'avais des jpaim-d-cacheter,
^M aval* de la g6n4rosit6,
11 avail de Vintelligencef
Nous aviona deshuttres,
Vou8 aviez du courage,
lis avaient de lapolitesse,
I was inquisitive.
Thou wast learned. '
He was wise, good.
"We were powerful.
You were received.
They were uneasy.
I had wafers.
Thou hadst generosity.
He had intellect.
We had oysters.
You had courage.
- ' They had politeness.
For the following, the French use to have and not to be
with nouns, and not with adjectives as in English
^T^Yff' "^ i^«« <'oM. (I had cold.)
i?«:r:Cr T-:^-^'- <:^^^^^
Elle avait soif. She was thirsty.
Or else an adjective as in English :
^^MgdL I was cold,
Tufusaffami, Thou wast hungry,
llMicKauffi, He was warm. ^'
mefutalUri, She was thirsty.
VOCABULAIRE.
/Irl. *^^'°^- ^'''^^'''^ the soldier,
/« mne, the <3|ueen. U mateht, the sailor.
(He had heat.)
(She had thirst)
ADTEBBS OP QUANTITY.
27
the fable,
the voice.
duroi of the king lapartie.t the part
<fe/am„«, of the queen. lavieX tCuU
upia/ona, m. the ceiling. fo/aSfe, f.
h journal, m. the paper. fa «,<,«,£
to<:oMr,£ the yard. .
been veiy ^ ^^,7 Z t™"' .""'' W-This bo, has
i.i soldie"_The davr^-"''!''»f "^/^ P""'''-' "'* ib
house belong, to thv flofe'.V-'^?-, ^^"" "^ '"ek-This/
«en.-The Ce that rll T [™'«'0-God Joves aU ^. (the)
peopIe.^-The/fabIe tSuirA^ ""i ''"^ '"^^ •■" '»• '•
for the^.eleyer^i g^^l^^^^ ""'•^ ''"■^ »"'»«ng/
now. are in our vard • »!,„, , -^ ^'' ** *■*«« which
ha, been read^Mm -TM^^Zt "f 17 '°"-^'» '»• W"
each house had fift^Tn Idlf td th! , """t i""''''' »"
/ ». a/ large/ yard. ' ^""''' ''"' each,^r<,»
Ib^ySu!^ "J'*™ "» f""y «"d0P«i in the G™m„,.r, .e weH „
TBEIZliME LEgON.^iRTEENTH LESSON.
ADVERBES DE OUANTTTfr ArkTrT,T>^«
^««, few, little. '^''^''™^-^»™ OF QPANTiry.
-««-, en'ough ^'T' '*'«' t"--
■«w, mora. . ' "" """'''' «» "any.
^iuiani, u much, as many.
\
28
ADVERBS OP QUANTITY.
£eaucoup, much, m,nj, . Comiien.Uwm^oh.hoyrmttt
great deal, a great ma,y. Trap, too moch, too „.l '"
Beaucoup de pain, much bread.
Moins rfe viande, less meat.
Tant de poires, so man; pears.
TI,..i>» ^"P*''^'^. too many cherries.
rJVw \ '""^'"•""'y "'""J- req«i«, the preposWoa
VOCABULAIRE.
la viande, f.
/a ij^rc, f.
I'eau, f.
the wine,
the meat,
the beer,
the water.
ie ca/6, m.
le iki. m.
h Sucre, m.
ia soupe, f.
the coffe.
the tea.
the sugar,
the soup.
hu, see botre, drunk, p. 13^
♦^01. I, me, to me.
le/romage,m, the cheese.
^e ael, m. the salt
lepoivre,m. the pepper. dannez-moz) giye7to) me'
a^ou^a.^., f. the mustard. apporCe.Joi, brLg^.e.
When adjectives are used .itetC^ ^r^ntiStrrd.
manor ^eopfe must not be expressed in French, 'the .^1
Bhows at once that the adjecave has become a noun.
_, , EXERCISE.
Wr "if — ^' '"'» '»™''k too """Oh (of) water and to much (of)
heer.-G.Te me some m. cheese and (some) m. wine-Th™e
MJo^ have eaten too much (of) salt; the/are sic" " Jh^w
many (of) sisters and (of) brother have y«„ J-BriL me thi
/. mustard and (the) salt «._There is too much (on ™^ •„
^r tea T ere are more (of) poor^. people in lUuX:
KJ^vI '/ *"'". • *^'" "^ ^'""'("^ P»' »»<> more (of)
COMPABATIVES OP EQUAUrr. 29
QUATORZli)ME LEgON.-FOURTEENTH LESSON.
COMPAEATIFS D'£GaI^_C0MPARATIVES OF
Aussi, as. Que, as.
Autanty as much. ")
Autantf as many.' J 2"*' ^-
ton/ c?e goes before nouns, and que de before the nezt
/^ est aussi dg6 que moi,
He his as old as I.
J'ai autant de poivre que de sel.
H^r. T T*""^ ^ """^^ o/pepper as of salt
(See the Pronouns, Part II.)
VOGABULAIRE.
f '"''•'^««' «^ the piece, morselc/e Za totVe, f.
l^^frre,m. the glass. c/e« ia., m.
<fe« chemises, f. some shirts.
«we cravate, f. a cravate.
«n mouchoir, m. a handkerchief.
<?c« ^an/s, m. some glovea
des souUers, m. some shoes.
des hottes, f. some boots.
descrayonsm, some pencils.
T»,n. , , EXERCISE.
^ _ - ___ ^mjr^ Uu«io aave DougHt five pounds of cheese ; it
la houteiUe, i, the bottle.
la livre, f. the pound.
uneaune,f. a jard.
w» w^^rc, m. a yard.
unepaite, f. a pair.
une douzaine, f. a dozen.
une corheiUe, f. a basket.
nne tasse, f. a cup.
some linen,
some stockings.
80
PLURAL IN NOONS.
m. 18 very good, m.-We have drunk (a)/, half a bottle of wine.^
Give me (a)/, half adozen of glovesand three (fozens of shirts -
I have as many (of) gloves as you.-I have received from my
BWter, (a)/.>lf a dozen of cravats.-In that m. trunk m. there
are three pairs pf stockings, five pairs of shirts and two dozens of
handkerchiefs.
quinziIjme LEgoN— fifteenth lesson.
DU PLURIEL DANS LES NOMS.-PLURAL IN NOUNS.
(For the Rules, see Formation of the Plural in Nouns, Part H )
Nouns ending with s,x,z', in the singular, remain the same ii*
the plural.
Those with aw, cm, take x for their plural.
Those with a/, ai7, generally change al aU, into aux.
8IN0ULAE.
h chapeaUf m.
le chdteaUf m.
leJeUf m.
le/eu, m.
le vaisseauXf m.
le troupeau, m.
le moineauj m.
le tableatif m.
le couteauj m.
le liorij m.
le tigrcj m.
SINGULAR.
le cheval, horse.
PLURAL,
let chapeaux,
les chdteaux.
leajeux.
les/eux.
les vaisseaux.
les troupeaux,
les moineaux.
les tahbleaux.
les couteatix.
les lions.
les tigres.
PLURAL.
les chevauxj horses.
the hat.
the castle,
the game,
the fire,
the vessel,
the flock,
the sparrow,
the picture,
the knife,
the lion,
the tiger.
V animal, m. animal. les animaux, animals.
Iem4tal,m. metal. lesmitaux, metals.
PLURAL IN NOUNS.
SI
of wine. —
' shirts.—
from my
Je
k m. there
Tu
dozens of
II
.
On
le giniralf general
le travail, m. work.
lovr-e la bonne mire,
lou-es la petite soeur,
lour-e les Ions en/ants,
lov^e lefih,
Nbu8 lovr-ons la nihce,
Vow lou-ez 868 bon8 gargons,
les giniraux. generals.
lee travaux. works.
I praise the good mother.
Thou praisest the little sister.
He praises the good children.
One praises the son.
We praise the niece.
- , . You praise his good bovs.
Ih lou-^nt ces pauvres amis. They praise these poor friends.
In the following exercise, attention must be paid to the agree-
ment of the adjective with the substantive.
EXERCISE.
The m. coffee which ace. thou hast bought is very good, m—
We praise the ^;. great works of the p?. great m. pi. generals-
There are (a great) many (of) animals in the water.-How many
(of) horses have they?~My aunt has three paintings in her
/ house.~Their «. King has lost allp?. his pi ships—This m. peo-
pie *. love (loves) their (his) pi generals.-The works of those men
are agreeable ^;. to the Queen and to the King.— This King has
few (of) soldiers, but many (of) sailors.-You have bought two
pounds of good m. coffee.-Our p^. neighbours have bought m
the gardener's trees—This castle is larger than yours m. «.-These
flocks are very large p/— You have lost jonx pi hrgepl horses
That/ httle f. girl likes (the)p/.games.~My cousin has sold his
pi two sparrows to his brother.
SEIZlllME LEgON.— SIXTEENTH LESSON.
VOCABULAIRE.
lelibraire, the bookseller, ilvend,
le cordann-ip* ♦!»/» oV/x^^.i — - ■•
onvenay
- .\tx oil /\ <>•»•> 1-- —
he sells.
oneseJis; u sold.
82
PLUBAL IN N0UN8.
U menum'er, the joiner. coUti,
le charpentier, the carpenter, fait, '
lemarchand, the merchant, il fait
le citron, m, the lemon. iUome,
the oranga
V orange, f.
en iti,
en hiver.
in summer,
in winter.
11 fait ehaud en iti.
llfaitfroid en hiver,
cost
done, made,
it is, he makes,
it costs.
n'ilvom plait, if you please,
if it (to jou) pleases.
en automne, in autumn.
au printemps, in the spring.
It is warm in summer.
It is cold in winter.
7/ /. .. . , , ' *" *° «"»« m winter.
Ufa^agTlahh au prinUmp,, It fa ple.«,„t in the sprine
II fait feoK en automne au It fa fine in antumn in L
Canada. „^^
C^/ m. .auo^Marman/.. ft fa . delightful sewon.
i::t«r ''"*"'""'' 'IT'-^- - -«-^-
Chea-moi, at my house.
CAca ce^ Aomme, at that man's.
On an indefinite pronoun, meaning either one, you, Ae they
anyhody ; requires the verb it governs to be in tif .A .^si g^^
in iinglish.— See on, etc., Part II. ■> r
On trouve heaucouj, de chom chez ce marchand^-P^pW „
one finds many things at that merehant's j or many thing, a«
found or can be found at that merchant's. ^
Je louauKthomme, I was praising that man.
m. huauce^marcUnds, Thou wast praising those merchants.
On louau ce cordonnier, One was praising thfa shoemaker.
Mm lomon, ce, choees We were praising those things.
rou, fo„«« mre Ubraire, Yon were prising your boolLuer.
^rchants.
aker.
58.
seller.
SUPEBLATIVE DEOREE IK ADJECTIVES. 33
Cfe. me„m,kr, louai«,t These joinera were praising the <«r.
EXERCISE.
ThesBmmersof (the) m. Canada are ver, warm erf.- -We
praise the aatun. Ds above all/ pi. the seasons of that m. country -
The map e (tree) is a m. very usefnl tree-(people) make 3rf. ..
.ugarn. (with ..)«., before the Terb._Who has made that/ good
/so«p ?-fh.sjoinerha8made(somej,Z.) tables and three chairs
-These cups have cost (;» great deal of) money-There are
r„7 n ''""'^^' '"°5''' ""'' """" "" ^»y hW-At that
bookseller's, people find 3d,, (some) ink, (some ^ pens, and
(some) m. bread.
«ft?r4rec7Sin^^^^^ ''' T" --'^-l r triable ; when
iieurcift d^me, half pLf twa ^' •*"* '^*'^«'^' ^^^'^^ hour; efc«x
DIX-SEPTI|]ME LEgON.-SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
TO LIKE, TO BE FOND OF— THERE IS, THERE ARE
SUPERLATIVE DEGREE IN ADJECTIVES.
le fruit, m.
le laitf m.
& chocolat, m.
le vinaigrcj m.
lejamhorif m.
lepouding, m.
lafarinej f,
Vhuile, l
les Ugumes^ m.
^/e.r, m.
^a montagne f.
c
VOCABULAIRE.
the fruit, VAngUterre, f.
the milk. /a France, f.
the chocolate, /'^sjg,
the vinegar. V Espagne,
the ham. VA/rique,
the pudding. ^'i^a%
the flour,
the oil
/a Chine,
V Europe,
f.
f.
f.
f.
i:
f.
the vegetables. VAmirique, f.
the iron. tJien/ ^
the mountain. 1a rilus. '^'"l^'
England.
France.
Asia.
Spain.
Africa.
Italj.
China-
Europe.
America,
comes,
the richest.
u
&OPERLATIVE DfeOKEK IN ADJECTIVES.
. i
i i
appUquS m. diligent.
aimable, m. amiable.
le moms grand, the less talh
le plus j>€tit,m. the smallest.
.. , ^ laplnspetitey f. the smallest.
Aimer {to b6 fond of) requires the article le, la, T, hs : to be
used before nouns.
J'atmelelmi, I like the miJk.
i?y a, there is, there are ; and voici, voild, here is, there is,
here arw, there are. *
II y a, expresses the stafc^, the existence of things or persons
IbnowiDg fhat verb.
Voki, voild, (prepositions) point out the persons or thing.s
placed after those prepositions, and require no verb after.
With void, voild, you must see the things or persona : with it
y a not unless it is further explained, as :
Void du pain, My a duponn dans Varmoire
Here is bread. There fs bread in the press.
They may be preceded by the accusative personal pronouns,
wc, te, le, la, les, nous vom ,-
me voici^ here I am. le, void, here they are.
never so with il y a. ^
The superlative degree, is formed by placing the article le, la,
tyles', or any possessive or determinaiive adjective before moius.
orplus, which precedes the adjective qualificative.
(VoT Examples, see SuporlaUTes, Pa»t II.)
EXERCISE.
Tea comes from (the/) China, and coffee from (the> Africa -^
(Hereare) your;,?, gloves. -People find Sd. s. many (of) good fpl
things/ at that joiner's.-This man is poor, but that shoemaker
IS the poorest man (of) in the town.~The m. iron is the
most useful of all ^/. (the) metals which are in the / earth—
xlhTz'Z!/Tf ^ Y' ^''^^ ^'"^ ^'^^ "^^'^^^"'^ ^^^> ^^^- -re very
nch 2,;.-(Tbe) America is the m. largest m. country (pays) m,
n the world (of the \ world).-(The) / France is lafger/!
than fth(C\ "Rnplopji Ti • . t . *= •'
.^ — ^ ^ngi«na.— xiuiu IB my m. largest m. boook m.
STOEBLATIVl! AND IBREaULAE ADJEOnVEB. 35
BIX-HUITIEME LEgON.-ElGHTEENTH LESSON.
TlVra AND ADJECTIVES OF IHKEGU1AK COMPARISON.
PBONOMS D^MONSTRATirs AVEC pIIInoMS HBLAms.-D.MONSTIUIIVB
WITH KELATIVE PRONOUNS.
^'^;'"'"" *""""''■' The most happy „„„,-„, A,
World.
Europe.
mcilleur, m
pire, m. or f.
moindre, do.
lej)ire, m.
better,
worse,
smaller,
the worst.
hon, m. good.
mauvais, m. bad.
l>^tit, m. small.
le meilleur, m. the best.
le moindre^ m. the smallest.
We also say : pluB mmiv^^^ worse ; y«s petit, smaller,
f Plus petit, that can be measured.
1 Moindre, that can be appreciated,
f Cest, it is, thig is, he is, she is.
I Ce sont, it is, they are, these are.
Ce sont, is always followed by a third person plural ; we say :
C est vcm, it is you ; but, ce sont eux, it is they. ^
(?'e^, followed by an adjective only, relates to things : followed
by a noun or pronoun, relates to persons or things.
Oest boh. ta • 1
^, ^ ' -It IS good.
Cest man meilleur ami, He is my best friend.
y^e sont les meillpuvs ^mf^^t^ mu-^ ^ ., , .....
•\
36
SUPERLATIVE AND IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
NOMINATIVE.
He who, the one who or which, Celui qui, m.
She who, the one who or which, Celle qui, f.
Those who, the^/ who, the ones Ceux qui, m. pi. celtes qui,
who or which. f. pi.
ACCUSATIVE.
Him whom or which, the one which, Celui que, m.
Her whom or which, the one which, Celle que, f.
Them whom or which, the ones which, Ceux que, m. Celles
The above relate to thinc/s or persons. '
(See Relative Pronouns. Part II.)
Ce qui, that which or what (JVom.) ) relate to things only;
Ce que, that which or what (Ace.) i they are always masc. sing.
EXERCISE.
AU pronouns and adjectives must agree in gender and number with the
nouns to which they relate.
That young man is very clever, he is the first— It is the joiner
who has made jompl. chairs and (your)j,/. Mes.-^My pi. boots
are larger/ pl.and better/, pi. than his, /. ^/. ; butyoursp/. are
the pi worst/, pi. and the smallest/ i,^-Ilove those who are
honest ^?. and diligent ^^/.-He is called William and she is called
Louisa—He IS the poorest man (in the) (of the) whole world.
-(She IS) It is my / best/ friend/.~The dog is the most
faithful animal-These exercises are very difficult^,;. ; those m.
pi. that I have are more difficult i>/. than those m. pi, which he
has.--That knife m. is good w.; mine m. is better ; and the one
m. which ace. he has is the best. m.-He who (nom.) is here
done his m. duty. ^ "^
II
mber with the
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 3^
DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON.— NINETEENTH LESSON.
ADJECTIFS NUm£rAUX. —NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
PRONOMS INTERROGATIFS.— INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
Le premier, m., the first. ( See the numbers given in the
La premiere, f., the first. \ Grammaire.
^u/, who, whom? ^ Ditesdmonplre,
De qui, whose, of or from whom. i Tell (to) my father.
A qui, whose, to whom. > Dites-moi,
Chez qui, at whose house. J Tell (to) me
VOCABULAIRE.
legiargon, the boy. mesdames, ladies.
iaflle, the girl. cette demoiselle, this young lady
le domestique, the servant. les demoiselles, the young ladies *
la domeshque,f. do. mademoiselle, miss.
la servante, the servant si^lmesdemoiselles, young ladies.
lemaitre, the master. le mSdecin, ' the physician.
la classe, the class. modeste,
la hontS, f. the kindness, id,
lam4cTiancet4, f.the wickedness, lei,
mSchant, adj. bad, naughty.
the gentleman. Jacques,
the gentlemen. Fridiric,
modest,
here. *
there.
le monsieur,
les messieurs,
monsieur,
messieurs,
la dame,
les dames,
madame.
Sir.
gentlemen,
the lady,
the ladies,
madam.
Gustave,
Genhve,
James.
Frederick.
Gustavus.
Geneva.
le lac Ontario, lake Ontario.
le St. Laurent, St. Lawrence.
le fleuve, m. large river.
Hi
38
rHESENT ^ND IMPERFECT OF THE VERB AVOIR.
EXERCISE.
^/.-Whose papar «.. ia this ?-For whoS i ""'" *
.0. the. genUe..^
-rell me to whom you have given all . your .. ftuU L." ^'''•
. VITOTII:mE LEgQN.^TWENTIETH LESSOK.
SUK LE PRESENT ET l'imparfaIT DIT VERBB AVOrP
BES PARTICIPES PASSES b'^ TwTet ^'j^/f ^««OMPAOXfs
PBESEK. AKB .MPERPEC. O^iEVERf f K^"^^ ^^^
ACCOMPAmED BV THE PAST PARTICIPLES OP
A VOIR AND ETRE.
EUy
les parents, m,
V habit, ra.
^e tailleuvy
le banquier,
le temps, m.
le nombre, m.
h pension, f.
lafamille, f.
Iiad ; ^/^, been. See ^2;oi> and ^/rc.
VOOABULAIRE.
the parents, re- fo/-s^M«,
lations. quand,
the coat, dress, parce que,
the tailor. a/or«,
the banker ^^,^,,„,^
time, weather, roi/^^e, m. or f. red, adj
the number. at;««^^., m. or f. blind, adj
Bchoo,, boarding.c^.., m. ch^re, f. dear, adj.
the family. c.«m., t,,^„ ^
when (at the time.)
when,
because,
then, at that time,
now, at present.
PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF THE VERB AVOIR.
39
le matiny m.
Je toir, m.
ia V {site J f.
le tort, ra.
la raisorij f,
!a/aim, f.
la soif, f.
the morning, hierj
the evening. aujourd'huif
the visit, call, autrefois^
the wrong. autrCy
the reason, right, unefouy
the hunger. ensemlte,
yesterda/.
to day.
formerly.
other.
once, one time.
tc^ether.
the thirst. ordinairement, usually, generany.
R<a^.—Lorsque is never used to ask a question, quand is.
Tieureuxy m. heureuse, f. happy,
malheureux, m. malheureuse, f. unhappy.
paresseux, m. paresseuse, f.
vertueuxy m. vertueusCf f.
J' at fait une visite.
it /ait beau temps,
idle.
virtuous.
I have made, (paid) a visit.
it is fine weather.
Adverbs follow the verb.
A(?jectives ending with (e) mute are common to both genders.
Those ending with «, change x into se to form the feminine.
The word /ozs, where therj is a repetition of times must bo
used, and not temps.
J'ai m le voir troisfois, I ^ent three times to see him .
Nous avons pass6 heaucoup de We have spent a great while
temps d lefaire, doing it.
EXERCISE.
Thou wast very young, when thy /. mother had (so many)
(of) misfortunes.—II'we you known my (pi) uncles ?— They
were known p?. by (de) every body.— When my pi parents were-
still rich,^/. I had many (of) horses, (of ) dogs, and (of) money.
—That/, young ladywas always modest, virtuous,/, and diligent,
/ J she was loved/ by(Je)herp^. parents.— (At that time), my
uncle was very sad, because he had lost his/ daughter, who now.
was so (si) diligent/— Where were you yesterday ?— My brothers
40
PAST PARTICIPLES.
very rich and very happy • To"! ~ ^ '"'"^" ""^ '^"""^^y
- than yours / / ' '^"""'^ ^'••!' Wpy/ ; happier/
VINGT-ET-UNlllME LEgON.-TWENTY
LESSON.
FIRST
«™.,™s PAB„c„.s P.ss«S.-SOHK P.ST P.H^.PL.,.
had.
been, never changes. TZ^cTlf'; ' """*■•
read , ' '''^^^^^^^ ^' cruel.
taken. ' ^^ ""' ^T' ^' *^''^'
oas, m. basse, f. Jq^
ffrosm,g f^ big/stout.
I affaire, i. business, affair.
leplaisir, m,
le corps, m.
I'dme, f.
eu,
^ti,
lu,
jpris,
^^h put, laid, placed.
cherchi, looked for.
^it, told, said, spoken. '
ac7iet4, bought.
tout, m. s. every thing.
pleasure,
body,
soul
well.
" o * ame, i.
~ ««.2«., f. india rubber. Hen, idverb. ,ell
Adjectives whose endings arp ^7 «•
consonant and take (e/lt. ' ' "'' ""' "'""'"'^ «■« ''«'
' EXERCISE.
ato!^ngst?ou:rche: '21^ >~' '''' "»' ^^i"-
mortal, but his/. souliTmttaT ^""..1' "^ ^'^'^ """ '=
been very good (wise P "htl ht ^ '\1';'"'"'^ ''"^
wo have been at our aunt', .h.i.,! """"'' <^"^) P'oasurej
our aunt^^s the whole day yesterday.-These ladies
NEGATIVES AND ADJECTIVES WITH VERBS. 4l
are so tired;/, pi. because they/, have looked for the dog that
(ace.) they/ had ^rd pi lost yesterday.— I have* sent Heni^ to
my banker's^ to-day ; he is very tired now.—Have you (a great)
deal of business pi. to-day ?— I have read the / letter which (ace)
you have lent/ to Henry; it / is well written/— Where hast
thou put my/, pen ?
VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON.— TWENTY-SECOND
LESSON.
NfiOATIONS ET ADJECTIFS AVEC DES VERBES.-
TIVES WITH VERBS.
aetif, m. active, f. active. ne
vif, m. Vive, f. quick, lively. ne.
-NEGATIVES AND ADJEC-
pas,
jamais,
not.
, ^ ---, never.
neuf, m. neuve, t. new, (not worn.) we. rien, nothing, not
- . J *°y thing.
neuj, nine. does not change, ne, personne, »<> ^^y, not
lean, m. belle, f. fine, beautiful, ne, plus,
any one.
no more.
nouveau, m.
faitx, m.
doux, m.
frais, m.
vieux, m.
sec, m.
hlanc, m.
long, m.
Je n'avaispas,
Tu n' auras jamais.
11 n* a rien.
On n^aime per Sonne,
Nous ne louons jamais,
Vous ne parlez point,
lis ne donnent rien,
nouvelle, f. new, (not seen before.)
fausse, f. false, deceitful.
douce, f. sweet, iuild.
fraiche, f. fresh.
vieille, f. old.
s^che, f, dry.
blanche, f. white.
longue, f. long.
I had not.
Thou shalt never have.
He has nothing.
One does not like any one.
We never praise.
You do not speak at all.
"^y give nothiug.
1l,
42
; !■
i
NEGATIVES AND ADJECTIVES WITH VERBS.
f« ^'■^^*>. f- the sheep.
la ch^vre, f. the goat.
le beurre, xxx. the butter.
non,
OUlf
si.
no-
yes.
' yes, of course, if, so.
that verb, as : " ^ P"'^*^^^ «e"se placed after
*^en*at pas de pain, j.
fles n'ont point den^re, TheJL" ""'' ^"'f'
^ut, J- « rf„^„,„, beoause it is not negative
Iln'ariendebou, He has nothing esod
itTvl "' ■"•^'"--Se/iuto ., for the Sne
and just after the nol L^ft ^"^ ^^""^ '"^^O" *"« ^"b,
■n«; after the vtrb „. In T ^'f'^'^' >«««. i«-»«.
participle. ' ^ '" '""»P''>'«d tenses before the past
EXERCISE.
ai.o._These:;p,es^::xity„rtt '"rr " "'^ '»•
The m. cat is deceitfnl hJ.rt t -^^ ^ """'■P'- ""^se pears.—
is too Iow/1? h tetve" set<f 7^ " >»«a/-This/ chair
not yet seen the Qneenlwe I § T** "^ •'""''" '"«
William ; he is .2T-^7.% T '" ^"'''"^ " ^^ ™" ««
/. goat.-:Many (o^;^ Seit^^^^Sf ^ "' '-;
women are blind^A-Thep?. houses i W ^I'^ra' M f '
^•^'''""''"'^-^^''^WWon.^^eh^veZUd^J'
NEGATIVES WITH VERBS AND ADJECTIVES.
43
letters ; they/, pi are very long/. j^^—You are not unhappy,
you have not lost yourp?. pa ents.— You m.pl are not diligent,
you have not written any exercises.
VINGT-TROISIEMELEgON.— TWENTY-THIRD
VOCABULAIRE.
la fourchettej f. the fork. copiiy
la ctiili^rej f. the spdon.
la main, f. the hand.
les cheveuXf m.pl. the hair.
la harbe, f. the beard.
copied,
slept
begun,
looked for.
dormif
commencSf
cherch^,
lonfftemps, adv. a long time.
la poste, I the post-office, pen de temps, a short time,
U collier, Tn. the copy-book, la carte, {. the map.
Rem.— -In interrogative sentences, the nominative, if a pro-
noun, goes after the verb :
Auraient-ilsfait cette mauvaise action, s'ils ataient rifl6cld (i
lapunition qui suit toujours un crime P
. Would they have performed that bad action, had they thought
of the punishment always attending crime.
If negative, the particle (ne) precedes the verb :
A\-. vous avais-jepasfherc7i4 ? Had I not looked for you ?
If there be a past participle with auxiliary, the second nega-
tive goes between the auxiliary and the past participle. The e of
116 must be cut off before a vowel :
N'a-t-elle pas lien dormi ? Did she not sleep well ?
2nd. REM.^Most adjectives follow their respective nouns •
but hon, mauvais, petit, grand, beau, long ; go generally before.
EXERCISE.
Here are mj pi. children.— Are we not diligent pZ. ?— Nobody
hkes this/ naughty/ girl.— We were not here yesterday ^ we
!rJ'
sti
>^%
m
44
PAST PAETIOIPI^s CON.UOAIEI, WZIH ETR..
«ont the servant to the shLS *t" ^'^ ""^^ ^-We'havo
(op3h„es.-Have you sent Z lot tri"; "" ""' °"'/
I have slept (a I„og time in the/ e 111? 4rf °*" '"
B.y/ room._Praneis ha, receiv di!, ' ^^^'"' ""^ "'^P""
(-) ■•» not v..;. /ht^„e^7r r„:t:: s -„;^-
VINGT-QUATKlllME LEgON.^TW
LESSON.
ENTr-FOURTH
KTICIPES PA8S«3 COSroorfs ATEC HTPP ™
««^L,™ EXP«ESS,OKS ImOMAT,,™,. ^' " '""'
ON SOME PAST PABT,CIPI,ES CO«„ZrE» w,™ ^Tyj;. ,
n.io„A„cA. ...aZZl • ^™ "" ^-^
Jesuu afriv4, 1 arrived, did arrive, have arrived
^r:r:t^:rSt57^"'^--'-^-
ij n. .«c::' :;;it^« '^r :r "^-' -
co.etlr''""^'"'^^' '"^^ -- ''-^. OH ::rU. have
PAST PARTICIPLES CONJUGATED WITH ETRE. 4^'
VOCABULAIRE.
rheure, f. the hour. le vent, m. the wind.
rdge, m. the age. la semaine passie, dernihre, f. last week.
le voyage, m. the voyage. minuit, m. midnight.
la le^on, f. the lesson, midi m. noon ; (never douze keures.')
la minute, f. the minute. un an, m. a year.
le quart, m. the quarter, quinze Jours, m. a fortnight, 15 days.
huit Jours, m. a week, 8 days.
Quelle heure est-il ? What time is it ?
Quel, m. quelle, f. quels, m. pi. quelles, f. pi. ; which, what ?
Combien, and a noun of time, followed by il y a que, requires
a present tense.
r How much (of) time is there
Combien de temps 1/ a-t-il que j since you are here ?
vous ties ici. i (i7nf7.)How long have you been
[ here ?
Bepuis quand, followed by a verb, requires a present tense.
■ ^ f Since when are you in Can-
Depuis quand ttes-vous au] ada ?
. ^«"«^« ^ 1 (.Eng.) How long have you been
I in Canada.
II y a, followed by a noun of time, adverb of time and que,
requires a past tense to express the past, and a present tense to
express something actually present.
II y a is also translated by it is, and que by since.
r There is a long time since I am
11 y a longtemps quej'y mis. J ^^ ^''
I (,I^ng.) I have been a long time
(, in it.
II y a, followed by a noun of time, means also ago.
II y a deux ans. Two years ago.
'<■ IS
46
riri
II
l>ASr PARTICIPLES CONJUOATED WITH ETItE.
I ^a-t-n.
Not so good, Quel est voCre a,e Wha^ ''' ''"
Quelajeont-Z 5f ^* yo«r age ?
iSr Never turn M../^' ^ ^'T'^^ "' *^^^ ^
mere were many people
Thete was, there wpfp f 7 , t'*'"P^e.
Vvas there ? ) t ,
Were there ? j ^«^«*<-*'^ ? ^^ *^®'e ?
Are there ?
(See y avoir, Part II.)
.. EXERCISE.
Mj uncie (set out) ris set nnf^ *i, j
roDto ?_We wLT,l,;\ , ^^ """" ^"o '>^'' ■■■> («t) To-
, »»e went to the shoemater's : he ha, „«. ». 'j
ne'r/ pi. bo'ot»._I have rami «f,." a ^^° "y-P^-
did jou come f-^WhenVi?^ T ^"^ ««<l._With whom
-You came (arc^leraM r"'""''™*^™/^™™^^?
gentlemen-have (aJnotvlr"™' ""* '""'^^ ""^ '^e
(.re)notarri;ed;;i!HL;'"? ""• "'-''' '"""=' ">»»«
«■ servant to the/It S^'/k-"'^'''"""'^-"'^'' ^entmy
Have they/ notbeen the i L"/ '/P n^ ' *"• ^<'"'' '»-
We they/ not been (a C^^tSl^^Ti- ™'^"''
been at the physician's to day ? * ^ -* ™ ^"^"^ J""
J-UTUBE AND CONDITIONAL KNDINQS.
4i
VINGT-CINQUlllME LEgON.— TWENTY-FIFTH
LESSON.
irUXUE ET CONDmONNEL.— FCTURIE AXD COJTDITIOJJAt.
ENDINGS.
1.
2.
3.
FuTUllE.
Sing. PI
rai. 1.
ras, 2.
ra.
ron»,
rez,
ront.
1.
2.
3.
Conditional.
sing. PL
rais, 1. rions.
rais.
2. riezj
ratty 3, raient.
The terminatioaa of the future and conditional are common to
all verbs without any exceptions. They represent the English
shall and will, and would, should and could.
1. After (si) if, and the imperfect indicatiye, we use the pre-
sent conditional.
Si f Stats malade, Je sortirais. If I were ill, I would go out.
2. After si, if ; and the present indicative, we use the future
absolute.
Si Je puis, je le ferai. If I can, I will do it
3. After quand, when ; to express something to come, always
use the future ; and the present indicative to express a habit.
Jejparlerai quand vom aurez fini. I shall speak, when you
have done. J'ouvre la louche quand Je parle. I open my
mouth when I speak.
See avoir, ttre, chanter, choisir, etc., Part II.
EXERCISE.
Our father {has) said that we would have another servant so6n
—They Would not {have) (be) come;^^. if they had not received
our letter.— -If he hadVound nobody, he would have (be) gone ta
his fnend's house.—If thou hadst more (of) friends thou wouldst
be more happy.— We would have (be) gone ^7. to our uncle's, if
we had received a/, good /. leUer.— You shall soon have no more
(of) money.— These boys will become (be) idle, pi, when they
48 VEKBS USm INnaEOOAIIVEW with N0U^8.
have (shall have) «o »o« (of) Iessons,_At what / o'clock
(hoar) will you be at my uncle's — Fr„„ „ij • '"•'•<' "'O"*
He (-»;il ^>.^ ^ 1, II V ; s.— How old is your cousin ?—
be in my/ wom. *""""*— ^«" (*») ""e servant (that) I will
»af nlw.'^'' *"' "S"*™-" »' «"« Miectires wii the nomis, in gender
ymGT-SIXli)ME LEgON.-TWENTY^lXTH LESSON.
T.B..S ^u,rU n™iiBoo.x.v^.v.c n.3 s™s«™„ _„««,
USED INTEW.0OAnVEL7 WITB NOUNS.
PBEMlEBE CONTOOAISON.-naST COMBOATION
What nl!!!"" •* '^''! '!"•'*"' <"»'J"g««»'' -Oi-g with «.
What precedes er is called the root of the verb « wiin «• ,
parl-er,
parl-antj
parl-ij
tnontr-etj
oubli-er,
ffdt-er,
ceas-evj
pret-eiTj
apporteTf
Inpinitivl! present.
PaESENT PARTICIPLE.
Past participle.
to speak,
speaking,
spoken.
to show,
to forget,
to spoil.
regular j
endings : 1
cTierch-erj
aim-erf
pens-er, (d)
port-er,
donn-ePf
^cout-eTj
to cease, to leave ofl.FrangaiSy
to lend. Anglais,
to bring. Allemand.
er.
ant.
6,
to look for. .
to like, to love,
to think (of)
to carry,
to give,
to listen to.
French, or man.
English, or "
VERBS USED INTEREOaATlVELY WITH NOUNS.
''. o'clock
ousin ? —
s.— Shall
ither has
as (shall
It) I will
in gender
49
ESSON.
— VERBS
ith
er
m the
love.
'0
man.
Kem. — If you want to make a verb interrogative, with a noun
fc. its nominative, the noun comes first, then the verb, and then
the personal pronoun of the same gen ler and the number as the
noun, as :
It'uvocat a-irilparlif Has the hiwjer spoken ?
With est^ que, the order of the words remains.
EstrcequeVavocataparUf Has the lawyer spoken ?
The words <fo, did, ioiU, shall, would, should, might And may;
are never translated into French; they answer to the terminations
of the different tenses of the French verbs : for, as in English,
they mean nothing without the verb, when used as auxiliaries to
it. For example :
Did you do that ? Avez-vous fait cda ?
Would you give it ? i« rftmneriez-WMs f
EXERCISE.
Do our p. masters show our jpl. (copy books) to our pi.
parents.—Does not this merchant sell three dozen of handkerchiefs
Jor one/, pound.— These horses belong to those gentlemen.—
We will leave off at one /. o'clock (hour!)— Wo always speak
French.— We clo not show our money to that bad man.— Why
do you not leave off ?— Do the generals love their yl. soldiers ?—
Did I forget this* old soldier ?— You never speak of your pi.
affairs ?— Do we love the children of the neighbour who has given
(so many) (of) apples to our ;)Z. "girls ?— They think but little of
(to) the^?. tasks that (ace:) they have to do.— Do these mothera
always speak of their p^. children^?, with pleasure ?— What have
you looked (for).— Have they thought (of) (to) my books ?—
Shall you always be (the) first ?— Has you*r neighbour sold his/,
house?— Would not those gentlemen be rich;)/, if they had
been as active ^?. as at present.
P 2
60
IxMPERPECT OF THE INDICATIVE, ETC.
VINGT-SEPTTl:MELEgON.-TWENTY-SEVENTH
LESSON.
SUR L'IMPARPAIT DE l'inDICAWF, LE FUTUB ET LE CONDITIONNEL -
ON THE IMPEBFECT OF THE INDICATIVE, FUTURE AND
CONDITIONAL.
SI
Terminations of the imperfect f I'
DE LA PREMIEBE CONJUOAISON.-OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
SING. PLUR.
«««. 1. tons.
are always: " 1 ^* **"' 2. iez.
[ 3. ait. 3. aient.
These answer to the English v,as or were with present partici-
pie ; or to did, used to, with the verb ; as
II mangeait lien, dormaitde mhne, et travaillait le moms gu'il
. pouvait. ^
He Wi<, or rfa eat well, slept as well, and used to work as
little as he could.
IDIOMS.
It est une Jieure. It is one o'clock.
Quoi encore ? What else ?
Dans quelle rue et d quel numiro demeurez-vous ? In what
street and at what number do you live ?
Monter une pendule. To wind a clock.
Metarder. To be slow.
Avancer. To go fast.
Mettred la voih To set sail. Elle retarde. It is slow
Mis d la voile. Set sail.
EXERCISE.
How much (of) money will you give to the pi poorp?.-I
would think of (to) your ^Z. affairs and of (to) mine /. J if T
were not so idle.-If I spoke as often as you, I would speak
d . - J, — ...... ,„ngy ywUi ^t. jsnoes to the shoe-
nuu a ciocK.
j In speaking of watches, clocks.
•1 V-B*^
VOCABXJLAIRE.
61
maker?— The physicians spoke Srd pL of my cousin who was
very ill.— We often looked for our pi friends.— If I had known
that this m. knife belongecf to you, I would have said that I
had found your knife.— My pi. children did not like (the) /.
study; they (used to play) a great deal.— Thy cousin (was
looking) for his m. hat, wten we (are) left ^?.— That m
people*, loved the^r (its) King.— Formerly (I used to like) (the)
m. play, but now I* like (the)|>/. books.— At what time did you
carry this m. book to your uncle ? — Did you (use to) live in that
place ?— Were you speaking of him or of her ?— Did the En-
glishman lend that stick which ace. he had, to those who, nom. asked
Sd. pi (to) him? — Were you thinking of (to) me, when I (am) arri-
ved ?— Were you living at (the) m. number forty-five, when you
were here ? — Was not this clock slow ? — No, it was fast- — Did you
(use to) forget to wind it every evening before going (of to go) to
(the) bed ? — Excuse me, we were setting sail, *as the m. other
boat arrived.
VINGT.HUITli:ME LEgON— TWENTY-EIGHTH
LESSON.
VOCABULAIRE.
chant-erj
to sing.
dans-er,
to dance.
Jou-evj
to play.
porter,
to carry.
hldm-ery
to blame.
dijeun-er.
to breakfast.
travaill-er,
to work.
pleur-er,
to weep.
entr-eTj
to come in.
din-er,
to dine.
trouv-erj
to find.
demand-er,
to ask for.
men-fir.
--7
to take lead.
quelque part,
some where.
dcmeur-er.
to dwell, to live
ill
f ^' i
'III
!
5a
VOOABULAIRE.
To play (on the) vioJin,
To play (on the) piano,
To touch (of the) piano,
le drop, m. the cloth.
Jotter du violon.
Toucher du piano.
n
la jmte, f the flute.
la guiiar4, f. tha guitar.
comment
noir,
importer.
2
how?
black.
to be, to do, to
carry oneself.
by ca^ng! *' ^^^^ ^'"'" '' """'""' '" ""^^ *'"^' " P^"°"«
Menez cette demoiselle d Uglm, Take this young lady to church.
Portezce» habits chezhmimr. Take these clothes to the tailor's.
Comment vous portez-vous f \ ^°^ ^^ ^^"^ ^"^ ^
(. How do you carry yourself?
Je me parte bien. P ^"^ ^'^"•
(. I carry myself well.
Comment se porle votre ami ? \ ^""^ '*' ^'*"'* ^"^"^ ^ M^ ?
( How does your friend carry him-
EXERCISE.
How long has he dwelt in the /. same city ? I do not know
^I would give a/ new/ flute to that child, if he played well ~
Would you lend ten shillings to your friend, if he had not any
(of) money ?— I live at my aunt's—What do these glasses cost*?
-Will your servant carry all m.V this m. cloth ?—He does not
live here any more— Do you still live here ?-Do you sing— My
brother was singing, my sister was playing on the m. piano, and
we were dancing— If you are always idle, you will always be
poor— Do your pL sisters listen to their pi. masters, when they
m. speak ?-Why do you cry ?-.Because the master (has) said that
I was very naughty— We generally dine at half past five (hours)
and we breakfast at half past seven (hours) in (of)* the m. morn-
mg— This m. violin costs one/, pound and *a half/, and this /
flute half »i. a./, pound. *
V£BBS OF THE SEOND CONJUGATION.
58
VINGT-NEUVtEMB LEgON.— TWENTY-NINTH
LESSON.
VBRBES DB LA SECONDE C0NJIT0AIS0N.--VBBB3 OP THE FIRST CONJU-
GATION.
to finish.
Infinitive. -| C Jin-ir,
Present PARTiciPE. K ^^^l \ Jin-issant, finishing.
Past PARTICIPLE. J *^»d-g«^ \jin-i^ ^^^^
What precedes (ir) being the root and ir the ending, it will
be easy to recognise the different terminations as given in the
verbs. See Choisir, Part II.
ag-ivy
pun-ir,
chois—iTj
ohe-ivy
bdt-ir,
rempl-ivj
pdr-ir,
to act.
to punish,
to choose,
to obey,
to build,
to fill, fulfil,
to perish.
f oUir requires (d) after it
Nous oMissons d noire maltre-
■I
We obey {to') our masters.
Vers, towards, physically.
Envers, towards, morally,
l Devoir y m. (noun), duty, task.
Cet enfant se conduit lien envers This child behaves well (to-
ses maitres
Us vont vers la rivilrcj
wards) to his masters.
They go towards th€ river.
EXERCISE.
Every body was always pleased with (of) me. — Formerly I
used to work well ; I never used to play with mj pi. friends; I
never was punished by my pi masters.— -This /. nation would
love their (its) King, if he were (had) more right.— I have built
three houses , it (this) is enough. — When will you take your
sister to the m. ball. — I will choose the^Z. best m. pi books.
They would be (have) right, if they punished the lazy pi boys
(Not anything) is always translated by (ne) before the verb and
rien after or before ne and the verb.— One does not give any-
54
VEBBS or THB THIRD CONJDOATWN.
thiDg to these poor pi. 8oldiers.-Which m. violia wonU you
oW ?_He would have fiaished today, if he had not been idle.
-lh« rich man (.s bnilding) builds (some)^^. castles and (some)
pi ho«ses.--Which „. pi. gooim.pl. books hare you chosen »?.
There « to httle (of) wine in these bottles.-Does this boy oWv
(to) h« masters ?_We do not build U pi., because we have not
any (of ) money.-! never punish that young man, because he is
Jiways dihgent-These gentlemen do not always fulfil 3d.pl.
their J)/, duties. ' "^
TKENTIEME LEgON.-THIKTIETH LESSON.
VEHBKS B. LA .BOISIEME CONaooilSON.-y.KBS 0. IHB THIRD CON,..
CATION.
Infinitivb,
paesbnt participle,
Past paeticiplb,
aperc-evoir, to perceive.
conc-evoiTf
evoir. 1
evant. j^ Regular terminations,
w. J
aperc-evant,
to conceive, -^r. conc-evant,
to receive, rec-evant,
to collect taxes, perc-evant,
to deceive. d6c-evani,
■J . (id owe.
' ( to be to. a-evantf
rec-evoirf
perc-evoirj
ddc-evoir,
perceiving.
conceiving.
receiving.
collecting.
deceiving.
owing.
aperj^-Uf
€ong-u,
PAST participles.
perceived,
conceived,
received
perg-u,
dig-Vf
<'^u»
collected,
deceived,
owed
VERBS OP THE THIRD CONJUNCTION.
55
KBxM.—Verbs ending with cevoir, take a little mark under the
(f) before the vowels o, u, to make the c soft.
8ed. conjugation given in the Part II.
The French have another way of making a verb interrogative,
it is by placing est^e que or est-ce qu\ before >, tu, il, elle, nousj
vous, lis, ettes on; or before any nouns followed by the verb ;
and est<e que will answer to the English do, did, etc., as :
(Est-ce que) nous devons partir ?
( .^ ) we (are to) (set off.)
Are we to set off ?
Est-ce que cet homme Juste a fait son possible?
Did that just man do is best ?
EXERCISE.
At what f. time (hour) (were we to set off) this m. morning?
—All m.pl. those m. pi. who have 3r<f. pi received (some) pi.
presents from the king, have been well recompensed ja^— The
generals would collect ^rd. pi. the dues ( droits') of the King,
if they were more honest jp/.— It m. *is not so fine m. &b that m,
which (ace.) I had yesterday.— I find that this m. black m. cloth is
is not so fine m. as that m. white m. cloth. How much do you
say that this m. cloth costs ?— It m. costs one /. pound a (the)
/. yard.— If this was for me, I would choose (this one) m.— Would
you receive as much (of) money as that merchant, if you gave
(some) m. cheese, (some) m. bread and (some) /. meat to the
soldiers and (to the) sailors of the King ?— (I was to set) off (I
ought) to day, but I was not ready.— I would give a m. piece of
ham to that child, if it was good.— I would receive that m. money
with pleasure.— Do you perceive something in that/ room ?
it!
h
' !i
Q»
VERBS OF THB FOUETH CONJUNCTION.
TRENTE-ET-UNIEME LEgON.— THIRTY-PIRST
LESSON.
VHBBES DB LA QUATRIKME CONJUGAISON.—VBBBS OF THB FOURTH
CONJUGATION.
vend- rCf
entend- r«,
attend- re^
descend- re,
rdpond- re,
rend- re,
perd-
pend-
INFINITIVB, re.
PRES. rARTICIPLE, ant.
PAST PARTICIPLE, «.
to sell. v^nd-
to hear. entend-
to wait for. attend-
to come down, descend- ant,
to answer. r4pond- ant.
ant,
ant,
ant.
re,
re,
to return,
to lose,
to hang.
rend-
perd-
pend-
ant,
ant,
ant,
Hegalar termina-
tiODS.
selling.
hearing.
waiting.
coming down.
answering.
returning.
losing.
hanging.
answered,
returned,
lost
hanged.
PAST PARTICIPLES.
vend- u, sold. ripond- u,
entend- u, heard. rend- u,
attend" u, waited for* perd- u,
descend- u, come down. pend- «,
Trouver, to find, with comment, means how do you like :
Comment trouvezrvous cela ? How do you like that? never
comment aimez-vcms.
Comment aimez-vous, would be used in the sense of : how would
you have something prepared, as :
Comment aimez-vovs le Iceuf .? How do you like beef ?
Aux oignons ou d VhuUe ? With onions or oil ?
Yoler, to steal. | pendre (d.)
Yoler, to fly in the air. J to hang (from.)
(Verbs of the fourth conjugation will be found in the Grammar, Part II.)
Veebs of the fourth conjugation.
67
VOCABtJLAmE.
te villagty m.
le mur, m.
laporte, f.
lejpriXf m.
ia musiqite^ f.
d la mode J
tfe€ village. cUleZj go,
the wall. veneZf come.
the door. vrai, m. t;rate,f.true.
the price, prize.viVtf, quickly.
the music doucement, slowly, gently.
fashionable. Jin, m. Jine, f. fine, (in texture)
vert, m. verte, f.green. depm's, since.
•fris-content, very much pleased, d^, since, from.
If they do not arrive this morning, they will arrive to-morrow.
These pictures hang Sd.jal from (at) the wall.— Who has hanged
his m. hat from (at) tho m. waM.— I will answer in (a few) pi.
days.— Have you already answered (to) his pi letters ?— Yes,
and I have received two letters from our friend William, who is
in (at) Paris.— Where do you go ?— If I was not ill, I would
come down. — ^Why did you not wait ? — We (are coming) come
down and my sister also.— These children never answer, Sd. pi.
when they are very much pleased jo?.— What has your neighbour
lost ?— You walk very*slowly.— We do not look for anything,
because we have not lost anything. — We (have been waiting)
have waited for more than (of) an /. hour.— The *pl. other pi.
merchants in (of the) m. village sell drd.pl. their cloth very dear.
— The tailor (has) said that {the) m. green is no more fashion-
able. — How do you like tliis m. cloth ?
f
I
m
x^
58
>mi
VEBB8 Of THi MBST conitJu&ttatl.
TREx\TE-DEUXII:me LEgON-.-THmTY-SECOND
LESSON.
,,„, ,^*'-^*'^' ^^<^ »<»*= ^JSKBB or THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
■■■*■■ 3 #*..^ 3 -
Verbs ending with cer wa^ger in the infinitive, ,
Those ending with {c&) take a cedilla voder the (f), when
that (c) comes before (or, a.)
Those with (^cr) take (e) mute after the ^7), when that (^)
comes before (a, o), as :
Mv8 pronon(g)on8f W^ pronounce.
^ i' J3 -^0M« parto^(c)on«, We share or divide.
to: eat.
taccHTeot.
to change. ,.,v
to share, divide,
to protect.
'^'^mmencerj to begitt, ^ymimgerj
■ effdcer, to erase, strike out. corriger,
rinceTf to rinse. changer,
, avancer, to advance. partager,
placer, to place. protiger,
prononcer, to pronounce.
• VOCABULAIRE..M.U .>/.u ::,.;
motj m. the word, chiefly written, parmt, among^ (more
parole, f. the word, speech, flpoken.[thantwo) in the midst of
\la
legree, m. the greek, entre,
le souveram, the sovereign, mi'eux,
le prince, the prince. atitrement,
Vitude, f. the study. hien,
Tinnocence, f. the innocence, connaitre,
le latin, m. the latin.
between, among,
better (more well.)
otherwise,
well or very.
to know, to be
acquainted.
savoir, by learning, to know.
la Ugne, f. the line.
Je connats, I know. Je sats, I know.
Connaitre, cannot be followed by que : aavotr. can :
Je aais qu'il est arrivi, I know he has arrived.
tSRBS Ot tHE i-lBST 0ONJUi(6ttON.
m
%9
Je connais cela or je aats cela; though with a different
meaning.
Kem. — After mieuxj autrement, plus, moina ; the French
use the particle ne hefore the verb, as :
// icrit mieux qu'tl ne jc>arle, He writes better than he speaks.
EXERCISE.
They buy something every day for their ^/. children who
(nom.) are at (the) /. school — J^ese men and (these) Women
change (their) (of ) stockings every >?: day pi. ; they are very
rich J)?. — The weather in (of) this m. country changes Very often.
—They have written better, adv. than they (ne) have spoken.
—The pi. English pronounce (the) m. Greek better, adv. than the
French ; but they do not pronounce (the) Latin so well— The
pi. English pronounce (the) m. Latin otherwise than the French.—
Rub out all/, pi. these lines.— The servant has rinsed all m. pi.
thepl. glasses.-*The bankers change (some) m. silver for (some)
m. gold. — God protects our country and (our) King. We will
begin our lesson, when our turn (comc«) (will come,) otherwise
we will not hegin.— At what/ tim'e (hour) will you dine ?—
Don't erase this/. Kne. We generally divide (that which) see p. 36
(ace.) we have. — When will the master correct my / task ?
When he (hast^ done) (shall have done) my book.— My sister
understands (the) m. Greek and (the) m. latin.— Thep/. French
do not pronounce all /.pi their pi. letters.- We never correct
the exercises of our pi. children.— The study (of the) m. Latin is
difficult.
60
^VflRBB OF THE FIBST OONJUOATION.
TRENTE-TROISli^ME LEgON.— THIRTY-THIRD
LESSON.
The following :
ipeleTf
to spell.
fipdle
appeUr,
to call. •
appelhf
altdeVf
to put horses to.
attelUj
diteleVf
to unyoke.
ddtelle,
Jeter,
to throw.
jeite,
I spell.
double their or (<) before the mute syllable («, m, c, ent.)
The following : .
achever, to finish fachlve, I finish. *
peler,
acheter,
peseff
lever,
mener,
»e lever,
to peel. piile,
to buy. achite,
to weigh. pise,
to raise. Ihve,
to take, (lead.) mhne,
to get, up, rise, il se live ;
Do not double the
consonant, but take a
" ( ^ ) grave accent over
the (e), preceding a
mute syllable.
These others change the (<^ into (i), when before a mute
syllable :
eqtirer.
to hope.
fetpire, I hope.
cider,
to yield, give up.
cide.
exagirer,
to exagerate.
exagire,
modirer.
to moderate.
modire,
possider,
to possess. '
jposside.
rigler,
to regulate.
rigle.
rigner.
to rule, reign.
rigne,
prSfirer,
to prefer.
prifire ; and
i
VERBS or THE FIRST OONJUQATION.
61
payer^
ploifevy
ennutfetf
envoyetj
essayeTj
easuyeVf
employer^
effrayer^
neltoyerf
ahoyer,
to pay. j€ pate J T pay. "
to bend. ploiey
to tire, weary, enuui'e,
to send. envoie
to try. eisaie.
to wipe. euuiCf
to employ. emploiCf
to frighten, effrait^
to clean. atitoiey
to bark. ahoie,
Change the (y) of Uie
infinitive into (Oi
when before (e, e» c,
en<,) called mute.
(See No. 88, Part II.)
la colirej f.
le dS/autf m.
la /brtune, f.
Vamitiif f.
la larvMf f.
la sage88€f f.
la/aute, f.
VOCABULAIRE.
the anger. en co/irc,
defect, fault, en difautj
the fortune. par amittSf
the friendship, la canne, f.
the tear. le ehemxny m.
the wisdom. la /ourcheitef f. the fork,
the fault, the la mairij f. the hand,
mistake. lepoingj m. the fist.
in a passion,
at fault.
in a friendly way
walking stick,
the road.
TRENTE-QUATKlilME LEgON.— THIRTY-FOURTH
LESSON.
SOME OR ANY, WITH NOUNS.
Some or anyj generally represented by c?m, cfe, lay de V des ; is
often changed into (rfe), when there comes any qualifioative adjec-
tive before the noun, or again if the noun, taken in a partitive
sense, is governed by a verb negative, without regard to gender
or number, as :
J'ai d^excellentes poireSf I have excellent pears.
Je nQ% inns de inoireB^
I have no pears.
6a
VERBS OK- THB HEST COJf JUNCTION.
le concertf m.
le thidtrCf m.
la place, f.
^a mer, f
larivihre, f
lefleuve, m.
?«» saisonSf f.
VOOABULAIRE.
the church. ^i, t^i^/inge, f.
the concert. a^concertf
the theatre. aw ^A^^/rc,
place, square, aw W,
the lake. /c« mow, m.
the sea. /««&;/««, m.
the river* /e«^mo„«, m. the fishes,
do (larger.) le^prunes, f. the plums,
the seasops. le^piches, f. the peaches.
the prohibition. ,
at the conqerjt«
afe the theatre*,
at the ball,
the luonthil.
the oenturleiB^
'eau^-vie, t. brand,, (»«<«, o/M^^^,' „j„„ ^^.^
Jecroi.sue,ui, I think ao. A fc «.<,.•,, I bolieye so.
A crousuenon, I thini not. Ji le vm^ bi,^, I ,iU, j ^^
Spell thi. «.. word if you plewe.-Whj, do you throwyour/
pen ?_B«o.use j< (she) is not good ^-Our m^ter is ia (» pasi
s.on) b«ca«s,,*haye not done our ^i tasks to.3.y.-Vhere
do^ that ™. road lead (,„)._I hope that you will have muoh
(of) pJeasnre u. (at) the/. country.-Call my dog which (nm.)
(/or) the shoes that I h»™ b«ught^. the other d.,.^The)7
wudom ,s , «. gift of (the)/. n.t«re.-His writing is very fine
V ; i,ouie iearneu^,._(The) /. apger la a m. bad defect.—
We try (to) (of) please (p/^.V,) (to) those whom («..) we love
-Do you prefer (the) m. oofiee to (tl,e) «. tea ?_I like both
S^Zl r H*:^ T f^-^"^ ^ yo- CO-"/ wipe W
j^. tears ?-H«,she beei» naughty / ?_No Sir; somebody has
thrown som.eth,„g („aer) (on the / head.)_R„Ie your (copy
book), you don't write straight._How many (of) rfenoh boiks
have you G7.0 .'-This/ river is filled/ with (of) water'nd
PERSONAL PRONOUNS "WHICH PREOEBE VERBS.
63
I
(of) fishes J it (she) is very large /i — A m. lake is sometimes
less broad tban a/, river.— The seasons of this m. country are
very short/ pi. ; because the winter is the/, longest/ season.
!
TRENTE-CINQUIEME LEgON.— THIRTY-FIFTH
LESSON.
PRONOMS PERSONNELS QUI Ps£»EDENT LES VERSES
PERSONAL PRONOUNS WHICH PRECEDE VERBS-
•1. ^'''-' - '
me, me, to me. * lui, to him, to her.
te, thee, to thee. en, of it, of them, of him, of
«, himself, herself, to himself, her, some, any j with verbs.
to themselves.
nouSf us, to us.
V0H8, you, to you.
leitr, to them.
Jl me voit,
Je te parlCf
Elle seflatte,
. Je lui donne cela,
Elle y pentey oi tf
y, to it, to him, to them.
ley him, it. ii
la, her, it.
/e«, them.
He bees me.
I Speak to thee.
She flatters herself.
I give her that.
She thinks of it.
2.
Two pronouns before the verbs :
me le, or la les; it, himj her, them j to me.
te le, or la, les ; it, him, her, them j to thee. [selves
se le, or la, les ; it, him, her, them ; to himsoJf, herself, them-
nous le, or la, les; it, him, her, them ; to us.
vous le, or la, les ; it, him, her, them ; to you.
64
PERSONAL PRONOUNS WHICH PRECEDE VERBS.
le lut'y or leur ; it, to him ; to her, to them.
les hit, or leur ; tbem ; to him, to her, to them.
la luiy or leur; it; to him, to her to them.
Ilmeleprete, He lends it to me.
Vous le lui avez envoyi. You have sent it to her.
3.
m^en ; some to me. nouz en ; some to to.
ten ; some to thee. vom en ; some to you.
^en; some to himself, one- lui en; some to him, to her.
self, herself, themselves, leur en ; some to th«m.
lUenenvoie, He sends some to thee.
Ilnousendonne, . He gives some to us.
Mus lui en donnon^, "We give some to him.
M leur en donne. He gives some to them.
The above personal pronouns, whether thej follow or precede
verbs, suffer no change, except :
mele la les '\ ^^^^^ r^e,fe,^^«; mot, it, him, her, them; tome
tele, la, leg, \ \ le, la, les ; ioi, « to thee
nous le, la, les } °^-Se j ,^^ .^^ ^^/, J^^^ ^^ |« t^-
vousle,la,lesj into: {le, la, les ; vous, u ^^ ^^^^
when thej accompany verbs in the imperative affirmative, a»:
Donnez-moi, Give me.
Donnez-le m&i, Give it to me.
Vousmedonnez, You give me.
Vous me le donnez. You give it to me.
(See Personal Pronouns, Part IT.)
EXERCISE.
N. B.— Do no^forget that personal pronouns diould, as a general
rule, always precede the verbs by which they ai«e governed.
I will ask you (/or) some m. paper and (some) pi. pens.—
Uive me some (of )Vod m. sugar.— Have you bought '(some)
PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED WITH PREPOSITIONS, ETC.
6&
jr.
ee.
(of) large m.pl. knives, and (some) (of) small m.pl. pen-knives ?
Your brother has few (of) books*and still less (of) paper. — (The)
good pi. children love (the) good pi. masters. — How many (of )
houses have you ? — ^I have six (of them). — ^Do you rise early (/n)
them, morning? — We generally rise at six o'clock (hours.) —
If you have lost your pi. books, look for them. — This m. ink-
stand belongs to Joseph, give it to him back. — I have lent to
her some (of) good/, pi. pens. — Where has she put/", pi. them ?
I think that we have forbidden to him to (of) do it, but he is
very inattentive, he has not heard you. — Every time that I have
promised something, I have always given it. — If you look i/or)
him, you will find him (in my house.)
ii
im.
:ede
>me
nee.
s.
on.
ral
le)
trente-sixiI:me LE50N.— thirty-sixth lesson.
PRONOMS PERSONNELS EMPLOYES AVEC DES PROPOSITIONS, OU EN
R&PONSE AUX QUESTIONS, OU JOINTS PAR DES CONJONCTIONS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS USED WITH PREPOSITIONS, OR IN ANSWER TO
QUESTIONS, "OR CONNECTED WITH CONJUNCTIONS.
Nom. Aco.
. Nom.
Aoc
moiy
I or me.
nouSf
we.
US.
(oif
thou, thee.
V0U8,
you.
you.
im,
he, him.
euXf m.
they,
them.
elkj
she, her.
elles, f.
they.
them.
Je me promhie avec lui, avec eux et avec elle.
I walk, with him, them, her.
Toif Inr, file et moij non?. iron?. cL la campagne.
Thou, he, she and I will go to the country.
<!'■'
f n
uij
ee P.B80NAL PRONOUNS USED WITH PRBPOSITIONS, BTO.
«»«c, with.
contre, against
pour,
sans
»«»•, upon, derriire, behind.
sons, uirder. rfemn*, before, (in front of.)
wthout /' '1 "'""'' before, time, place/
without, opr^ after. jOcU c^tre, angiy with.
Come with her,
Venez avec c//c,
/Sbr/ea sans lui,
JBhirez cterrihre nous,
Marchez devaht eux,
Altez d ettes,
Go out without him.
Cotiiein behind uk
Walk before them.
Go to them.
uien. iue,l, read. %ngraU,t ungrateful.
(See Prepositions, Part II.)
T^. ^ EXERCISE.
Tofr^I^'Jl" *•"• ^"^ ""™'' '«f<"« ""^--Go with them.-
Ton do n. hte your sister ; y,„. («„ ,,,,„j, y
her.-Is th,, letter for you or for me ?_/, (she) i, forvou!!
Why ha, he^poken .gaiastthea, f-fc she*.„g^'„,u (.Z;;
them r_Th.s/. letter has heed written/ by himforW v
nieoe has been (at our house) to dav -ThT, Ivu- ''"— ^»"
tn /•^n>.».J.^ V ' "• — ^"'^ """'l IS unsrratefnl
to (^ towards) his master.— To whom AU .™ • "orawiui
\ i
BEJPLECTIVK AND UNIPEESONAL VSUBS.
■n'ir"'
67
trente-septiI;m;e LEgoN— thirty-seventh
LESSON.
VERBES r£fl£cHIS KT*tjNI-
PERSONNELS.
REFLECTIVE AND UNIPER-
SONAL TERBS.
se lever, to rise, to get up. se rijouir (de) to rejoice (at.)
86 laver, to wash oneself. i'hahiUer, to dress oneself,
sepromenerf to take a walk. se coucher, to go to bed, to lie
ie hater, to hasten, tp hurry, «'a«»€oiV, to sit, [down,
to be mistaken. se diptcher, to make haste,
to rest pneseli B*affl,iger (de) to grieve (at)
tp be, to do, to s*amuser, to amuse, enjoy
«e. tromper,
se, reposer,
se porter.
carry oneself.
se dishq,hi'ller, to undress oneself.
(For Reflective verbs, see Part II.)
ilpleut, it rains or is raining,
ilgile, it freezes.
il neige, it snows.
il arrive, it happens.
il/qutj his requisite, necessary.
II fait chaud,
II fait humide,
Ilfaiifroid,
II fait sec,
11 fait heau temps,
II fait mauvais temps,
II fait de lapluie,
Il fait du soleil,
II fait des Eclairs,
II fait bon marcher.
U tonne,
il ddgUe,
il grile,
il tombe,
oneself.
it thunders,
it thaws,
it hails,
there falls.
It ia warm.
It is damp.
It is cold.
It is dry.
It is fine weather.
It is bad weather.
It rains.
It is sunny.
It lightens.
It is good walking.
It is bad walking.
II fait mauvais marcher.
In speaking of the changes of the weather, the French inva-
riably use the verb/atV« in the 3rd singular.
68*
REFLECTIVE AND UNIPEBSONAL VERBS.
'^^ soon. le lever du soleilf sun rise.
iard, late. le cyucher du soleil, sun set.
le clair de lune, moon light, au clair de la lune, by moon light.
d la clartd de la chandelle, by candle light.
EXERCISE.
Good morning (day) Sir, how do you do ?-— Very well I thank
you. — How have you slept (the) last/, nigkt — Were you dressed
when I (came in) (am come in). — I was dressing myself, for (car)
I knew you were waiting (for) me.— Will you take a walk with
me ? — ^With pleasure. — Where will you go ? — Let us go to (the)
church. — Does this road take to (the) church ? — No, it takes to
the m. castle. — ^When the boys are diligent pi do they (take a
walk) with their ^/. teachers ? — ^Yes, the good pi and diligent
pi boys are always glad pi to (of) take a walk with their pL
teachers. — Make haste and we will amuse oursoHas in the garden
with our cousin, who (is) arrived from (his) journey. — He will
relate (to us) a great many (of) stories.— We will listen atten-
tively. — Have the servants yet washed the linen which ace. I had
put in the m. basket ? — Yes, they have washed it— Why do you
grieve (so much) ? — ^You go to bed too late and you get up also
too late J if you continue so, you will never be well. — You (are
mistaken) ; we always go to bed at nine o'clock (hours) and we
rise at the m. rising of the m. sun.
trente-huitiI:me le^on.- thirty-eighth
LESSON.
grander f
conseiller.
to scold,
to advise.
apporter
porter^
f to bring
\ to carry.
le matelasy m. the mattress.
les ofeillers. m. the pillows.
le traversin, m. the bolster.
'€S i-tTdpSf m. tiic sheets.
REFLECTIVE AND UNIPEttSONAL VERBS.
69
souhaiterf to wish for, or to Ze« servietteSf f. the towels.
disireTf to desire. le hots-de-lit y m. the bedstead.
le savon, m. the soap. les essuie-mains, m. the towels.
::■ I:
la; 1;
leltt,m. the bed. lefeu,
un incendie, m. a fire, conflagration.
the fire.
promiij promised.
dS/endUf forbidden.
chaque/oiSf every time.
bien des/ois, many times
Tout ce qui est, nom.
Tout ce quefaiftiCQ.
Faire, to do, make, perform.
emprunl^f
voulUf
quelque/ois,
une/oiSf
borrowed,
wished for.
sometimes,
onoe.
All that which is.
All that ir^tc/t I have.
Faites du/eu, Make a fire.
FatteSf do, act, make, perform. Faites unbon/eu. Make a good
Le desseiUf the design, intention. [fire.
J'ai dessein de sortir.
My intention is to go out.
Lit — 1 have (the) intention to go out
EXERCISE.
Behabk. — ^Mind the place of Pronouns.
You (are) always (scolding) yourpZ. servants. — ^He brings me all
m. ». (that which) ace. I want. — ^Doyou wish me a (the) good m.
morning (day) or a/, good /. health. — ^The soaps that we have
bought 2?^. are very good m. pi. — All that which you do, you do
it well. — ^Do you intend to (of) carry the towels into my/, room.
The/, servant/, has forgotten (jto) (de) give me (some) j>l. nap-
kins and (some) m. soap. — She forgets many times. — What
would you advise (to him) to (de) do ? — ^I would not advise (to)
him any thing. — ^The m. bedstead is new m., but the mattresses m.
are not new pi. — ^Tell (to the man) to (de) make a m. good m.
fire, for (car) (I am cold.) — ^Every time (that) he comes into my
/. room, he always forgets to (de) bring me all that which I want.
— ^There was a great fire (not feu) yesterday ; did you see it ? —
No, I was in (to the) m. bed«
1 1-
70
,-Jii,iia'r4s;-.
SUB QUELQUES IDIOMES pRANCAia QUI PRifiiSENTENT
D'ASSEZ GRANDES DIFPIOULTfiS
THK Dn-FERBNT MEANINGS OF TO Take .'
1. Will yott take me to the play, I don't know the way.
Voulez-vaus me conduire au thidtre, je n'en connau pas h
2. Next time you come, bring Laptochaine fois que voi^ vien-
your sister. drez (amenez) voire sceur.
8. Take him by the arm. Prenez4e par h hras.
4. Take those books to him, he Portez4ui ces livres ; il en a
wants them.
6. Take that away.
6. Take the horses away.
7. Bring this to me. ^
besoin.
JEmportez cela.
JSmmenez les chevaux.
Apportez-moi ceci.
OF OUGHT, SHOULD, ETC.
1. He ought to have been pushed, 11 await dH Stre punt,
f ^l '^'S^y^^'^^^m ttat. Mufourionspu le/aire.
3. IshalUaye to tell him of it. Jl j^udra quejelelui dise.
4. You should speak otihetwise. fi>Wi deiriezpa^ei^ aUtrement.
OF TO MARRY :
1. They say W win' never i9n tfi^^^^^^^
., "»"7- jamais.
2. ^twasourBislopwhOmar- C'est ndtrs mque ^ui les a
nedthem. mari^s.
3. He married a vciry pfetty J^ « ipousS une iths-jolid de^
yoting kdy. , moiselle.
OF TO KNOW, TO HAVE JUST, TO BE ABLE, TO ENABLE :
1. Bo you know hehas arrived? Savez vous quHl est arrivi ?
2. 1 know thfi o\t-xr of T"'"f4n*'f» • 1 .--,--•- f •" -. ~.
J "" •*^'>'*v"6o, a/c tw/inwis ta ?7i«e ae Toronto •
it is well laid out. ette est bien ali^nic
71
8. fie lias JQSt done it.
4. He had jast lise d, wh enl
came. . . "^
6. Where did you leave otf ?
6. I can do it. .;. ,
7. I am able to do it.
8. I will enable jou to do it.
9. We will accomplish it.
11 vient de le/atre.
11 venait de se leveVf quand
J'entrat.
Oil en iles vous rettS f
Je puts le fairt,
Je suis dm$me de lefaire,
Je vous mettraid mime de le/atre
Nous en viendrons d bout.
OF TO WT, TO MEAN, TO SET, TO LONO:
1. That fit» you. , Cela vous va.
2. I mean that you are wrong. Je veux dire que vous avezratson.
3. It is raining. II phut or ilfait de la pluie.
4. That man has set this house Cet homme a mis le feu d cette
on fire. maison.
6. I long to see you again. 11 me tarde de vous revoir.
OF TO BEAR A GRUDGE, TO LOOK :
1. If you bear I>r. Sangrado a
grudge, write against him.
2. Don't trouble yourself, ^_
3. That boy always disturbs the
class.
4. Loo^atbim.
5. Look at your watch.
Si vous en voulez au Docieur
Sangradoy Scrivez contre luu
JVe vous donnez pas la peine.
Ce gargon dirange toujours la
classe.,
Hegardez-le.
Hegardez d voire montre.
., ,.^ OTHER IDIOMS :
1. I have cut my hand. . Je me suis coupi la main,
2. You turn your back to him ; Vous lui tournez le dos ; que
how rude I c' est rude!
3. She has sore eyes. Elle a mal aux yeux.
1. He uaS^ sore foot. II a mal au pied.
6. I have a headache. Jai mal d la lite or fax un mal de tile.
lit
t i
i
h
•72
THE FOLLOWING SUBSTANTIVES HAVE ONE SIGNIFICA-
TION IN ONE GENDER AND ANOTHER IN THE
OTHER GENDER.
1 MASCULINE.
FKMINIKE. ' 1
^: aide,
eoche,
assistant.
aide,
tasas KJM't.
coach.
eoche.
sow.
; enseiffne,
midshipman.
enseigne.
sign, sign board.
foret.
gimlet.
fortt.
forest.
garde.
guard, keeper.
garde.
guard, keeping.
!' guide.
guide.
guide.
rein.
hymne,
poem.
hymne.
hymn, (at church.)
livre.
book.
livre,
pound.
manche.
handle.
manche.
sleeve.
manceuvre,
labourer.
manxuvrt
!, manoeuvre.
mimoire,
bill
mdmoire.
memory.
mode,
mood. I
mode.
mode, fashion.
movie,
mould.
moule,
mussel. ^
mousse.
ship boy.
mousse,
moss, [charity.
ceuvre.
performance.
oeuvre,
work, deed^ of
office.
duty, service.
office.
pantry.
page.
page, attendant.
page.
page (of a book)
paralMe^
comparison.
parallUe,
parallel (line.)
pendule.
pendulum.
pendule.
clock.
piriode, period, highest ^omt.piriode.
period, (sentence.)
poste.
post, situation.
poste.
post-office.
pourpre.
purple, (color.)
pourpre.
purple, (dignity.)
sentinelle.
sentinel, (name.]
1 sentinelle.
sentry, (a soldier.)
somme.
nap.
somme.
sum, burden.
souris.
smile.
souris,
mouse.
tour,
turn, trick.
tour.
tower.
trompette,
trumpeter.
trompette.
trumpet.
vague, vagueness, vacuum.
vague.
wave.
! vase.
vessel, vase.
vase.
slime, mud.
i
veil.
voile,
gall nnnyfla^
"^3
kOC!f8 IftKDINXINa WITH AN h ASPIRATE, THAT IS TO BAT, IBKFORX WHICH NO
ULiSION NOI APOSTROPHE CAN TAKE PLACE:
halleur,
bragger.
haut-lois, m.
hautboy.
hache, f.
ax.
hennir,
to neigh.
hagard,
haggard.
havre-aac, m
. knapsack.
haity f.
hedge.
hiraut, m.
herald.
haillons, m.
rags.
^hirot, Xh.
htto.
haine, f.
hatred.
hiriiser,
to bristle.
hair,
to hate.
hitre, m.
beech.
hairtf f.
hair-shirt.
heurter,
to rap to knock.
hdler.
to be sun burnt
„ hihou, m.
owl.
halle, f.
market place.
hideux,
hideous.
halkharde, t
halberd.
hiirarchie, f
, hierarchy.
halte, f.
halt.
hisser,
to hoist.
hamac, m.
hammock.
homard, m.
lobster.
hanche, f.
hip.
honte, f.
shame.
hannetorif m
tree beetle.
horde, f.
horde.
hanter,
to frequent.
Jiotte, f.
basket.
harangue, f.
oration.
houblon,m.
hops.
harrasser,
to harass.
houiile, f.
pit-coal.
harceler.
to harass.
houlette, f.
sheep-hook.
hardes, f.
clothes.
houppe, i.
tuft.
hardi,
bold.
houppdande, f.
great coat.
hareng, m.
herring.
houspiller,
to worry.
hargneux.
surley.
houste, f.
horse-cloth.
haricots, m.
kidney-bean.
huche, f.
trough.
harnais, m.
harness.
hu4e, f.
hooting.
harpe, f.
harp.
huguenot, m.
huguenot.
harpon, m.
harpoon.
humer.
whale, swallow
hasard, m.
chance.
huppe, f.
hoopoo. [up.
hater.
to hasten.
hure, f
head, head of
hausser,
to rise.
hvrler.
houl. [hair.
haul,
haut.
hussard, m.
bussaf.
Remarks. — * Heroine, hSro'iame, here que; the h of which is 091 aspirate.
Although it is i n AMm.
abbrjeviations
oocuRBma in thb dictionaet of thk Fimgr VAV.t
abs mean « absolute.
aco do accusative.
a<Jj do adjective.
adv do adverb.
art do article.
« 'J
coDj do conjunction.
dem. ord. adj... do demonstrative adjective;
d. pro do demonstrative pronoun.
f* dq feminine.
™ do masculine.
J^'Orf. do masculine or feminine.
m. or f. pi do masculine or feminine plural.
™' s do masculine singular.
^ do noun.
nom do nominative.
P« adj do possessive adjectivci
P- part do past participle.
prep do preposition.
pj^o do pronoun.
P' pro- do possessive pronoun.
s do singular.
V do verb.
V. irr do verb irregular.
V. refl do verb reflective.
1st. c do first conjugation.
?"d c do second conjugation.
Srd c do third conjugation.
4th c do fourth conjugation.
DICTIONARY.
A or an (u(/.
Act, (to), V.
Actire, adj.
Advance (to), v.
AdTim (to), V.
JEmiliuB, n.
Affair, H.
Africa, n.
After, prtp.
Againit, prqp,
Age,n.
Aged, a^J-
Ago.
Aneeable, adj.
Aim, n.
All, acy,pro.
All men.
Alone, of^.
A longtime, adv.
Alphonso, n.
Also, adv.
Always, adn.
America, n.
Amiable, atifj.
Amuse, (to) «.
Amongst, prat.
Amusing, adj.
Amuse ouesdf (to)
An, adj.
And, con.
Anger, n.
Angry with, ac(j.
Animal, n.
Answer, n.
Answer (to), v.
Answereid, p. part.
Anj, art., pro.
Any body.
Appear, v.
Apple, H.
Are, t.
Are called.
Arrive, (to) v.
Arrived, p. part.
As, conj.
As, as, adv., conj.
Ask, (to) for, V.
As much, adv.
Aa many, adv.
As, in comp.
un, m. une,/.
aglr,
actii; m. active,/.
avancer, 1*^ e.
oonf-ellier, l$t. c,
Emile, m.
affitire,/.
Afrique,/.
aprds.
centre.
Age, m. sidcle, m.
Ag6, m. 4g6e,/.
11 y a.
agr6able, m. or/.
but,m.
tont,m. e./. tou« m.
tous les hommes. [pit.
seul, m. e,/
longtemps.
Alphonse, m,
aussl.
toojours.
Am^fique,/.
aimable, m. or/.
Jamuser. l«(e.
Is'amuser, v. tx/L
parmi.
amnsant, m.
V. s'amuser, v. rrjl,
un, m. une,/.
et
colore,/.
fiU;h6 centre, m
animal m.
r^ponse,/.
r^pondre, 4th. c. reg,
r^pondu.
/du, dela, de V, des
\ art., en. pro.
quelqu'un. on toUh ».
parattre, 4M c, irr
pomme, /.
sont.
s'appellpnt, Sdpl.
arrivor, IHe.
arrive, m. 6e,/.
comme, conj., que, c.
Aussi, acfv. que, con.
Asis.
demander, lai c,
\ autantv
que.
A short time, adv.
Attentively, adv.
At, prep.
At uult, adv.
At my house.
At that man'*.
At whose house.
At the time. wben,<i(fv lorsque,
pen de tempfl.
attentivement.
k,(^he>.
en d^faut.
cbes moi.
ches cet homme.
chez qui.
At that time, adv.
At present, adv.
Aunt, n.
Authority, n.
Autumn, n.
Average, n.
Away, oofj.
Bad, adfj.
Badly, ado.
Ball, n.
Bank, n.
Banker, n.
Baric, (to) v.
Basket, n.
Be fond of (to), v.
Be slow, (to) V.
Be away, (to), v.
Be well (to), r.
Be mistaken (to), v.
Be able (to), r.
Be to (to), t».
Be, (to) r.
Beard, n.
Beautiful, at^f.
Because, conj.
Become, (to) v.
Bed, n.
Bedstead, n.
Beef, n.
Beax,p.part.
Beer, n.
Before, prep.
Begin, (to) V.
Beginning, v.
Begun, p. part.
Behind, prep.
Behave, (to) v.
Believe, (to) v.
Belong, (to) v
Belongs, r. Sd. t.
alors.
k present, maintaiumt
tante,/.
autorittf. /.
•ntomne, m.
moyenne,/.
{parti, m. ie,/.
absent, m.
mauvaia, m. e,/.
maL
bal, m.
banque,/.
banqnier, m.
aboyer, Itt e.
panier,m. corbeDIe,/.
Aimer, lU c.
retarder, Itt e.
£tre absent. StrepartL
se porter bien, ik c.
se tromper,
pouvoir, ad e. irr.
devoir, 3d e. irr.
6tre, 4th e., se porter,
barbe, /. [rf*.
J beau, m bel, m. Mile,
1 /. joli, m. e,/.
Sarce que.
evenir, 2d c. irr.
lit, m.
boisde-lit, m.
bceuf, m,
it6, never changet.
bidre,/.
avant. devant.
commencer, \st c.
commencement, m.
commence, m.
derii^re.
f se conduire, 4th e. irr
s _- * — i-j -
croire, ^h c. irr.
fStre, *th c, apparte-
\ nir, 2d c. irr.
•et, appartient.
f
n
tolCTlONARV.
Belong, V. Sd pi. sont, appartlennent
Bend, (to) v, ployer, 1st e.
Berlin, n. Berlin.
Beflt (the), ac{j., adv. le ireillenr, le mletiz.
Best, adj.
Better, adj.
Better, adv.
Between, pr^.
Big, a^;.
Black, adj.
Blame, (to) v.
Blind, cuilj.
Boat. n.
Boarding, n.
Body,
Bolster, n.
Book. n.
Bookseller, n.
Boot, n.
Borrow, (to) v.
Both, pro.
Bottle, n.
Bought, p. part.
Boy, n.
Brandy, n.
Brave, adj.
Brenlifasr, n.
Breakfast, (to), v.
Bread, n.
Bring, (to) v.
Bring me.
Broad, adj.
Brought, p. part.
Broken, p..pari.
Brother, n.
Bruwel!), n.
Build (to), V.
Built, p. part.
Bull, n.
Business, n.
Butter, n.
But, cnnj.
But littie.
Buy, (to), V.
By, prep.
By moon light.
By candle l^ht^
Calais, n.
Call, (to) V.
Called (to be), v.
Came (I).
Came back, (!)•
C.rr,m.
Cuuada, n.
Caudle light (by), v.
Candle, n.
Car", «.
Carpenter, n.
Carriage, n.
Carry, (to) v.
le meilleur, m.
meilleur, m.
mieux.
entre.
grand, w. gros, m.
noir, m. e,/!
bl&mer, l$t e.
avengle, m. or/.
bateau, m.
pension,/.
corps, m.
traversin, m.
livre, m.
libraire, m.
botte,/.
emprnnter, 1<< c.
n'un et I'autre, torn
I les deux.
bouteille, /.
achetS, m.
gargon, m.
eau-de-vie,/.
Brave, m. or/.
dejeuner, ^.
dejeuner, Ittc.
pain, m.
J' apporter, Itt e.
( amener, Ist. c.
apportez-moi.
large, m. or/.
apportd, m. amen6.
cas86, m.
frdre, m.
Bruxslles.
bfitir, 2d c. reg.
b&ti, m.
taureau, m.
affaires, /. _p?.
beurre, m.
mais.
ne guhre.
acheter, 1st e.
par.
au clair de la lane.
h la chandelle.
C.
Calais.
nppeler, 1st c.
s'appelle, 3d s.
s'appellent, 3d pi.
s'appelor, lit c.
je vennis, vins.
je reveuais, revlns.
je puis, peux.
Canada, m.
& la chnndcUe.
chandelle,/.
soin, m.
charpentier, m.
Toiture,/.
porter, Ist c
Castle, n,
Cst,n.
Cease, (to) r,
Ceiling, n.
Century, n.
Chair, n.
Change, n.
Change, (to) v.
Charity, n.
Charles, n.
China, n.
Check, n.
Cheese, n.
Cherry, n.
Chest, n.
Child, n.
Chocolate, n.
Choose (to), V.
Chosen, p. part.
Church, n.
Civility, n.
City, n.
Class-room n.
Clever, «/;.
Clock, n.
Cloth, n.
Ccat, n.
Coflfee, n.
Cold, n.
Cold, ou^*.
Cold (to be).
Collect, (to) V.
Come, (to) V.
Come back (to), v.
Come down (to), v.
Come in (to), v.
Comes, V. 3a s.
Conceive (to), v.
Concert, n.
Conflagration, n.
Continue (to), v.
Copied, p. part.
Copy. d.
Copy, (to), V.
Copybook, M.
Corner, n.
Correct, (to) v.
Correct, adj.
Cost, p. part.
Cost, (to) v.
Country, n.
Courage, n.
Cousin, w.
Cravat, n.
Create (to), v.
Cried, p. part.
Created, p. part.
Cruel, adj.
Cry (to), V.
Cup, n.
chftteao, iA.
chat, m.
cesser, 1st c.
plafond.
circle, m.
chaise,/.
changement, m.
changer, 1st c.
charity,/.
Charles, n».
Chine,/.
frein, m.
fromage, m.
cerise,/.
coffre, m.
enfant, m.
chocolat, n^,
choisir, 2(2 c. reg.
choisi, m.
figlise,/.
civilite,/.
ville,/.
classe,/.
habile, m. or/.
pendule,/. horlog^t/
drap, m.
hahit, m.
caf§, m.
froid, m.
froid, m.
avoir froid.
pcrcevoir, 3d e. reg.
venir, 2d c. irr.
revenir, 2d c. irr.
descendre, ith e. ttg,
entrer, 1st c.
vient.
concevoir, 3d c. rtg.
concert, w.
incendie,/.
continuer, 1st c.
copie, m.
copie, /.
copier, 1«< c.
cahier, m.
coin, m.
corriger, 1st c.
correct, m.
coGtfi, m.
codter, 1st e.
pays, TO.
courage, m.
cousin, m. e,/. , ,
cravate,/. '
cr6er, 1«( c.
pleurd, crl6, m.
cree, w. e,/.
cruel, TO. le, /.
pleurer, l«t c.
tasse,/.
n.
Damp, at/;'.
Dance, n.
Pance, (to) i'.
humide, m. or /.
danse,/.
dnnser, Irt c.
.-I
DICTIONARY.
77
l)anghter, n.
Day, n.
Dead, adj.
Dear, adf).
Dearly, adv.
Dearer, ae^.
Dearest, ac^.
Deceive, (to) v.
DeceitAil, a^'.
Delightftil, ae(j.
Defect, n.
Design, n.
Desire, n.
Desire, (to) v.
Dey, n.
DtfHcult, adj.
Diligent, adj.
Dine, (to), V.
Dinner, n.
Dirty, €U^.
Disb, n.
divide (to), v.
Dj, (to), V.
Dog, n.
Done, «>. part.
Door, n.
Dover, n.
Dozen, n.
Drawing, n.
dresii oneself (to), v.
Dressed, p. part.
Dress (to), v.
Dress, n.
Drunk, p. part.
Drink (to^ v.
Dry, adj.
Dumb, adj.
Duty, n.
DweU (to), V.
fllle,/
Jonr, m.
mort, m.
cber, m. 6re,/.
cb&rement.
plus cher, in.
le plus cber, m.
tromper, 1st e.
trompeur, m. se,/.
charmant, dfiUcoeox.
dSfkat, m.
dessein, m.
d68ir, m.
dSsirer, 1<< e.
dey, m.
difficile, m. or/.
appliqu6, m.
diner, l«t c
diner, m.
sale, wi. or/.
plat, m.
diviser, partager,ls(e.
faire, 4<A cirr.
cbien, m.
fait, m. fini, ».
porte, f.
Douvres.
douzatne,/.
dessin, m.
B'hablller, so vltir.
habiil6, vStu.
habiller, vStir.
lobe, /.
bu, m.
boire, 4tt c* trr.
sec, m. s^che,/.
muet, m. moette,/.
devoir, m *
demenrer, 1st c.
Every time, n.
Every thing, i)ra.
Evil, n.
BjMgerate, (to)v.
Exercise, n.
Exercise (co) v.
toates los Ibis,/. pL
tout, m. «.
mal, m.
exagfirer, Itt c
tbMia, m. exercioe, i»«
exercer, 1st e.
m.
Each, adj.
Each, pro.
Each other, pro.
Earth, n.
Early, adv.
Easy, adj.
Easily, adv.
Eat (to), V.
Eaten, p. part.
Edward, n.
Eight, adj.
Eleven, adj.
Employ, (to) v.
End (to), V.
End, n.'
England, n.
English, n. or a^
Enough, adv.
Era8o"(to), v.
T^iirnnrt^ ji^
Evening, n.
Every, adj.
Every body, n.
Every day, n.
cbaque, m. or /. tout
chacun, m. e, /. [m.
I'un I'autre, m.
terre, /.
de l>onne benre-
facile, m. or/.
facilement.
manger, 1st c.
mang6, m.
Edouard, m.
buit.
onze.
employer, 1st c.
terminer, 1st ". flnir,
fin,/. [Mcreg.
Angloterre,/.
Anglais, m. e.f.
as8ez.
effftcer, 1st c,
soir, TO. soirCe,/.
chaque,wt.or/.tout,»n.
tout le monde, m. s.
to)is les Joui s, TO. pi.
F.
Fable, n.
Faithful, aeb\
Fall, (to) r.
False, aq;'.
Family, n.
Far, oav.
Far, a4j.
Fashionable, adj.
Fashionable^ adv.
Father, n.
Fault, n.
Fault, (at) adv.
Fear, n.
Fear, n.
Few, <u2;.
Few, adv.
Fewer, adt>.
Fifteen, ad/.
Fill, (to) t>.
Find, (to) V.
Fine, adj.
Fine, (texture), adj.
Finif>h, (to) t>.
Finished, p. psr^
Fire, n.
First, a<(;.
Fir.'tly, odw.
Fish, n.
Fist, n.
Five. ad/.
Flock, n.
Flour, n.
Flower, w.
Flute, n.
Fly, (to) «.
Fly. n.
Fond of, (to be), v.
For, con.
For, prep.
Forbid, (to) t>.
Forget, (to) v.
Forgotten, p. pa»A
Forty-flve, ac^.
Fork, M.
Formerly, adv.
Fortnight, n.
Fortune, «.
Found, p. part.
France, n.
Francis, n.
Frederick, n.
Free, aq[;
Fri^ezn (t<>), v,
French, n.
French, aefj.
FroMh, a<Hj.
Friend, n. cr adj.
Ikble,/.
fiddle, TO. or/,
tomber, 1st c.
faux, TO. Skvttg»,f.
famine,/,
loin,
dioignd, m.
j- ^ la mode.
pdre, TO.
teute,/. defiuit, ' \
en d^fitut.
peur. /.
crainte,/.
qneiquefl, m. wf. pi.
peu (de).
xnoius.
quinze.
remplir, 2d c. regf.
trouver, 1st c.
beau, TO. belie^/.
fin, TO. fine,/.
flnir, 2d. c. r^.
fini, fait, TO.
feu, TO. inoendie, m.
premier, m.
d'abord, premiere-
poisson. TO. [ment.
poing, TO.
cinq.
troupoao, m.
farine, /.
fleur,/.
flate,/.
^ oler, Itt 0.
mouche, /.
aimer, 1st c.
car.
pour.
d^fendre, 4M c. r<^.
onblier, 1st e.
oubli6.
quarante-cinq.
fourchette,/.
autrefois.
quinze jours, m.pl,
forttine,/.
trouv6, TO.
France,/.
Francois, m.
Frederic, w.
libre, TO. franc, M.
_«■.._ I.J .
Frang'jis, m.
frariQiia. m. n-aoc. m.
frais, m. fratche, /.
ami, TO. amie,/.
78
DICTIONARY.
Friendship, n.
Frighten, (to) r.
From, prep.
From whom, pro.
Fruit, n.
Fulfil (to), V.
amiti*,/.
effrayer, li( c, fUre
de, dds. [penr
de qni.
fruit, m.
remplir, 2d c. r^.
G.
Game, n.
Garden, n.
Gardener, n.
Gardener's wife n.
General, n. or acfj.
Generaliy, adv.
Gentleman, n.
Gentlemen, n.
Gently, adv.
Generosity, n.
Geneva, n.
George, n.
German, n. or o^'.
Get up, (to) V.
Gift,n.
Gilt, adj.
Girl, n.
Give, (to)«.
Given, p.jwrt.
Give me.
Glass, n.
Glovo, «.
Go, (to) V.
Go out. (to), V.
Go to bed, (to) v.
Go tast (to), V.
Goat, n.
God. n.
Gold, n.
Gone, p. part.
Good, otf;.
Great deal (a), adv.
Great many (a), adv. beaucoup,
Great while (a), adv. lonttemps.
jen, m.
jardin, m.
jardinicr, m,
jardiniere,/.
general, m.
gen^ralement.
moDsienr, m,
messieurs, pi.
donccment.
G6n6ro8it6,/.
Geneve, f.
George, m,
Allemand, m.
se lever, 1st c. refl.
don, m. present, m.
dor6, TO.
fille,/. ,
donner, lit c.
donn4, m.
donnez-moi,
Terre, to.
gant, TO.
aller 1«< c. ^rr.
sortir, 2d ? Vrr.
se coucher, i«i e,. r^i ,
avancer. lii c.
ch6vre,/.
Dieu, TO.
or, TO.
parti, TO. alI6, m.
bon, TO. bonne,/.
beaucoup.
Greek, a<(;.
Greek, n.
Green, adj.
Grieve, (to) v.
Guitar, n.
GustavuR, n.
grec, TO. grsc'jue,/.
Grec, TO. Grecque,/.
vert, TO.
fafaiger, ls<c.
■J. s'affliger, \st c. ^fl.
guitare,/.
Uustave, m.
II.
Had, p. part.
Uail, n.
Hnir, n.
Halt; n.
Half. od/.
llHlfpenny, n.
Ham. n.
Hamlet, n.
n;ir<d 77.
Hong from, (to) v.
Handkerchief, n.
Happeu, (to) v.
Happiness, n.
ou, JM. eue,/.
grele/.
cheveu, m.
mol(i6,/.
deuii, TO.
Fou, m.
jaaibon, to.
bameau, m.
niftiii./.
pendre, suvpendre.
niouohoir, to.
arrlvpr, 1st c.
bonbeur, m.
Happier, adj.
Happy, adj.
Hasten, (to) v.
Hat, n.
Have, (to) v.
He, pro.
He who, pro.
Head, n.
Health, n.
Heard, p. part.
Hear, (to) v.
Henry, n.
Her, p. a«y.
Her, p. pro.
Here, odr.
Here is, prep.
Her J I am,
Herselt^jjro.
Hers, p. pro.
High, adj.
Higher, at^.
Highest, ae^'.
Him, pro.
Himself, pro.
His, p. pro.
Hts, jp. ad/.
Home, (at) adv.
l.'onest, adj.
'J', pe, (to) V.
Horse, n.
Hour, n.
House, n.
How, adv.
How long, adv.
How much time,
lij w much, adv.
xiow many, adv.
How do you do.
How old.
How do you like,
Hundred, adj.
Hundredweight,
Hunger, n,
Hungry, a4j.
Hungry, (to be),
Slufl hearetit.
enreux, m.
se h^ter, Iste.
cbapeau, m.
avoir, 3d c irr,
il, lui, Sdperti
celni qui.
tete,/.
8ant6, /.
entendu, m.
entendre, 4t/i e. rtg.
Henri, m.
son, m. sa,/. 8eg,jpl.
elle, la, lui.
ici.
voici.
me voici.
elle-mSme, se, soL
le sien, rr.. etc.
haut, TO.
plu- haut, n.
le plus haut, m.
le, lui.
lui-m@me, se, sot.
le frien, m.
son, TO. sa,/. sea, p2.
k la maison.
bonnSte m. or/.
esp^rer, Ittc.
cheval, m.
baure. /.
maison,/.
comment,
depuis quand.
adv. combien de tempi.
l-combien (de).
comment vous portez-
quel fi.ge. [vous.
/ comment trouvez-vous
( or aimez-vous.
cent,
n, quintal, m.
faim,/.
affttu^.
V. avoir faim.
I, pro.
I write, (v).
Idle, axlj.
If, cimj.
If you please.
Ill, adj.
Image, n.
Immortal, adj.
In, prep.
In it.
Inn passion.
In a friendly way.
Inattentive, adj.
Intend, (to) v.
Intellect, n.
Ink, n.
Inkstand, n.
I.
je, moi, lstper$.
j'6cris.
paresseuz, to.
si
s'il'vous plait.
malade, m. or/.
image,/.
immurtel, m. le,/.
dan!), en, ii.
y hefnrt the verb.
en colere.
par amiti^.
Inappliqu6, m.
{'avoir dussein de,
I'intentloii de.
intelligence,/,
encre,/
cnrrlm", to.
or
tlOTlONARY.
70
Innocence, n.
loquisitiTe, at^.
Iroii,n.
Is, V.
in called, r;
It, pro.
It, pro.
It is they.
It is.
Italy, n.
Its, p. pro,
Ittelt, pro.
•Tahiti n.
Jealous, adv.
John, n.
Joiner, n.
Journey, n.
Journey (to) ».
Kindness, n.
KiuK, n.
Kingdom, n.
Knife, n.
Knew. (I).
Know, (to) V.
Knoytn, p. part.
Ladt, ti.
Ladies, n.
Laid, p. payfc
Lake n.
Large, a<^'.
Larger, a<<;.
Last, adj.
Late, (to be), v.
Late, ot^v.
Latin, n.
Lazy, adj.
Lead (to) v.
Leaf, n.
Learned, adj.
Learned, p. part.
Leave, (to) w.
Leave oflF, (to) t'.
Left, p. part.
Lemon, n.
Lend, (to) v.
I^ent, p. part.
Less, luiv.
Lesson, n.
Letter, n.
Lewis, n.
Life. n.
Ligijl, a(^.
Like (to) t>.
Lilte, adj.
Lik(>d,p.j}art.
Line, n.
innocence, /.
curieux, m.
fer, m.
est, 3d pert.
s'appelle, 3d per$.
il, le, la, lui.
il, elle, ce, cela.
ce sont eux.
il est, c'est, 11 fait.
Italic,/.
son, sa, ses.
flui-mSme, elle-m^me,
\ BO, soi.
«r.
Jacques,
jaloux, m.ae,f.
Jean.
menuisier, m.
voyage, m.
voyager, 1st c.
K.
bontfi, f.
roi.m.
royaume, m.
couteau, m.
je connafssais, savais.
fsavoir, 3dc. trr.
( connaUro, 4th e. irr,
su, connu, m
dame,/.
dames, /. pi.
mis, TO. miae,/.
lac, m.
grand, m.
plus grand.
dernier, m.
6tre en retard.
tard.
latin, m.
paresseur, m. se, /.
mener, 1«^ c.
/euille, /.
savant, m. instnilt, m
J appris, m.
\ instruit, m.
laiRser, Itt c.
cesser, Itt c.
laise^,
citron TO.
prater, 1st c.
protfi, m.
moins.
le^on,/.
lettre, /.
Louis, TO.
vie /.
legeV, TO. leghTt,/,
aimer, Itt c.
pareil, m.
8im6, TO.
Hiine,/. .
Linen, n.
Lion, n.
Listen, (to), v.
Little, adj.
Little, adv.
Live, (to) r.
Lively, adv.
Loaf, n.
London, n.
Long, adj.
Long, oar;
Longest, ae{j.
Longer, adj.
Longtime, adv.
Loolt for, (to) V.
Looked for, p. part.
Lose, (to) t>.
Lost, p. part.
Louisa, n.
Loved, p. part.
Love, (to)T>.
Low, adj.
Low, advi
linge, m
lion, m.
tcouter, Itl e.
petit, m.
pen.
demenrer, Itt e.
vif, TO. Vive,/,
pain, TO.
Londres, m.
long, TO. longne,/.
longtftmps.
le plus long, m.
plus long, TO.
longtemps.
chercher, lit c.
cherch£, m.
perdre, 4th c. rtg^
perdu, nt.
Louise,/
aims, TO.
aimer, 1st c.
has, TO. se,/.
bas.
Madam, n.
Made, p. part.
Magnificent, a4j.
Make haste (to), v.
Make, (to) v.
Man, n.
Many, adi?.
Many, a<^'.
Map, n.
Maple tree, fi.
Master, n.
Mattress, n.
Matter, n.
Me, pro.
Meadow, n.
Meat, n.
Merchant, r.
Metal, n.
Midnight.
Mild, adj.
Milk, n.
Mine, p. pro.
Minute, n.
Miss, n.
Misfortune, n.
Moderate, (^o), v.
Modest, adj.
Montreal, n.
Monny, n.
Month, n.
Moon, n.
Moonlight, n.
More, adv,
Morning, n.
Mftranr «_
Mortal, (k//.
Mother, n.
Mountain, n.
Much, adr.
Music, n.
M.
madame,/.
fait, fini, TO.
de toute beauts,
ae h&ter, lat c.
faire, 4th c. irr.
homme, to.
beaucoup.
plusieurs, pL
carte,/.
Arable, TO.
mattre, m.
matelas, m.
mati6re,/.8ub8taDce,/.
me. nioi.
prairie,/.
viande,/.
maruhand, m.
metal, m.
minuit.
doux, TO. douce,/.
lait, TO.
le mien, m etc.
minute,/.
mademoiselle/.
malheur, to.
mod^rer, Itt c.
modeste, to. or/.
Montreal, to.
argent, to. monnaie,/.
niuis, TO.
lune,/.
clair de lune.
plus.
matin, TO. inatln^e,/.
mortel, TO.
mfire,/.
montAgne, /.
beaucoup, forty
musique,/.
Sd
biorioNARlf.
II
Mnatard, Mi
My,j>. adj.
Napkiw, n.
NftMon, n.
M«UKhty, adf.
Neiobbodr, n.
Never, adv.
NeWfOcO'-
New-found land, n.
Niece, n.
Night, n.
Nine, adj.
No one, pro.
No, adv.
No more.
Nobody, pro.
None, pro, \
None,a4;., /
Noon.
Not, adv.
Not anything.
Not any body, pro.
Nothing, adv.
Now, adv.
Number,
Obey (to), •.
O'clock, n.
Of. prep.
or the.
or it, them, him,
her, pro.
Often, adv.
Oil. n.
Old, aey.
On. prfp.
Onee, prep.
One, adj.
One, pro.
One.
One time.
Ontario (lake).
Or, t-on.
Orange, n.
Other, a«y.
OtherwiM. adv.
Our, p orf^
Oun,m /Kc*.
Owe, * »#v ».
Oyitw, ».
PEArH. n.
Paid tor. p fmrf.
Painting, •.
jrnil', w.
Pafwtr, n.
Purenta, n.
Parlor, i».
moutarde,/.
mon, m. ma,/. mes,p(.
serTiotte,/.
nation./.
m6chaut,m.maurais./
voisin, m. voiaine,/.
Jamais.
nouTsau, m. n«uf, m.
Terre-neuve,/.
ni^ce,/.
nuit,/.
neuf.
f pas un, peraonna, m.
\ auonq, m.
non,ne paa.
ne plus.
personne m.
pas un, m. aucnn, m.
nul, m.
midi.
ne pas, ne polni.
rien, m.
person ue, m.
rien.
maintenant; k present
nombre, numdro, m.
ob^lr, 2d c. reg,
beure, /.
de.
du, de la, de V, des.
- en, htfcn't Hit verb.
Bouvent.
huile,/.
■vieux, m. vieille. /.
sur. [ag6, TO.
uno tois,/.
un, tn. une/.
on.
un.
une fois, /.
Ontario (lac).
ou.
orange,/.
autre, w. or/.
autrement.
notre, s. nos, pi.
ie notre, m., etc.
devoir, 3d c. irr.
hull re,/.
p#che,/.
pay6, TO.
taMeau, m.
pftii'e, /.
papier, m. Journal, m.
parents, m. p^
Mton. TO.
Park, M.
Paris, n.
Part,n.
Pay a visit (to), v.
Pay for (to), v.
Peace, n.
Pear, n.
Peel (to), V.
Pen, n.
Pancil, n.
Penholder, n.
Pen-knife, ».
People, n.
Pepper, n.
Peroeive (to), v.
Perform, (to) v.
Perish, (to) e.
Physician, n.
Piano, n.
Picture, n.
Piece, n.
Pillow, n.
Place, n.
Placed, p. part.
Plate, n.
Play, n.
Play, (to) r.
Please (if you), v.
Pleased with, adj.
Plosse (to), r.
I'leasant, adj.
Pleasure, n.
Plum, n.
Polite, adj.
Politeness, n.
Point, n.
Poor, od;.
Poorest, oflj;.
Poorer, adj.
Position, n.
Possess (to), V
Poht-Offlce, n.
Pound, n.
Powerful, adj'.
Praise (to), v.
Pray (to), »,
Present, n.
Present, ad;.
Prefer (to), v.
Pretty, adj.
Prettier, cuij.
Press, n.
Price, w.
Prince, n.
Prize, n.
Prohibition, n.
Promise, n.
Promiw; (to), v.
Pronounce (to), v.
Protect (to), V.
Puddinpt, n.
Put (to), V.
Pi;t,p. part.
Ptti horses to (to),
pare, ni.
Paris, mt
partie,/.
rendre une visite.
payer, \tt e.
palx,/.
poire./.
peler, Isl e.
plume,/.
crayon, m.
porte plume, m.
can if, TO.
gens, m.pl. monde, m.
poivre, TO. [on, pro.
apercevoir, 3d c. r^.
fill re, ith c. irr.
p6rir, 3d c. rt^f.
m^decin, to.
Piano, TO.
tableau, to.
morreau, m.
orellier, m.
place,/.
pluc6, mis, TO.
assiette, /.
th^fitre. TO.
jouer, l<t c.
s'il Tons platt.
conteut de, m.
plaire, 4(A c. trr.
axr^able, m. or/.
plaisir, m.
prune./.
{honnSte, to. or/,
poll, TO.
Poiitesse,/. amitl^,/.
point, TO.
pauvre, to. or/,
le plus pauvre, to.
plus pauvre, to. or/,
place./, position,/.
pDFB^der, 1st c.
poste, /.
livre,/.
puissant, m.
louer, 1st c.
prier, Isic.
don, TO. present, m.
present, m.
preferer. Ist c.
joli, w. jolie,/.
plusjoli, TO.
armoire,/.
prix, TO.
prince, to.
prix, TO.
d6pense,/.
prouxesse,/.
promettre, ith c. irr.
pronouncer, \st e.
protfi-rer, \st c.
pnuding, m.
mt-ttre, Uh c. irr.
mis, m.
«. attelor, l«l c.
tHiftilONART.
ti
<i.
I, m.
pro.
s,/.
m.
irr.
-QVAHTER, n.
Quebec, n.
Quetin, n.
Qnick. ae^'.
<2uickly, ado.
auart, m. trifiwstre, «.
u^bec. nu
\lf. OT.
vlte.
R.
plnie,/.
lever. Itt c
lire, 4<A c. tVr.
lu. m. e.y.
raiHOD./.
recevoir, Srdc. r<p.
re^u.
Raiit, n.
Rttiso. (to), V.
Rea«l (to), V.
Bead, p. part.
Reason, n.
Receive (to), i'.
Received. J), port. _-,_.
Recoinpt4ued,p.}Hir^.r^uompei)8£, m.
Rt-d, ad;. —
Refuse (to), v.
Refnual, n.
Regulate, (to), V.
Rfjoic- (to), t).
Tlelations, n.
Relate, (to) V.
Remain (to) v.
Rest (to), V.
Return (to), V,
Returned, jp.j»ar<,
Rich. a<{j.
Richer, adj.
Richest, o^'.
Right, n.
Right, (to be), v.
Right, adj.
Rinse (to) v.
Rise (to), V.
Rising, n.
River, n.
Road, n.
Room, n.
Rub out, (to), t».
Rule, (to) V.
rouge. .TO or/.
refut^er, Iti e.
refuH, m.
r^gler, Istc.
86 rejouir, af re^.fi^.
parents, m.pL
racontor, Iste.
restor, lite
se r^^ poser, IH e. re/L
{retourner, lit c
revenir, 2d a. irr.
retourn6, revenn, m.
riche, to. or/.
eus ricbo. m. or/,
plus rkfae, m,
raison./.
avoir raison.
juste, TO. or/,
lincer, ls< c.
se Jever, ist c rtfi.
lever, m.
riviere,/, fleuvtsm.
cheniin, m.
chambre,/.
effacfr, Lj't c.
r^jjler, Ist-c.
8ad, arf%
SHid,^.^rt.
bailor, n.
Salt.
Same, <u^.
Bay (to), v.
School, n.
Scold, t.
Sea, n.
Beitson,
See (to), «.
Seen.p.jxtrt.
Bell (to),
-Set Hail, (to), v.
Set out, (to), V.
Set off, (to), V.
• ••— s- i~'~
^nd (to), «. .
Servant man, n.
trlste, TO. or^
dit, m.
m&telot, tik.
«el. TO.
QtSme, TO. or/,
(jlire, 4^( c. if*/*,
^w.le./. peAsiotajjl^
gronder, Ut c.
mer, /.
saison,/
voir, 3rd c
vu. TO. e,/.
▼endre, 4(A«. inq^.
mettre k la voik.
I partir.
anvoyer, 1«< o. irr,
domestique, m.
Serraat girl, n.
domestique,^
Servaut »iirl, ».
st^rvaut«),/i
. Seven, a^'.
sept.
^ t^hare, n.
p»rt,/.
She. jwo.
elle.
She who, pro.
celle quL
Sheep, n.
brebis,/. moatoa, m.
Sheet, n.
ftuille,/, drap, m.
I^hilling, n.
cbt4in, TO.
Ship, 71.
vaisseau, to.
Sliirt, n.
chemise,/.
Shoe, n.
eoulier, m.
t'hoemaker, M.
cordonnier, to.
Short, adj.
court, m, court e,/.
Short time, w.
peu Je temps.
^how (to),
niontrer, Ittc
Si. k, oc^'.
malade, to.
i^ilver. n.
argent, to.
Si are. pnp.
depuis.
Sing, (to), t».
chanter, Iste.
Sir, n.
moi...ienr, to.
Sihter. n.
Boeur./.
Sit down (to), V.
B'asseoir, 3d c. irr.
Six, at^".
six.
SlHte, n.
«rdol86./
Sltpt jOLjiaff.
dormi, m^
Slowly, adv.
lentfment
Small. a<^;
petit, TO.
Suin llcr, of^.
plus petit, moindre.m
Smallest, at(j.
fie plus petit;, le moin-
\ dre, TO.
Snow (to), v.
neigvr, Ut c.
Snow, n.
Hfcigo,/.
So, adtj.
tA.
So,jwo.
le. TO.
Soap, n.
Sold, p. par&
savon, TO.
Vrtidu, TO.
Soldier n.
eolda .TO.
S> much, ad«.
tant. (dd)
So many, ado.
taut, (de.)
Some. t/d/.
quelque. to. or^
SonsH, art.
du, (ie lit. des.
FoiuHtimes, adv.
quelquefuis.
Souitt to me.
ni'en.
ScMBo to thee.
t'en.
SoiQe to hiHiself.
B'en.
Some where, adv.
quelque part
Something.
quelqud chose, m.
Con, n.
Ills. TO.
Soon, adv.
binii(6t.
Sorry, a<J(^.
f&ch6, TO.
Soul, n.
fiuie./.
Soup, n.
BOUp*',/.
SovtreigB, w.
*iuver»in. m.
Spain, n.
Esi«gne. A
Sparrow, n.
moiue ,,
Speak (toy, «.
pailer. i$( ^
Speech, n.
dlHcours, m.
sp*^n (<-.•>), H,
*pf ler, IH c.
Spc.i! (tc> ».
g/ir r, iirf c
6p<-len. ?> port
pv 16.
t-pxin, vi,
cuill6re,/. ,
Spriitg^ ».
printempa, m.
SfBwre, n.
place, /,
Square. a<(/.
ton 6, TO. ,
Steal (to), V.
voler, Ut c.
ill
If;
J *'
Pi
I
82
SIOTIONARY.
\m
Stick, n.
Still, "'**».
St. Lawrenee, n.
Stout, adj.
StockiDg, n.
Strange, a^}'^
Street, n.
Story, n.
Straight, oar/.
Striica out (to), v.
Study, n.
Study (to), «.
Suffar, V.
Summer, n.
Sun, n.
Sunny, <idj.
Sun rim, n.
Sunatit. n.
Sweet, &dj.
Table, n.
Tailor, n.
Tall, a</>
Take (to), v.
Take away, v.
Take a walk (to), v.
Taken, p. part
Task, n.
Tea, n.
Tear, n.
Tell (to), V.
Ton.
Than, eon.
That, pro.
That, dem. ot^
That, dem. pro.
That, con.
, Thaw (to), V.
Th^t one, dem. pro.
That which, pro.
That which, pro.
The. r.rt.
Theatre, n.
Thee, pro.
The one, df-m. pro.
The one who or
which, pro.
The one wbom or
which, pro.
Their, p. adj.
Theirs, p.pn.
Them, pro.
Them wbom, fjro;.
Then, adv.
There adv.
Thnru in, are, v.
Tliure is.
Thure arc.
These dem. adj.
Theffp. pro.
bAton, m,
*ncore.
St. Laurent, Mr
gros, m. groase, /.
• bas, m.
f (tritnge, m. or/.-
t t'lnguller, M
rue, /.
fhiotoire,/.
\conte,m.
droit, m.»,f,
rayer, 1st e.
fitude,/*.
itudier, lj< e.
Sucre, m.
■oleit, m
du Boleil.
le lever du soleih
le coucher du soleil.
doux, m. douce,/.
tablp,/.
tailleur, m.
grand, m. giande,/
{mener, Itte.
prendre, Mh e, irr.
emporteK lite.
se promener, Itt e.
pris, m. men6. m. ^reJL
devoir, m.t&die,/.
th6, M.
larme,/.
dire, 4M c.
diz.
que. -
qui, que.
oe, cet, eettoi cesi
oeiui, celle, eelat
que.
dei^eler, lite.
ceiul-lit. m. cplle-lik, /.
celui qui, ce qui, nom
oelui que. oe que, aee.
le, la. r, les.
th6&,tre, m,
te. toi.
celui, celle.
1
celui qui, nom.
celui que, aee.
leur, m. or/
le leur, m., etc.
1«>B.
ceux que, m. oec-
alors.
Ih.
11 y a.
Toicl, il y a.
ilya.
ces.
Ua, eux, elles.
They are.
They who, pro.
Thine, p. pro.
ThiBK, n.
things, n.
Think of (to), «.
Thirst, n.
Thirsty, a«W.
Thirsty (to be); v.
This, dm. a^j.
This. dem. pro.
This one, dem. pro.
Those, dem. pro.
Thou, pm.
Thought of, p. part.
Three.
Throio (to), V.
Thunder, n.
Thy, p. acy.
Titcer, n.
Till, adv.
Time, n.
Tlri-d, adj.
To me, pro.
To the, arL
To, prep.
Today, adv.
To-morrow, adtr.
Together, adv.
Told, p. part.
Together, prep.
Too, adv.
Too much, adv. \
Too many, adv. j
Touch (to).
Towards, prep.-
Towel,
Town. n.
TrRcqnility, n.
Translated, p. part.
Tree,n.
True. a<^
Trunk, n.
Try (to), V,
Turn, n.
Two.
Twenty.
Us sont, Mr
C€fux qui, nt. notllf
le tien, m., etc.
chose,/.
elTets. m. pi.
ppnser Ik), lit e.
soif./.
altird, m.
avoir soif.
cff. oette. cet.
celui, celle, cerL
eelui-ci, m. celled, /^
ces, cenx, celles.
tu, toi.
pens4, m.-
trois.
Jtttttr, lit c
tonnerre, m.
ton. ta, tM.
tigre, m.
j usque.
temps, m.
las, m. fa'igu6, fn.
me, k mni.
au. 21 la, & r, anzr
&, chez.
aiijnurd'hui.
demain.
ensemble, ayec-
dit, m.
avec.
aussi, trop.
trop.
toucher, 1«< e,
vers, envers.
essuie-mains, m.-
▼ille,/
tranquillity,/-
traduit, m.
arhre, m.
yrai, m.
eoCFre, wi.
eosayer, Itf c;
tour, m.
deux.
Tlngt.
UsDER, prtp.
Uncle, n
Understand (to), y.
Uneasy, adj.
Ungrateful, adj.
Unhappy, adj.
Unyoke (to), v.
Upon. prep.
Ua, pro.
Us (to).
UuKeful, adj.
Usually, adv.
sous.
oticle, TO.
comprendre, 4th Cr
inquiet, m.
infrrat, m.
malheureux, fft.
d6teler, \Ae.
sur.
nous.
nous, k nous.
utile, m. or/.
ordinalrement.
Very, adn.
V.
I&grnmnfl, «. «7.
tn^ furt.
DlOTlONAay.
88
Vwy mnch, adv.
Veeael, n.
Tieana, n.
Virtuous, adit
VfoUn, n.
Tni«ge, n.
Tlnt^ar,
Visit, n.
Voyage, n.
Voice, n.
beancoup, fort.
Taioseau, m.
Vienne.
Tertueuz.
Tlolon, m.
Tillage, m.
TitMigre, m>
▼Islte,/.
Toyage, «.
Toix,/.
W,
WAFBEfl.
Wait for (to), ».
WAti. n,
Walk (to).
WalkiDg stick, n.
Want (to), V.
Warm, n. or adi.
Wash (to), e.
Watch, n.
Watered, p. pari.
Watchmaker, n.
Watch (to), V.
Water, «.
We, jwio.
Weary, adj.
Weather, n.
Week, n.
Weep (to), ».
WelKh (to), V.
Well. adv.
What, pro.
What time Is it?
—(that which), j)r.
When. con.
Where, adu.
Whether, oon.
Which, mm. pro.
Which, ace, pro.
TVhIte, cdj.
Who. j»ro.
Whole, eudj. pro.
Whole world (the).
paln-k-cacheter, m.
attendre, 4M c>
mur, ffl.
Be promener, \ti, e.
canne. /.
avoir besoin.
chaud, m.
later, \tt e.
mootre,/.
arros^, m.
horloger.
Teiller, 1st e.
eau,/.
nous.
las. m.
temps, m.
semaine, ^
pleurer, IH c,
peser, !<< c.
blen.
que. Quoi.
quelle henre est-il.
ce qui, ffom. ceque, ace.
quand, lorsque.
oii.
si, soit que.
qui.
que.
blanc, m.
qui, leqnel. m.
tout, TO. toute,/.
tout le monde.
Whom, pro. alt.
Whose, pro.
(At whose hotue).
Why, eon,
Wlckpd, acy.
Wirkedaesa, n.
Wlfe,n
Wild, a(V.
William, n.
Wind, n.
Window, n.
Wine, n.
Winter, n.
Wipe (to), ».
Wlse,a<^.
Wisdom, n.
Wish for (to), t>.
With, prep.
Without, prep.
Woman, n.
Word, n.
Work (to), t>.
Work, n.
World, n.
Worse, acy.
Worst, ao(j.
Worst, adv.
Write (to), V.
Written, p. port.
Writing, n.
Wrong (to be), v.
Tarb, n.
Year, n.
Tes, adv.
Yesterday, adv.
Yet, idw.
Yield (to), r.
You, pro.
Young, adi.
Young lady, n.
Your, p. aty.
Yours, p. pro.
que,qnl.
de qui. k qoL
chez qui.
ponrquol.
m^hant. tit.
mecbaneet^./. '
fiimuie./. 6pouse, /.
saurage. m, or/.
Oulllaume, m.
Vent. m.
fenetre,/.
■Vift, TO.
biver, m«
eft-uyer, 1<< e<
sage, TO. or/.
sagesse,/.
sonbalter, 1«< c
avec.
sans.
femme,/.
mot, m. parole,/.
travaiiler, lit c.
travail, m. ouTrage,«fk
monde, m.
pire, acfj. pis, advt
leplre.
lepls.
6crire, 4th c. irr.
<crit, m.
^criture,/.
avoir tort.
m^tre, to. aune,/
an. TO. ann€e,/.
onl, si.
hier.
encore,
e^der, Itt c.
Tons.
jeune,m. or/
demoiselle,/.
votre. t. vos. pi.
le vdtre, m< ete.
SECOND PART,
GRAMMAR .^G RAMMAIRB
OF LETTEKa^BES LETTRES.
ALPHABET.
A^ b, 0, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, q, p, q, t, s, t, u, y, w, x,,
A.
a witjiout any accent, is the t1;iir4 pc|C8PQ siqgt:(l(^ir QftUeiiu^t:
catlve of Avoir.-— II a, he has.
d with the grave accent, is a preposijkloQ meting iQj ai^
a in 4^ilty August, is, not to be heaxd,
B.
h at the end of words» h ^mm^ never heard> exoepib in p«o-
per names, and in the woid nadtmk, i:ehfittiQg<; 9rttn»&, Rhamb.
■ C.
c before o, o, u, also before Of cQnsQwmty sounds like ^
c having a cedillaj thus> (^) before the. vowels a, q, «, ta^es
the sound of s.
c after a vowel, sounds like k.
D.
d ai the end of a ward^ when the next begins with Vk voi:«l,
86
GRAMMAR.
d at the end of a word is silent, except in ««d, South ; and
also in proper names, David.
E.
c is mute or silent at the end of a word of more than one syl-
lable, and if there be no accent over it, table.
e in words of one syllable, has the obtuse sound of u in cut,
but; as ye, me, de, que, etc.
S with an acute accent, like a in date.
I with a grave accent, like ay in ray.
g something like the I, but longer.
(See page 9, Part I.)
F.
/ is generally heard at the end of words, except in the plural
nouns, hoeufs, oxen ; ceufs, eggs; although heard in feow/ beef,
ox J (xuf, egg ; their singular.
/ in neufj nine ; is silent if followed by a consonant ; and
like V when before a vowel, or silent h ; and also in .««/, when
ceuf is followed by an adjective, forming with it a compound
word ; as oeuffraU, fresh egg.
/ in cerfj stag ; is silent ; but is heard in serf, slave.
Qt.
g has the sound of s, in pleasure, before e, i, y.
g before a, o, «, is hard, as g in go.
g at the end of a word is silent.
g in vingt, twenty ; doigt, finger ; is silent.
gn partakes of the compound sound of y in yes.
g in gangrlne, the first sounds like k.
H.
h in the body of a word is never heard; it is used after the
letters, c, /, p, r, t.
eh before a vowel, sound like sh; but before a consonant,
like^.
GRAMMAR.
87
ch in words of Greek origin, before a, o, w, will st und like k ;
as chaos, chaos.
h when aspirate, requires ttiat no word preceding, should
be connected withit ; but if called silent, mute, tLe foregoing
letter or word, is pronounced upon it as if on > word. The
h aspirated will be seen at the end of First Part, page 73.
I, or I having two dots, (i) docs not form a diphthong with the
other vowels, as naif, artless ; pronounced like kn^e,
J.
j has the sound of s in pleasure, before all the vowels.
L.
/ as in English.
II liquid, something like y in you. So also the endings eil^
euil, ill, ail, etc.
I *is silent \nfih, son,.
M.
m after a vowel at the end of a word, is silent, except in
foreign proper names ; as Jerusalem.
m. before b and p forms with the preceding vowel, a nasal
vowel : comparaitre, combattre. See page 11, Part I.
N.
n at the end of a word or of one syllable, is generally silent,
and forms with the foregoing vowel a nasal sound. Page 11.
O.
o in Laon, a town ; paon, peacock ; faon, fawn ; sceur,
sister ; cosur, heart ; is not heard.
P.
p in the body of a word is heard ; but in baptime, baptism )
baptiser, to baptise, exempt f free ; comptSj account ; prompt,
' 'k
• >"• •'immmmmmrnKtm'
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
1.1
11.2
£ iffi E.12.0
6"
\M 114 11.6
i^6^'
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
4
\
\\
%
s
^
6^
^
g>.
%
sa
qRAHMJ^
lllli;!
quick ; sculpture; sept, seven ; JBqj)tiite ; domptevj, to oTcr-
come ; it is silent.
ph is pronounced like/, pharCf light-house.
Q.
q in coq, cock ; cinq, five ; sounds like le.
^ is silent in Coq-d'lnde, Turkey cock.
E.
r as in English.
r at the end of the Terbs of the first eonjugation is nol
heard ; hut in the second and third it is always. In words of
such endings ieVf er, the r is silent.
8 as in English j between two vowels sounds ]}^e, z.
8 at the end of a word is not generally beard, unless the
word has but one syllable.
s ending a word, sounds like z on the next word commen'
eing with a vowel or h silent ; mes en/ants, my children.
T.
t as in English ; at the end of words it is silent, except in
tiie following words : accessit ; brut ; chut, silence ; correcff
correct ; lest, ballast ; est, east ; suspect, suspicious ; suhit,
sudden.
ih, has no other sound than t itself.
ti in words ending with tU, tier, the t is hard ; also in tion
the t being preceded by an « .* question ; otherwise like *, pa'
tient : Still we say chrHien^ christian ; the i hard.
ti in \ :3rbs, before ons, ez, should be hard, except in haU
lutier, to stammer ; initier, to initiate.
n is generally silenjb ^|ler q.
V as ID English.
GRAMMAR.
V.
w.
89
w sounds like v ; but in Newton, it has the value of m.
X at the end of a word before the next with a vowel, like z ;
in the middle of a word, like ks ; at the beginning, like gz.
X in dix, [_ten ; six six ; when thej stand alone, sound
like ss.
Y.
y like i oviu
z as in English ; in the second person J^Jaral of y^|rljs it is
fililent, except if followed by a vowel.
The foregoing remarks should be considered more as a guide, thai^ as a
lesson.
ACCENTS AND OTHER SIGNS.
There are three accents in French.
The acute (').
Tl^e^raveCO. .
The circumflex (*),
There is an apostroph ('), taking the place of a letter under-
stood.
Diaeresia or trSma ( " ), or two little dots put over a vowel
The cedilla or crooked mark, placed under the (jj).
The hyphen thup (-), to connect word*
THEIR USE.
The ( ' ) is used only over the letter («) if hqard, and ending the
syllable ; as 6U, summer ; charmij delighted; aiid not followed,
by a silent syllable, as it would be inp^re.
I
..:!i:
90
GRAMMAR.
I I'
The 0) over a, c, u, only ; over d in ?d, there j and d, to, at ;
on account of Icif her, it, the ; and a has.
Over (}) \rhen it precedes a syllable that is mute, as pire,
father j mhre, mother ; also in accis, fit ; procis, law suit j «t^cc^s,
success ; dis, from, since ; on account of <fc«, some or any, of
the.
Over (A) in oA, where j on account of ou or.
Words ending with ge, take the ', and not the ^, piige, share ;
«tV^e, seat.
The (*) over a, c, t, o, «, lengthens their sound, or else shows a
distinctiou between two words spelt alike : JeHne, fast ; jeune
young ; t^, past participle of <airc, to be silent ; and tu, thou ;
crU, grown j cru, believed ; dH, owed, {tomdevoir; du, some, of
the ; mUr, ripe j wiwr, wall ; sHr, sure, sour ; sur, upon ; and
jpd, fed ; jpu, been able.
AFbSTBOFHE OB ELISION.
a, e, I, are the only vowels that can be cut off from a word.
No suppression or elision of vowels, takes place before the
words : otti, AtitViimc, huitaine, onze, onziime ; le huit du moiSf
the eight of the month ; le oui et le non, the yes and no.
Nor when the preceding monosyllable is not connected with the
next by sense, as:
La traduction de (ioi) n'est pas dificiUj
The translation of (ici) is not difficult But
Jeviensd'ki, I come from here.
Neither would there be suppression of (e) in Je in this ins-
tance :
Oit pourraiS'Je itre mieux que dans voire socUU?
Where could I be better than in your company ? because
it is not connected to ttre by the sense, as it would be in this
„--. . -•» -•- ,*»^*-.'-
GBAMMAB.
A.
91
(a), is sappressed only in la, article or pronoun, her, it, the^
before a vowel or h silent.
I.
(t), only in si, meaning if, only before il, he, it ; Us, they ;
i'il, if he ; sHh, if they.
E.
(e), is suppressed in the monosyllables : me, de, te, ce, que,
le, ne; me, of, thee, this, that, the, it, not : U m'aime, he loves
me ; qu*ea<e que c'est f what is it?
LORSQUB, PUISQUB, QUOIQUB.
But in lorsque, when; puisque, since, because; quoique,
although ; the e mute is cut off only before il, elle, on, un, une,
Us, elles ; lorsqu'il arriva, when he arrived.
ENTBE, PRESQUE.
In entre, between, and pres^ue, afmost ; when they form with
the next word a compound word : s^entr'aider, to help one an-
other ; un entr'actes, an interlude; presqu'Ue, peninsula.
QUELQUE.
In quelque, some ; only before un, autre ; one, other ; quei--
qu'un, some one ; quelqu' autre, some other.
JUSQUE.
In Jusque, until ; before ici, here ; oH, there ; d, to, at ; au,
at the ; Jusqu'ici,^ far as here ; jusqu'aujourd'hui, until to day.
For the sake of the euphony or sound, the (c) is suppressed in
the following words : grand'mire, grand mother ; grand'messe,
high mass; grand* chamhre, large room; grand'chose, great
thing; grand'peur, great fear; if used in the plural the noun
alone takes the plural.
1 i
»
n
Q^Au^A;p,.
OF THE CEDILLA.
The ( ,) is put under the c to preserve. to it the soft sound of
(«) before a, o, «, for we know that c without a cfidilla, befoie
those vowels has the hard sound of k ; fagadej facade j legorif
lesson, il perga he pierced.
OP THE DLERESIS OR TRifiMA.
The trima ( *• ), is placed over e, i, u, only, to avoid their being
pronounced in one syllable with the other vowels^ as nalfj artless ;
cigue, hemlock ; qqn,tiguS adjoining.
OF THE HYPHEN.
The hyphen or trait-d'union (-), is used to conpect compound
words, to show their close relation j mde-de-campf aide-de-camp ;
cAc/^<i*a?Mi;rc, master piece ; aime-t-il? does he like ? To show that
the pronoun (nominative, accusative or dative, going after the
verb,) belongs to that verb ; as donnez-le-moi, give it to me ; to
represent the suppression of a word : vingt-huil, twenty and
eight J also to show multiplication quatre-vingts , eighty.
What precedes should be consulted carefully, and learned at the same
time as th« reading, a way which will render the dry study of it less
i^ksoi^e.
FABTS OF SPEECH
There are ten parts of speech in French :
1. Noun,
It. Adyehb,
These vary „ ^
> in their 2- Pbeposition,
infleoUons. »' Conjdnoiion,
4. iNTERJEqTIOTSf,
2. Abticls,
3. Adjective,
4. Pronoun,
5. Ver]?,
6. Participle, J
, .. ARTICLE.
Th^ra.ia %n% one article aa ^ven with its gendera and number%
The (^^ole i9 the : le, m> s., JJif f. &, i«', m. otfi s., LES, m. or
f, pi.
(See page IS, 1st Part.)
OBAMMAB.
IX, DU, AU.
Xre, the J du, of the, some ; aw, to thd, at the ; are masculine
and siogular, and used before ihasculine nouns beginning with a
consonant or h aspirate : au fruity to the frdit ; le chevalj th6
horse ; du roif of the King.
ul, se la, a la.
ZOf the J de ?a, of the, any ; d la, to the ; are feminine ancL
mngular and used only before nouns feiuinine> beginning with a
consonabt or h aspirate : la reine the Queen ; A la flenr, to the
flower ; de la aaison, of the season.
x', ©B i', A l'.
L% th^ ; rffe r, of the, dome ; d l\ to th^i; are mHaottliM or
f«mitt!n6 singtildr, used befow a nouiti b^gi^btng with a vo#el or
h sildbt : VMnkini:, the m^ii j de ren/aHi, <tf the child ; d Vhu-
toitCf to t&e hi8tor!]r%
LES, DES, AUZ.
Ze«, the; <?e«, of the, some ; aux, to the; are plural, mascu-
line or feminine, and used before ^ noun be^nning either with a
vowel or consonant, an h aspirkte or eiilent : las iHvei, the puj)il6 ;
d€S prunes, of the plums ; aitx Mlnid^x^ to tliid haiiilets ; aux
AoinMis, to the meb.
De Uf d le^ dles^ deles , oaa never be used as articles*
SUBSTANTIP OXJ NOM.— SUBSTANTIVE OB NOUN.
M ill
yti
DBS GENRES. -^^-OF OEKDERS.
There are but heo genders in French, the mife6uline and femi-
AiA^ ) 6d, inauima^d objeotid n&utti bid of ^tb^h
Masculink TKRBUNi*lbird.—d, iy 6, U, (i), a consonant:
Lundi, Monday. Jalidi, Thursday.
Mardi, Tuesday. Vendredi, fndny.
Mereredif Wednesday. Sdmedi, Saturday.
OBAMMAB.
MS. — THE MONTHS.
Juillet,
July.
Adiit,
August.
Sejitemhre,
September.
Octohre,
October.
Novernhre,
November.
DicemhrCf
December.
u
Janviety January.
Fivrierf February.
Mart, March.
Avril, April.
Maij May.
Juitif June.
Fbminime TEEMINAI'IONS.— ate, tc, ue, eue, <ne, ie, t4y ion,
«on, ance, erne, anse, ihre, Hi ; also a double consonant with e
mute ; nne, tte, sse :
la boue, the mud.
Vignorancey the ignorance.
la hassesiej the baseness.
lapersiennef the ^indo' blind.
Rem. — Generally, i accented not immediately preceded by (<),
ends masculine nouns ; thif tea; di, thimble, masculine
la viriU, the truth.
la raiaouj the reason,
une tromptttej a trumpet.
la vie J the life.
Second bem. — ^Yet, nouns ending with ie^ of Greek origin,
are oflen masculine ; lycie, lyceum.
There being many exceptions, it would be losing a precious and impor-
tant time in trying to commit them to memory : it is only when the ear
becomes familiar with the words, that one is able to detect the two diffe-
rent genders ; however, the above rule will prove of the greatest impor-
tance.
DtJ PLTTBIEL DANS LES SUBSTANTIPS.
OF THE PLURAL IN NOUNS.
1. Nouns in the singular generally take («) to form their plural 5
enfantj child ; en/ants, children.
S, X, Z. (no change.)
<i. Those ending with », x, z, do not change : un nez, a nose j
des nez, some noses ; une souris, a mouse ; dessouris, some mice.
AC, EU, (with) X.
GRAMitAM.
95
3. Those with au, eu, take (x), cTidteau, castle ; feu, fire ;
tuj/au, pipe. Wew, blue ; takes (s) ft/ews; desbleus de del, cakes
of paint of the colour of the skies.
ou (with) 8.
4. Those in om, take («), sou, sous, halfpenny.
Exceptions : bijou, jewel ; caillou, pebblestone ; chov, cab-
bage ; genou, knee ; hilou, owl ; pou, louse ; which take x.
All in Aux.
•I. Adjectives or nouns ending with al, change into aux : che*
val, horse ; chevaux, horses : giniral, general ; g&niraux^
generals.
6. Bdt hal, ball, carnaval, carnival ; rigal, regal, feast ; ciri-
monial, order of ceremony ; take an («).
AIL (with) s.
7. Those in ail, take («), iventail, fanj <?^toi7, detail.
But 5at7, bail,
Entail, enamel,
corail, coral,
sovpirail, air-hole,
travail, work,
»4
»*3 "FN
1
a
haux.
imaux.
coraux.
soupiraux.
iravatix.
V Plural.
8. ^^toi7, cattle ; lercail, sheepfold -, have no plural ; bestial,
beast, beastly ; makes bestiaux, cattle.
Sing. ist. PI. 2nd. PI.
9.
aleua;,ance8ton8. 'j aieuls, great grand fathers,
cieux, heavens. \^cieh, skies, testers of beds.
ycMa;, eyes. [cwfe-cfe-JoeM/, oval windows.
<ravawx, works. ] travails, apparel used for
shoeing vicious horsea
10. Rem. — ^Nouns ending with ant or ent may drop the t in
the plural, provided the words have more than one syllable.
a'ieul,
del,
ceil,
travail, ^
96
QBAMMAft.
ADJECTIPS.— ADJECTIVES.
II. In French, adjectives like the article mnst agree in gender
and in number with the noun to which they relate : un hel en/ant,
une belle en/a^^J ; de grands iravauxj dejoUes gravures.
DV F&MININ DANS LE9 ADJECTIFS. — OF THE FEBaNINE IN ADJECTIVES.
GO
13. Adjectives ending with e mute in the masculine, remain
unchanged in the feminine : aimalAej m. aimable, f. amiable ;
honnite, m. honv^tey f. honest; except maitref iraitre, m. master^
traitor ; mattresscj traitressef f.
(2.) ^
13. Those ending with a consonant simply add e mute for their
feminine : grand, m. grdadej f. tall, large ; petit, m. petite, f.
small, little. — ^Except :
absolved,
dissolved,
benevolent,
malignant,
thick,
' fresh,
peasant.
ahsous,
dissous,
mcdih,
ipaik,
frais,
paysan,
Their fern, is :
absoute.
disioute,
hinigne.
maligne,
'^ame,
fraiche.
paysanne.
(3.)
14. Those ending with a vowel other than (e) mute, take one
to form thtsir feminine ; Example : jolt, Joliej aimi, aimSe ;
pretty, loved ; except, cot, /avori; silent, favorite; whose femi-
nine is coite, favorite,
(4.)
i«|. f h6^6 liitiding with eZ, eil, ek, Ml^, dt, ob, dt«; form
thdit i\9mhiiiie hf ddttbliDg the last consonant and taking e mute •
crttielf eruellef cruel.
pareilf pareillef alike.
GRAMMAB.
9-
mt,
lain
le;
ber,
ieir
f.
one
imi-
ite5
ancietiy
ion,
sot,
ffros,
ffras,
old.
good.
clean.
foolish.
big, stout.
fat; except ras,
Fem.
anciennef
bonne f
nettCf
iOttCf
grosse,
close shaven; which makes rase; and nu?, ^.n^i^, which make
nulle gentiUe ; null, genteel. ' ^
(5.)
16. Those ending with;,/e/, cret, iet, er, Ver, take e mute
and a grave accent on the e before (0 or r ;
^"T^^^ complet. re;,H stout, fat. re^te.
^nqu^et, uneasj. ^.,^,v,, fi^^t. ^4„,,,^
*«cre/, secret cA«r, dear. ckhre,
ir Those in: ^^'^
« ^ ^'^::|^^°*«- ^---> ^— , happy; except:
«^, mild, sweet, douce,
faux. faloA ^
^ow^j reddish
' ieuuisn, rousse.
vieux, old • '71 1 . ,
' "^"' vieille, which
^'^"<>''tJ^e general rule in an irregular manner.
/ change into ve, nmf, neuve, new.
5' " guey long, longue, long,
^t* take e- con^t^u, con^»>«e- adjoining.
ou change into o//e,/o«, /,//e, foolish.
^«« ;; eZ/.,5.a«, 5^fe, fine, beautiful.
pubhc; cac^.c,ca^«,«., declining; /Va^cf Eren'ch ; Z:
^^«..J?.ec, Greek; makes ^rec^.. Except /Vane; open
~,jrancaei 6tonc, white, blanche; ,ec, drj, i^^
i li
98
GBAMMAB.
u
I
EUR into EUSE.
(7.)
18. Those in eur make ense : danseuVf danseme, dancer j
trompeur, irompense, deceitful.
TEUR into TRICE.
(8.)
19. Those in teur make trice j accusateur, accusatnce, accu-
ser ; hienfaitmr, Uenfaitrice, benefactor; instttuteur, institu-
trice, school master j except tricotettr, trieoteuse, knitter j /a<-
teur, flatteuse, flatterer ; menteur^ menteuse, liar.
EUR into EBESSE. -^^ *'
(9.)
20. The following in ewrmake eresse : demandeur, demande-
resse, plaintiff j di/endeWy dd/enderoise, defendant j enchanUw,
enchanteresse, enchanting j pichmr.picherem, sinner j i;eni?«ttr,
vcngeresscj ayenger, avenging.
ERIEUR-E.
(10.)
at Those in ^nVttr, simply take e mute; «ttp^nci<r-c, tn/^
rieur-e ; and so do majeur^ majoi ; wimeMr, miijor i wciY^cMr,
better. ^^^^
The following are very irregular :
33. Amhassadeurj ambassador, amhassadriee ; empereur,
emperor, impiratrice ; gouvemenr, governor, gouvernante ;
chanteur, singer, cAanfe««e, and can«a<r»ce ; chasseur, hunter,
c^awcwaeand cAassera»«« ; serviteur, servant, servanie.
EUR. — (masc. or/ewi.)
(12.) ^
23. Moreover, those in eur, whic^ express professions gene-
rally exercised by men, do not change for the feminine, as they
remain masculine j docteur doctor ; professmr, professor.
Tft"- ^r.-^^ **/■ »i« fton a«/eur. That l^dy is a good author.
99
Timoxn, witftew ; bw no femimne.
«>.7. "*" '■ •^''' "^''"•'- •"-l «*«« which h«
The feminine of «,»h oouns often n«d „ .djeetiveB • du.
maUre, mmguit, prince eta >k»i^ <• • • ""•'''"'"» • <*'•<!,
maUreu., 3,4f ""'„t'- I^ ""• *" ' *'*'"''
IPOBMATIOK OF THE PI.xmAI. IK 4PJECTIVi3S.
^4. Adjectives form their dIumI «t«/»#i„ ui,
4 lo.H.h, ^e S-^: Sntt^SZnr '-
Jte. And the following which in,te.d of ch«,ging al into «„.
amtcalf
hancal,
fatalj
frugal,
filialj
friendly. gi^^^^j^
bandj-Iegged. iniHnl,
frugal, (also) aur. wia/ma?.
namly
filial,
theatricai.
frigid.
initial.
labial.
earij.
naval.
nasal.
8
100
GBAMMAtt.
IMPORTANT OBSBEVATION.
AUbougli it has been said that adjectives agree in gender and
Dumber with the nouns to which they relate :
Demi, half ; agrees with its noun in gender only, and when
it follows it :
line demi-heure. Deux heures et deniie.
Nu, naked ; agrees in gender and number, when it follows its
noun.
Nu-piedsj Bare foot.
*i '^Henuey Bareheaded. H'
Feu, late ' ict ; agrees only when there is no word in-
tervening with »M or its noun :
lafeueReine, The late Queen.
Feu votre mhre, Your late mother.
OP COMPARATIVES IN ADJECTIVES.
fi7. There are three sorts of comparatives :
(1.) Equality. (2.) Superiority f and (3.) Inferiority.
EQUALITY.
a8. That of Equality is made by putting aussi, as, and autant
as much ; before the adjective in the positive, and que, as; after
the adjective.
EXAMPLE :
II 4tait aussi studieux que sage.
He was as studious as good.
Ciciron itait autant estimS qu' admtrSj
Cicero was as much esteemed as admired.
SUPERIORITY.
29. That of Superiority, by ^holng plus, more ; before the
adjective, and que, than ; after the adjective :
L'Angleterre est pluspeuplie que le Canada,
England is more populous than Canada.
GBAMMAB.
101
INrERIORITT.
30. That o£ Inferiority, bj putting mains, less; before the
adjective, and que, than ; after it :
L'Angleterre est mains grande que le Canada,
England is less large than Canada.
or by using the verb negatively, and putting «, so; before the
adjective, and que, as ; after :
L^AngUterre West pas si grande que le Canada,
England is not so large as Canada.
Rem.— P/iM, mains, aussi, autant, and si, must be repeated
before every adjective in the comparative ; but que comes alone
and last :
EUe. est plus jalie, plus madeste et plus sage que sa sceur ;
She is prettier, more modest, and better than her sister.
Unless several nouns or pronouns were brought for compa-
rison, as :
21 est plus intelligent, que lui, qu'elle et qu*ettx.
He is more intelligent than he, she, and they,
in which case que must be repeated.
OP SUPEBLATIVES.
31. There are two sorts of superlatives :
The Superlative absolute and Superlative relative.
The Superlative absolute expresses the highest or lowest degree
without any comparison.
The Superlative relative expresses comparison.
SUPERLATIVl ABSOLUTE.
3a. The Superlative absolute, is formed by placing such ad-
verbs aa/ort, very ; trh, very ; extrimement, extremely ; before
the adjective in iYie positive ; and also the invariable leplus and
le moins, vmt :
ii
102
GaAJVlMAR.
M est fort content de vous voir, He is very much pleased to see you.
Je vousmisextrimementobliffS, I anj extremely obliged tayou.
£Ue court le moins, She runs the' least.
SUPERLATIVE. RELATIVE.
33. The Superlative relative k formed by placing the article
It, la,r, les, Of mm, ion, cet, etc., before the comparative 0/ in-
feriority or of superiority, as :
Le phis savant. The most learned.
Monplusjolilivre^ My finest book.
Cet en/ant est le moins disagr^hle de ht classe,
This child is the least desagreeable in the class.
IBBXOUIiAB COMPABATIVSS
34. The following adjectives are irregular :
^o», good; meilieur, better; le meilleur, the heet
Mauvais,h^d;pire, worse; lepir^, the worst.
Petit, small ; moindre, less ; l^ n^oindre, the Imt.
ADVERBS.
Bien, well; mieux, better ; le mieux, the best.
Mai, badly; pis, vmrae ; le pis, the worst
Feu, little; moins, lees; le moins, thel«aBt.
8^. Better, meaning more good, is meilieur.
Better,
Worse,
Worse,
Less,
Less,
more well, is mieux.
more bad, .3 pire,
more badly, is ^.
more small, is moindre.
more little, (quantity), is moins.
However, we ean say p/«, mauvais, plus petit, plus mal :
but we cannot say : plus bon, nor plm hien, nor plus wm.
U
tl
((
ic
tt
GBAMMAB.
103
ou.
cle
NUMEBAL ADJECTIVES.
96. There are two sorts of numeral adjectives : the Cardinal
and Ordinal.
THE CARDINAL AIM! :
[Rem.— The numbers should be learned across each line, and not up and
down,]
11. onze.
12. douze.
13. treize.
14. quatorze, m, sU. 30. trente.
15. q«inze, u sil. 40. quaraote> u »►
16. seize.
17. dix-sept, J) sil.
18. dix-huit.
19. dix-nenf.
20. ¥ingt,^<siL
80.quatre-Yingts,<?/«sil. 90. quatre-vingt-dix. 100. cent, 4 sil.
1,000. miUe. 1,000,000. million
llEM.--The X and the « of the foregoing numbera mnst be pro-
nounced like («) on the next vowel or h silenfc :
Bix homfoes. Beux en/ants.
When followed by a consonant, the as, «, <,/, j, must be silent :
cinq plumesj six gargom.
The/ in new/, takes the sound of v before a vowel or A silent :
nenfhommetj nmf enfantt.
1. un.
2. deux, X silent.
3. trois, « silent.
4. quatre.
5. cinq.
6. six, X like as.
7. sept, p silent
8. huit.
9. Beu£
10. dix, X like «».
50. cinquante, n si.
1 60. soixaBte,a;like««k
l70. soixante-dix,.
37i We say :
21. vingt et un.
31. trente et un.
41. quarante etun.
51. cinquante et-uq.
61. soixante et un.
81. quatre-vingt-un, but :
22. vingt-dieux.
38. trente-trois.
44. quarante-quatre,
55. cinquante-cinq.
66i. soixante-six.
87. quatre-vingt-sept.
[Without the conjunction -huit.
«t. but a bvnhAti 1
f. <f S^ ~ 'J
m
II
104
QRAMMAB.
38. Wo say ;
Soixante-dix, 60 and 10. Quatre-vingt-quatorze, 80 and 14.
Soixante-onze, 60 and 11. Quatre-vingt-quinze, 80 and 16.
Soixante-douze, 60 and 12. Quatre-vingt-seize, 80 and 16.
Soixante-treize, 60 and 13. Quatre-vingt-dix-sept, 80 and 17.
Quatre-vingt-dix-huifc, 80 and 18.
Quatre-vingt-dix-neuf, 80 and 19.
VINGT-CBNT.
[Cardinal numben do not change at aU in th«tr t«rminatIon> ; we except vingt a cent.]
39. Rem.—. Vingt and cent multiplied by a number take « ;
Quatre-vingtB, 80, or 4...20's ; deux cents, 200, or 2...100'* j
but if vingt and centtae followed by another number, they then
drop the s : quatre-vingt-dix, 90 ; deux-cent-un, 201.
Vingt and cent used for vingtihne and centibme, never take the
« .• Page guatre-vingt, page 80 ; Ex4srcice dnq cent, exercise 500;
used for : Page quatre-vingtiisme, Exercice cinq centihme.
MILLE.
40. MiUe, 1,000, is written mille, mily miUe :
(1.) Millej 1,000, without the «, means that number of 10,00;
(2.) Mille, (a mile'), takes s : deux milleg, two miles ;
(B.) Mil, 1,000, used for the years of the Christian Era :
mil-huit-cent-cinquante-neu/f 1859.
QUINT (for) CINQ.
41. Rem.— Instead of cmg-, we write quint, Mth ; in speak-
of Pope, Sixtus the Fifth, and Charles of the Fifth of Spain :
Sixte-Quint, Charles- Quint.
OBDINAL NUMBERS.
4a. They are formed from the cardinal by adding ilme, and
dropping the e of some of the cardinal or changing the /into v.
Ordinal adjectives do all agree in gender and in number with
the nouns to which they relate : mes deux premieres legons, my
two first lessons.
The French use the cardinal numbers, except for the first,
QBAMlA^a,
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.
103
je^emier du moi», the fii«t of tke Monik
ffe^^Quat^, Henry the Fourth.
1st unidme-prcowcr.llth onzi^mc
2d Becond-denxihmeUth douzi^me.
3d troisidme.
4th quatri^me.
5th cinqui^iDe.
6th sixi^me.
7th septi^me.
!8th haiti^me.
9th neavii^me.
lOtk dixidme.
80th quatre-vingti^me.
ISth treizi^me.
14th qtiatorti^me.
15th qainzi^me.
16th seizi^me.
17th dix-septifeme.
18th dix-huitidme.
19th ctixneuvi^me.
20th vingii^nie.
30th trenti^me.
40th quanta tK^me.
60th ciuquantidme.
60th soixanti^me.
70th solxanteKiixyme
:'i:fh
43. 21st vingt
31st trente
41st q«a*aht^
51st dnqtiante
6l8t soixante
81st quatre-vin^
100th centiSma.
l>000«h mflli^me.
t,000,000th miilioni^me.
22nd -[deuxi^me.
""*™ »5tk
'^W:.i<
44
66th
87th
«8fh
Sdth
troisi^me.
qnatridme
tjinqtri^me
sixi^me.
septidme.
huitf^me.
(neuvi^me.
S««.oteHl<«,zfe„e,72d Quatre-v'r. :*4w8,„e, 96 fc
S«.«ote-t«.rift«», m Q«.tnHVU4 -dk^eptilme, 97th
Quatte'wngMiitjinitiimg ggj^
Q»»tfe^»iigWit*D«uTi4me, 99tk
106
CttAMMAR.
K0SEKA1; Notvs;
Une dizaintf half a score. La moiHiy the half.
Un9 quinzainej i\xret qaartere of Le quart j the quarter or 4tb
a score, a fortnight. part.
Une vingtainej a score. Le tiers, third part. •
Une tremaine, a score and a ha)f. Le tfiple, the triple,
Une centaine, five scores. Vn millier, 1,000.
UnmiUion, 1,000,000.
PBEBfllR, UNI£mB; SECOND, DEUXI^MK
Premier^ is used with douds, as : premier livre ;
Cnilme, with compoands often, as : vingtet unikme;
Second, with nouns only ; Second livre.
Deuxiime, with compounds of ten, and also with nouns ;
Vingt-deuxilme Itvre, 22d hoo&; — les vingt premiers Itvres,
the 21st hooks; hecause ^r«mtm, relates to livres only.
With nouns, second when h«t two ; deuxihme, when mor»
than two. -'^
Cet ouvrage a deux tomes ; votct le second,
vingt " " le deuxihme.
u
.( ii
BEMOKSTBATIVE ADJECTIVES.
4US. The demonstrative adjectives are those that precede
nouns ;
(See page 16.)
The 9X9,1, ce, this or that, fn. s.. hefore a consonant or h aspirater
Cegargon, This hoy.
cet, this or that, m. $., hefore a vowel or h silent,
Cet instituteur, This schoolmaster. '
Cet homme, This man.
cette, this or that,/. «., hefore any noun feminine.
Cettepomme, This apple.
Ckitte ardoisSf. That skte.
€
]
V
£
GftAMMAB.
107
4tb
vreSf
more
cede
rate.
cc«, these or those, ^/. m. or/., before any plural noun.
Ces Hives, Those pupils.
46. Rem.— In order to ekprSsi^Aw or that, the French, not
having two different words, make use of the adverbs ci, here ; Id,
there ; placed after nouns, preceded by the demonttraiive adjec-
tive, to represent proximity or distance :
Cette page-Qi est plus hngue que cette page-Ik,
This page is longer than that page.
The e of (ce), the adjective, is never cut off.
_-,«.Jf,5j,«,y.i^<^t^
t f*
* '.' «,'
-tyv«
My,
Thy,
Its, his her,
Your,
Their,
POSSESSIVE A1)JECTIVES,
47. The possessive adjectives are tho. e which precede nouns,
to show the possession ; they agree in gender and in number with
the nouns they precede, and not otherwise ; they can never stand
alone. They are :
Maso. Shg,
mon,
ton,
son,
notre,
votre,
leur,
Scnpbre et sa mhre sont arrivSs^
Her father and mother have arrived. r
...48. Rem.— They must be repeated like the article, before
every noun, where they should, and never be understood as in
English.
Rbm.— Jfon, ton, ton, althpugh masculine, must be used in the place of
ma, ta, ta, which are feminine, when thfl f^tminine nouns begin with a
vowel or A sUent, as the vowel a can only be suppressed in one instance:
tonAfM, I, thy soul; ton hwmur,l, his temper; mon amUie, l, my
friendship.— -See page 91.
Fern. Sing.
PI., Mase. Sing.
ma,
mes.
t<^,
tes.
sa,
ses.
notre.
nos.
votre,
vos, ,
leur,
leur Si
1M
flAAMNAB.
1:;
r
I
XirSlXVIZriTS ADJS0TZVX8.
40. They are :
Chagutf ra. or f.s., each, everj ; nw/, m. nu//e| f, nuU, none j
ifeme, m. or f. samei like ; quelfue, m. or f,, some few;
^/, m.j^^utUe, f ^whiish, what; te^, m., telle^ f., auch ;
[im ul, m. such a.
Fluaieurif m. or f. pl.j several ; aiecun, m. aucune, f., not one,
Quelcongue m. or f, whatever, after a nonn ; ,^not any.
Tout, m., (oute, f-ftous, m. pi., tauteSf f. pi , evciy, aH.
(10. — ^Rem. — Mil, aucun, reqnjre the verb to take the nega-
tive particle ne, 4W th^y are negative i nul^argfm n'est venu, no
boy came ; nnless Ahey accompany a verb interrogative as :
Oroyez-votts ^u'aKcun emfgnt Ufant 7
Bo jon think anj child will do Jt?
Nuly aucun, plusieurs and tel when not followed by a nouii,
must be considered as pronouns, chiefly representing persons, un-
less otherwise expressed.
TOUT, (wh«|fi^. All-
Tout is either, a nmrn, pronoun^ an adjective, « an adnerh.
1. A Mlmm whentiieartiele cvmes belbre it; in the plundit pre-
serves its f ; les toutt.
2. A i^ronoutif aiMK^ute, relates to things and is singular ; tout
ett perdu ; not absoh;rte,ielates«o peramsandihiDgB, and agrees :
Voslivres 8ontiou8tci {Les dames,) ^huhaaont venues.
8. An Adjective, may or may not be foDowed l)y the article,
ugreesiflth its noun :
Touthomme, Tous les en/ants,
i. An Advarb, means quite, altogether : toutptSt, quite ready ;
Although an adverb, it takes the feminine singular or plural termi-
aatioBS, if the feuuBiae adjective ioUowing it, b^iiui wHh a con-
sonant or A aspirate. - I ,a- «iitt^;..^i
Cette dame est toute surprise.
-' ' '^*i,ttrtimc::~
QKAMItMBL.
t$i
M^mej after • verb^ or after several noun* is ta adrerli wd
means •vm, alta ;, after a single Doan ob proneiui, altboagh it can
be tn^ed by even, iu; finglish, i4 is an adjective in Frencb, as •
Ces mun mimet peuwnt avoir desyemx,
These very walls, or Even those walls may have eyes
QUBttQUSL
(1.) QiTBKQUl!^ ibllowed by a nonn or a» adjective and its
noun, is written in one word and agrees :
Quelques bons ltvre»j Some or a few good books.
(2.) ^we^yw, followett by a« iK^ectke alone, or an adverb,
remains in one word- and ittvari«Mle :
Qudque bons quHh aowntj \ However good Htui^ vmif bo >^-
it then governs the subjtmetavd mood.
(8.) Qmlqucj followed by a verb, is wrihiett in t*n> wosds,
and quel agrees, but qutr does net :
Quelles que soient vo» pemeSf armez-vou^ d& courage.
Whatever your troubles may ba, arm. yonrself with fortitude.
Kem. — Quelque is sometimes translated hy whatever'^ kotMver ;
it is sometimes an adverb or an adjective ; written in two Words
or in one.
FOBMATIOlt' OF WOBBS.
Si.' English words whose teiminations are :
ace, **, face> preface, justioir^
adCf udA, fayade^ 8oIitud«^
anc9, tnw^ ignornnce adlldr«Me,
tfc, nte^ docil«, n^^ni^
ada^ tdy obstacle, takimA^
hie, ge, ftlde, ftge,.
^,/ *Wi waeitiiis^. ^
the same in the French, with the^exoeptibit of Mine accents which
the English do not use.
aiatfo% nation > are
11
m
GRAMMAR.
ALSO :
99. Those in niy, make aire,
oiy, make oire,
or, our, make eur,
^ ouBf make eux,
ij, make (6
J, make (e.
necessarry,
aocesfioryy
oandoar,
famous,
furj,
ty, with a ooDSonant before make tie.
Modesty, Modestie,
OP PBONOUNS.
There are five sorts of pronouns ; they are :
ndeessaire
accenoire.
candeur.
/ameux.
beauty.
furie.
Personal,
Demonstrative,
Possessive,
Belative,
Indefinite,
93.
Frononu pertonneUf
Pronoms dimomtratifs,
Prononu postesti/e,
Pronoms relati/s,
Pronoms indifiniSf
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
«I4. They are : ),,' ?..,;/
Itt peraong.
jCf I.
m«, me or to me.
moi, I, me or to me.
nouSf we or us.
8rdp«nou.
Pronouns.
2nd persona.
tu.
eUCf
luif
dies,
eux,
y,
u,
sou
he, it.
she, it, her.
he, him, to him.
they, m.
they,/., them,
they, m., them, m.
te,
toi,
vous,
8rdpart<nui.
h,
h,
le9.
thou,
thee, to thee,
thou, thee, to thee,
you, to you.
leur,
en*
it, him, m,
it, her,/,
them, J)/., m. or/
to them,]?;, m, or/
some, of it, of them, m.
or/., pi. or «.
to it, to them, m. or/, pi. or s.
himwlf, herself, themselves; to himself, to herself,
to themselves, pi. or s.
oneself.
QBAMMAB.
Ul
nire
foire.
mr.
ux.
i.
ns.
4¥IET ntPQETAar BinfABT, -rr
THBIR USB AND PLACB.
(For the order in which they eoDM, aee p«CM 83, U.)
Personal pronouns used with yeii» only : y«, me, /«, te, tY, se,
ih, Uy la, les, leur, y, en.
Personal pronouns used with or without Terbs : mot, toi, lux,
elle, eUes, eux, nous, voua.
Personal pronouns used with preposiUoos : mot, toi^ lui, eUe,
elles, eux, nous, vous, toi, oneself.
S9, Personal pronouns used with verbs only, always precede
their verbs, whether as nominative, datives- or accusatives :
Jl te Va die, He told it to thee.
except as nominatives, when the verbs are used interrogatively, as :
Avons-nous ri f Did we langh ?
Eirons-Mous ? Shall we laugh ?
As objects, the verb being in the imperative affirmative, they
follow it, as : ,
Parlez-leur-en, Speak to them about it.
Rkm. — le, la, V lea, personal pronouns, must not be confounded with ^,
la, r. Us, articles. The pronouns go with verbs, whilst the articles go with
nouns :
Jela vols, nom Us aimons. Le Rot, la Reine, les en/anit,
I see her, we love them. The King, the Queen, the children.
r.
n.
elf,
DEMONSTBATIVE FBONOUNS.
«S6« The Demonstrative pronouns are very different from the
demonstrative adjectives, because they do not precede nouns but
verbs or relative pronouns, and take the gender and number of
the nouns they represent. — See p. 19.
They are : ce,
celui
celle,
ceux,
cdles.
m. pi. or s., this, that or iL
m. s.
f. s.,
m. pL
f pi..
Ceci, this Tthins.") m. s.
that, the one.
that, the one.
those, the ones,
those, the ones.
Cda, that /'thiner.'^ m. »,
^srr
tu
mtsmmMMi,
ST. After ceiui, etBt, eew, eeHeft, we «m ex and Id to eliow
proximitj or diatonce, they represent thing* or persons.
Ci, muai not be eon«M;inde4 with ce the adjective ; for ce th»
pronoun, precedes onlj rerbs or relatire pronouns, and has no
other teroiioation, aqd the (e) of it oaa be cut off; whijat ee, tho
adjective, goes before nouns only and never changes.
«8. Mo«eove», « tekea the place of 0, elk^ U,, eUes whea prew
ceding itre, to be; followed by a wu^ o. pjomn determined.
So. we B»^ ;
Cesontd€ij>ersovju*aimable9^
. They are amiahk persons.
Ce, fuej4i pri/h-e c*ut rhwnamti^
That whioli I like best ia humanitj.
Cedontjeparle, Cestunmameur,
That of which I speaX. li ia a misfortune.
CVuVl, ETC.— CECT.
Celuiy celU, ceux, cettes may represent persons or things as in
Daglist; they mm taJte the phwje of a naun expressed bel^re.
and determined.
(kci and eeh, represent only things pointed at.
Ceci est bony eela est mauvafk, i
This is good, that is bad.
These two cannot be used like the prece^dg ones.
POSSESSIVE PBOKOtnrS;
•10. The Possessive pronouns express possession and agree in
gender and in number with the nouna for which they stand.
They are : '
Mmse. .iMk.
2e mieny U. mienne^ m^ine.
le tieny ta iienne^ . thine.
^«c», ^ fefti.m^'V his, hers.
&n^r<^ III. Iff fori oufs*
oVmWlnMK
118
low
th9
na
ID
le v6tre,
lav^rm,
rmm
UhuVf
la leurj
(8«epiig©,18.)
thein.
SIuo. pL
lwi.pl.
lea mientf
/e» mienneSf
miDQ.
Je$ tienSj
le$ tiennes,
thioe.
lea Eie'iSf
leg sienneSf
hie, here.
hs vStiti,
lee n6tre»y
ours.
fe» -^irtS,
he vdtreSf
joura.
hs leurs,
lee hur».
theirs.
,ti>
BBULTIYS PBOKOUlTBw
60. The RelatWe Pronouns are cHvided into rehaive and ab-
solute. — See pa^ 16^, j
The relative are thosfe wlkich have an antecedent expressed ;
and absolute, those that have none expressed. The pronouns are :
Qui, wl», which, whom, that f Le^ptd, whioh, who, whom j titat.
QuSf whiohywhom^ what, that ; hqueUe^ £ s. " **
Quoi, which, what ; lesquels, m. pi. « *<
i>onl, of whioli:, of wham J lesquelhty f. ph, which, who,
OH, to which ; [^hom that.
61. Qui with antecedent is a nominative relating to persons
or to things, hoth g»nd«xs and nmnbem t
L' en/ant qui pleure J The child who cries.
Xm plume qui tsti ho»ney The p«o< whioh; k^ good.
65J. Qui interrogative or governed hy prepositions relates to
persons only :
De qui parlez-vous f Of whom do you speak ?
QITB. ^
0tte is never 0AVArnA<l hv TkrianAmiSmui
."^v.
114
CMUMMAB.
64. Que with antecedent is an accuaative and relates to per-
■ons or to things, both genders acd numbers :
Leg/ruits quefaime, The fruits which I like.
Lesdames qnej'e voi$, The ladies whom I see.
Que, interrogative, relates to things only :
Que toulez-vous / What do you want ?
LEQUEL.
6«. Lequel, which ; le^ the ; and quel, which ; change : the
first like the article, and qtiel, like an adjective : relates to per-
sons or to things ; is interrogative or is not ; has an antecedent
or has not one expressed : but must always represent something
or somebody spoken of before or immediately after :
De cesdeux Uvref, lequel vonlez-vom ^ H
Of these two books, which will you have ?
De ces trois demoiseUes, l&qneWe prifdrez-vous ?
Of these three young ladies, which do you prefer ?
QUOI.
66. Quoi, relates to things only, is both genders and num-
bers ; IS generally preceded by prepositions or sometimes followed
*>J de ;
A qnoipensez-vous f What are you thinking of.
Q^oide plus heau que la nature?
What more beautiful than nature ?
DONT.
67. Dont, both genders and numbers, relates to persons or
things : ^ _. _
rhomme dont vomparUx, The man of whom you speak.
La chose dont il park, Ths thing of which he speaks.
N. B.— Never begin a terUence with dont to ask a question.
ou.
68. Oh, to which ; relates to things only ;
La ville oil Cfor d laaudle\ «« nni*. Tha. /.;♦,. t^ -.i.:^v t _^
er-
QHIAMtlAB.
U6
he
3r-
nt
)d
»r
INDBFINITE PBOITOUNS.
69. They cannot be followed by any noun like the adjectiveb of
the same name. The Indefinite pronouns are :
On J one, anyone, I, thou, she, we, you, they ;
Quiconque, whoever, ting.f both gender* ;
Quelqu'un^ m., somebody, some one ;
Chacunf m., each one, every one ; 'v.
Autrutf m. s., others, other people ;
L'un Vautre^ m., each other, one another ;
Zf'ttii ei VantrCf the one and the other, both ;
PersonnCf m., no one, nobody.
ON, ETC.
TO. Rem. — On governs the verb in the third singular only,
and may or may not relate to any person in particular.
On die qu'il est arrivij People say that he has arrived.
71. Quiconque generally governs two verbs.
Quiconque est ne envieux et mSchant est naturellement triste.
Whoever is born envious and bad is naturally sad.
73. QuELQu'uN has for feminine quelqu*un€ ; quklques-uns,
m. pi., quelques-unes, pi. f. Quelqu'un, absolute, relates to persons
only ; but otherwise relates to both persons and things.
Quelqu'un est venu, Somebody came.
Donnez-mot qu^l^ueS'Unes de cespoires^
Give me some of these pears.
73. Ohacun has for feminine chacuney relates to persons or to
things ; ohaoun, absolute, to persons only.
Chacun pense d soi. Every one thinks of himself.
74. AuTBUi, to persons only, always masculine singular, gene-
rally preceded by prepositions.
Faitesd. autruij ceque vous voudriez qu'on vousfitj
Do unto others that which you would wish that they did to you.
116
€HIAMMA«.
^;uN L'AUTR., e^^^ ta p«Boi« 0%; tliay express reci-
Its .luifj'^f '"' ^r ^''"'''^ '^^'^ loteeaob other.
Its plural IS : lea urn les autres-^more than two.
L'uN BT l'autrb, to both persons and things.
LunetV autre BontsortUy Both are out
Les uns et les aM^rea^moie that tm>.
Kv^J![- ^".??^^^' °^- «•' '^q«»»'«» tfce verb which ifcgorera^or
Pmowwe n'a raison, Nobody is right.
Je n'at vu personne, I saw nobody.
VEBBES.— VEBBS.
bvTlf* ^l!''^ 7J\F^«"«^ «>«•• di^ereot conjugations known
by the ending of the Infiiiitive. The Infinitive ofthe 1st e7ds
wuh ,. ; ofthe 2nd, with ir ; of the3rd.>; of the^t^ wir^^^^
There are but two auxiliaries in French.
77. Avoir, to have. , Etrb, ta be.
A2fantyUvlB^ ' i7/a»^, being,
^'^a^ l Mi, been.
PBK8EXT INDICATIVES.
(Simple tenses.)
I hftve. I j^ «Mw
Thou hast. I j^ „ '
We have. | 3^oi« «,4»ws^
Vous etes.
J' ai,
Tu as,
11 a,
Nomavom,
Vous avez,
lis out,
You have.
They have;
lis sent;
J* tiv-ais,
Tu av-ais,
Jl avait,
ITous av-ions,
Vous av4ez.
ntPERFKOTS OF THE WDIOATIVE.
J' St-ai»,
lam.
Thouaaft.
He is.
We are.
You are.
They are.
I had.
Thou hadst.
He had.
We had;
Your had.
Tl* av^ient, They had.
Tu et,mSy
II ei-ais,
Nom et-ioHSi.
Vous et-iez,
lis St-aient.
Thou wastw
He was.
We were..
You were.
ThAW wavn
Bile
On
av-ait,
av-ait.
She bad.
One had.
GftAMMAB.
I On,
Me
117
it-cUt,
People were.
She was.
Tu
II
nBTEBrun Dsninnt <m m».rmcT%,
eua,
eu$,
cut,
Kotu eAmet, 1
Voua ttUes, 1
I had.
Thouhadflt.
He had.
We had.
You had.
They had.
{•) fimmas ABSoturs.
Je
21
J« /»», I was.
Tu fua, Thou wast.
il fnt. He was.
Nomfilmes, 2 We were. .
Vmafiitei, 2 You were.
lU fuofent, Tiiejwerfi..
w rat,
99 TCta,
99 ra,
N6u99e rwU,
Vou»9e rex,
iZ» 99 ront,
J* au rai, I shall or wiB have.
Tu au r(u. Thou shalt have.
It au ra, He shall have.
Mu9 au rona, We shall have.
Vowau rez. You shall have.
Il9 au ront, They shall have.
(*) CONDITIONALS PBS8ENT
/' an rata, I should x>r-w«tM9iave. /#
Ikau rai9, Thouahouldst have.
Ji au rati. He should have.
Ifou9itu rwn*^ We should have.
Vom au ritz. You should have.
Jl* au raient, They should have.
I shall or will be.
Iliou shalt be.
He -shall be.
We shall be.
You Shan be.
They shaU be.
w rym, 1 would or should be.
Tu 99 rata. Thou wouldst be.
// 89 rait, He would be.
WoiWMrtoM^ We would be.
V<9m 99 riez. You would be. -
Ih 99 raient. They would T)e. ' *
( ) The s^8 •*«« w «ar are represeated bytheienntoafionaofthe
Future, and have and b9 by the roots ^, « ; Oould or wuld, by the ter.
nunations of Conditional, and have and Je by the roots au »e.
Aie,
Qu'il ait,
Ayone,
Aytz,
Qu'iUai9n^
H«tr« 'th««.
Let him ham,
L«t OB iMve.
Let ye have,
Xiet thembiave.
JVPABiMrivBa.
Qt^il9<nt,
/Soy«r,
Qu'Himient,
Be thou.
Lethimbew
Let us be.
Let ye be.
Ld) them be.
78. SubjHHctCve pr49ewt ahrftys governed by a conjunction or
l>y anotJier Tcrb oonneoted with gw, a floiyunofcion.
Quef
Quetu
Qu' il
Quenoue
Que vow at/ ez
Qu.\ii$ aimt.
«t *, That I nay ham Queje
**t*«» Quetu
«• '» Qu' a
'^ *•**» Que nou9
cu,.
Qu' ilt 99i .ent
<ot 9, That I may be.
90i 9,
9oi t,
•oy WW,
I 1
* 1
h1
ifl
118
QftAMMAB.
Cm*/
Que tu
Qu' il
Quenout euss iona,
Que voua ettts iez,
Qu' il$
Uf^KBfKCTS OF THK 8UBJU1>CTIV*.
euss e, That I might have. ^y« fuss e. That I mkrht be.
euss es, Quetu fuss e»,
^ '» Qu' U fti t, *
Que nous fuss ions,
Que vous fiiss iez,
euM ent, Qu' iU fuss ent,
(1, 2,) R«MARK.— The lat and 2nd persons plural of the Preterite Definite
have always a circumflex accent over the vowel preceding the m and ^•
and also, the 3rd person singular of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive!
This rule holds good for all verbs without any exception.
Rem. The terminations (e, es, eni,) must never be heard in any verb ;
they are called mute syllables.
jdf
j,W», CQlCFpUirD TSNSES.
The compound tenses of Avoir and JEtre are formed with the
help of all the simple tenses of ^votV to which are added the
Past Participles ew, had ; iU, been :
79» The CoNDiTioirAL has two compound tenses :^ ,,aT ^ v
J'aurais eu, I should have had, and
eu or its, I should have had or been.
eu (t6, Thou shouldst have had or been.
eu its, He should have had or been.
eu its, "We should have had or been.
eu Ste, You should have had or been.
eu its, They should have had or been.
That second Conditional Past is called the also of the Conditional.
Bjoubx^—M may change in its final ending ; but StS, never.
80. AVOIR conjugated with two Personal Pronouns, to
which the Past Participle of any active verb can be added :
J'
Tu
Jl
Nous
eusse
eusses
eAt
eussions
Vous eussiez
IU eussent
Je Is ltd
Tu me r
M te V
Nous le hti
ai lu, read.
as In,
a lu,
avons hi.
Voua les leur avez Iw,
Us te lea Mti tuM
I have read it to him.
Thou hast read it to me.
He has read it to thee.
We have read it to him.
You have read them to them.
*UVj utcTV ICSU ""Tin W «UCC.
GRASfMAIt.
119
Queje ■■ r
Que tu let
Qu' a la
Quenoua P
Que voiis let
Qu' ila P
ate
€tiet
ait
ayons
ayez
atent
Atom, with le, la, leg.
vu, seen.
vua,
mi$,
vu,
vtu,
vu.
That I may have seen it.
That thou mavest have seen them«
That he may hare seen them.
That we may hare seen it, him or her.
That you may have seen them.
That they may have seen him, it, hen
IMPEKATIVB ATFIBMATIvi;.
Aie4e,
Qu'il les ait,
Ayotu-le,
Ayez-lea,
Qu'iU let aient,
Have it.
Let hhn have them.
Let us have It.
Let ye have them.
Let them have them.
11
Seep. Ill,
No. 65.
niFKRATIVK KE6ATIVX.
Jr« Fate pat,
Qt^il ne le» ait pas,
JV« t ayons pat,
ITe let ayez pat,
Qu'ilt ne let aient pat.
Have it not. "V
Let him not have them. I
Let us not have it. V See p. 1 1 1,
Do you not have them. I No. 66.
Let them not have them'J
81. Verbs Avoir and Etre, negative and interrogative
Ai-jef
At-tuf
*A-Ulf
Avont-nout ?
Avez-vous /
Ont-Ot?
Havel?
Hast thou?
Has he?
Have we ?
Have you ?
Have they.
Suit-Je,
Et4uJ
JStt-il?
JBommet-noutl
JEtet-voutf
Smt-iltf
Am I?
Art thou?
Is he?
Aft) we?
Are you ?
Are they ?
Avait-je f
Avait-tu f
Avait4lf
Aviont-noutF
Aviez-voutf
Avaiml4l»f
Had I?
Hadst thou ?
Had?
Had we ?
Had von ?
Had they ?
Etait-je f
JEtait-tu ?
JEtaitdl f
Miont-rumtf
EHez-vout f
EtaietUHUf
Waal?
Wast thou ?
Was he?
Were we ?
Were you ?
Were they t
JEut-Je /
JEus-tui
Hwt-il?
JEumea^aus f
£utet-voutf
Mirmt-Osf
Had I?
Hadst thou ?
Had he ?
Had we ?
Had von ?
Had they?
Fut-jef
Fm4uf
Mit-iU
FAmet-nomf
VAf.
VM.jM/y»i» I
Was I?
Wast thou ?
Was he ?
Were we ?
TW««^ o
FuretU4l» f Were they ?
120
O&AMMAB.
Awai-je f
Aureui-tu ?
*Aura-t-il i
Aupont'nmiaf
Auret^vmaif
AuromHU f
Shall I have?
Shalt thou have?
Shall he have ?
Skafi^imlMver
Shall yon lmt«r
sShaH they how?
8er«u>i9ou» f
Serontiilti
Shall I be t
Shalt thou be ?
ShaUhe be?
Shall we be?
Shall you be ?
ShaHtkeyVe?
In
Auraa-je Should I have ?
Aurais-tu / Shouldst thou kave ?
Aurait-ilt Should he have ?
^urt(>n«-«to««f Should we have t
Auriez-voua i Should you have t
Awaimi-Ua ? Should they have ?
Sereds-je f
S6rak4uf
Serait-il f
SeiHong-nous i
8eri€Z-von» f
SeraientMs ?
Should I be ?
Shouldst thott be?
Should he be?
Should we be ?
Should you be ?
j^oaild they be ?
N. R — Although the (c) of j« is heard when standing before a verb, It
becomes almost silent when after, to form. ^e interrogation.
(♦) RBii.»When the verb eftds i*ith a vowel in the thitd person singu-
lar and the veitb is intertogoDive, the pronounei?, «fff« w 4M cioming after,
for the aake of euphony, take a (t) between two hyphen*, placed between
the verb and,ths.praaouo«
89. The sfxatAjnovn used with leiUm arec
nCf
tie,
ne,
ne.
Jammisj
rien.
ne, ^emnne, nobody.
O0t
not at all. ne, tiHtvm,
J9iev<w. ne, md^
©fOthing. ne, ^m,
THEIR PLAGE.
not one.
rOot ftny.
fto more.
83. The tevb comes just between neandt1ie«eQond negation ; if
the pronown ^mes belbte the yerb, the ne gO€B just after that
pronoun ; if a verb is in a oompound tense, th.e Past Participle
goes after the second negation.
Je n' ai pas,
>!I\t n' as pas,
jU n* a rieU,
JVotts n' avons Jamais,
Votts n' M'ex persomie,
"' »' otU pointy
lis
I have not.
Thou hast not.
He has nothii^.
We have never.
You have nobody.
They have laot at aU,
c « tie suit
Tu tC es
11 ri e8t
Nous ne sommeapas,
Votts n' etes
lis ne sont
Ne V avals- je pas apprisf
Ne lea avaia- tu pas i
Ne les avail- il pas ?
Ne V avians- nous pas ?
Ne P aviez- vouspas ?
Ne les avaient-ils pas ?
GBAMMAB
'•iS»
pa»,
pas,
•
I am not.
Thou art not.
jamais,
pas,
rien,
rien,
He is never.
We are not.
You are nothing.
Thej are nothi^.
m
Had I not learnt it ?
Hadst thou not learnt them ?
Had he not learnt them ?
Had we not learnt it ?
Had you not learnt it ?
Had they not learnt them ?
84. GxNBRAL TBRMiKATioNs of each person in Verbs
whether regular or irregular :
The first singular may end with «, s, x, ai.
The second «
The third «
The first plural
The second ''
The third "
it
(I
It
u
u
tt
(t
tt
tt
tt
Oj SO*
Cf Of tf Cf d.
onSf met*
ez, Us,
entf ont.
8«(. Oenbral TBR1IINATIQ17S of vcrbs :
An Infinitivk may end with cr, tV, oir, re.
A Present Part. « ant^ yant, ssant, evant.
A Past Participle, " 4, i, u. is, it, wt, oint, aint, eint,
ert, orty ous, m. oute, f. : in the masculine, and adding («) mute
for the feminine.
F 2
122
GBAMMAB.
86. General Table of'the regular terminatioDS of tHe POTO
CONJirOATlONS:
PRESENT INFINITIVE.
er,
ant,
Ist.
1. €,
2. 68,
3. e,
1. onSf
2. ez,
8. entf
1. ais,
2. aiis,
3. aiV)
1. tonSf
2. te«,
8. aientf
1. at,
2. as,
3. a,
1. dmes,
2. dtes,
3. ^rfi«J^
PAST PARTICIPLE.
iw an^, ev ant,
PRESENT participle!
present indicative.
2nd. 8rd.
«.
"f i
I
i t,
tS8 ons,
iss eZf
is8 ent,
01 8,
oi 8,
oi if
ev onSf
ev ez.
oiv ent,
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
%8s ais,
iss ais,
188 ait,
is8 ion8,
iss iez,
188 aieni,
ev ats,
ev ais,
ev ait,
ev ions,
ev iez,
ev aieht,
.-mi'
PRETERITE DEFINITE.
t 8,
i S,
i t,
i mes,
i tes,
i Tent
U 8,
U 8,
U t,
H mes,
H tes.
re.
ant.
u.
4tb.
a.
oOs.
ez.
ent.
ats.
ais.
<>)'(•
ions,
iez.
aient.
t 8.
i 8.
i t.
i mes,
% tes.
% Teni^
I
OftAMtlAftv
•
yutunn
ABSOiUTB.
1
c rai,
{ ratf
ev rat,
rat.
2.
c ra»,
i ras,
ev ras,
raa*
8.
e rof
i iHf
ev ra.
ra.
I.
6 fonsy
i tOMy
«# ront,
rona.
2.
e reZf
i rez,
ev rez,
rex.
8.
e ront.
i ront,
«y ront,
ront.
OONDITtOKAL FRESBNT.
1.
e rdiif
i fais'f
tv rais,
rata. >
2.
e taia,
i rais.
ev rais,
rais. -
8.
e rait,
i rait,
ev rait.
raiL
1.
e rionSf
i rions,
ev rions.
rions.
2.
& fieZf
i riez.
ev riez.
riez.
3.
6 Ttiient,
i raient,
■ i^t; raient.
raient.
IMPERATIVJS.
2.
«,
i s,
0% $,
a.
1.
ons,
«88 ons,
ev ons,
ona.
2.
e«,
iai tz.
«* €Z,
SWBJtmCTIVK.
ez.
1.
e,
%%» ey
oiv e.
•e*
2.
c«,
iss es,
oiv es.
ea.
3.
c>
i»s «y
oiv e,
6.
1.
ionSf
iss ions,
ev ions.
iona.
2.
iezj
iss iez,
ev iez.
iez.
3.
entf
iss entf
IMPKRFEOT
oiv eni,
SUBJUNCTIVB.
ent.
1.
asi e,
iss e,
usa e.
iss e.
2.
ass esj
iss es.
uss es.
isa ea.
3.
a if
! ^/
u t.
i t.
1.
ass ionSf
iss ions,
uss ions.
iss ions.
2.
ass iez.
iss iez,
vss iez,
ias iez.
128
i
3. ass ent.
iss ent.
uaa ent.
i8€ ent.
124
GRAMMAR.
The learner wUl easily perceive that, if he knowa one colomn
of each of the different livisions of tenses, he will know the others,
as they are exactly the same, with the exception of a few letters, to show
they belong to the Ist, 2nd, 8rd or 4th conjugation ; such as e, i, oi ; for
the Present indicatif ; its, ev; for the Imperfect ; t, «, t ; for the Preterite ;
e, i, ev ; for the future and Conditional ; its, oiv ; for the Subjunctive Pre-
sent ; aas, m, usa, iss; for the Imperfect Subjunctive.
VEEBS OP THE FIBST CONJUQATIOIT.
87. Verbs of the first coDJugation end in the Infinitive Pre-
sent with er; in the Present Participle with ant ; and in the
Past Participle with i.
Infinitivb pbesbwt, er, chanter, to sing.
Prbsknt partioiplk, ant, chantant.
Past participle, S, chanti.
singing,
sang.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
I sing, I am singing or do sing.
Thou singest, thou art singing, or dost sing.
He sings, he is sin^in^ or does sing.
One sings, one is smgmg or does smg.
We sing, we are singing or do sing.
You sing, you are singing or do sing.
They sing, they are smg^mg or do sing.
PRETERITE INDEFINITE. — {CompOUUd temc.)
J'ai chants, I have sung or I have been singing.
(Je
chant
e,
M
Tu
chant
e»,
e
II
chant
c,
e -i
On
chant
«»
OTU
Notii
chant
ona,
ez
Vbtt8
chant
ez.
ent
Jls
chant
ent,
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
ai8
ais
ait
ait
iona
iez
aient
'Je chant ais,
Tu chant aia,
II chant ait,
On chant ait,
Noua chant ions,
Voua chant iez,
Ila chant aient.
I was singing or did sing.
Thou wast singing or didst sing.
He was singing or did sing.
One was singing or did sing.
"We were eing^g or did sing.
You were singing or did sing.
They were singing or did sing.
PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. — {Gompound feme).
X nSCt Sull£
QBAMMAa.
125
PERFECT OR PRETERITE DEFINITiyE.
at
as
a
dme$
diet
h'ent
erat
eras
era
erons
erez
eront
' Je chant ai,
Tu ehant as,
II chant a,
Nous chant dmes,
Vous chant dies,
lis chant hent,
I sang or did sing,
Thou sangest or didst sing.
He sang or did sing.
We sang or did sing.
You sang or did sing.
They sang or did sing.
PRETERITE ANTERIOR. — {Compouud tense).
J'eus chants, I had sung.
FUTURE ABSOLUTE.
fJe
Tu
II
chant
chant
ehant
» Nous chant
Vous chant
lis chant
erat,
eras,
era,
erons,
erez.
eront.
I will or shall sing.
Thou wilt or shalt sing.
He will or shall sing.
"We will or shall sing.
You will or shall sing.
They will or shall sing.
FUTURE ANTERIOR. — (Compound teuse).
J'aurai chante, I shall have sung.
erats
erais
erait
erions
eriez
eraient
fJe
Tic
II
Nous
Vous
lis
chant
chant
chant
chant
chant
chant
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
eravs, I would or should sing.
erais. Thou wonldst or shouldst sing.
erait. He would or should sing.
erions, We would or shovdd sing.
eriez. You would or should si-r-g.
eraient, They would or should sing.
CONDITIONAL PAST. — {Compouud tcnse).
J'aurais chantS
J'eusse chante
I should have sung; or
I should have sung.— See page 118, No. 19.
QiCU
Chant
chant
Chant
Chant
Qu'ils Chant
e,
e,
ons,
ez,
ent.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing thou.
Let him sing. (lake the^dsin. of the sub.)
Let us sing.
Do ye sing.
Let them sing. {lake the 3d pi. of the sub.)
Rem.— The 2nd person singular of the verbs of the 1st conjugation, in
the imperative, drops the («), unless followed by (m, y), pronouns, or .y,
adverb.
Iji
126
GftAMMAB.
PKEStNT StBJTNCTIVB.
That I may sing.
That thou mayest siog^
That ho may sing.
That we may sing.
That you may sing.
That they may sing.
PERFECT OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que faie chante, That I may have sung.
«
'Queje
chant
»,
it
Quetu
chant
a,
Qu'il
chant
e.
iona
Qw nous
chant
iant,
iez
Que voua
chant
iez,
ent
. Qu' iU
chant
ent,
asse
asses
At
assions
assiez
assent
'Queje chant asse.
Que tu chvnt asses,
Qu' il chant dt,
Que nous chant assions,
Que voua chant assiez,
Qu' lis chant . assent,
That I might sing.
That thou mightest sing.
Tlmt he niight sing.
That we might sing.
That yoti might sing.
That they might sing.
PLUPBBFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que feusse chante. That I might have sung.
Most French verbs belong to tbe first conjugation, and have
the same terminations as chanter,
88. Remarks. — 1st. Verbs ending with ccr in tbe Infinitive,
in order to preserve tlie i^dft sound of tbe c, must takd a cedilla
under it, wben before a, o ;
avanceTj to advance. terce^j td rock.
annonceVf to annoiin<ie. piricer^ to pinch.
suceVf to suck. percevj pierc6.
2nd. Verbs ending with ger^ to preserve the soft sound of g^
take mute before ajO ;
manger J to eat. dirangerj to disturb.
bottger, to stir. . nSgliger, to neglect
songer, to think. jftgery to judge.
3rd. Verbs ending withy«r, generally change the (y) into (*)>
when the y precedes (c, «s, cw<), and eraif erais.
aMiiiiifiittL.
127
have
iive,
dilla
>^ 9t
(»);
essuyer, to wipe. appu^er, to prop, to rest npon
halayevj to sweep. ennuyer, to tire, weary.
effrayer, to frighten. • rayer, to strike oat
emploi/er, to employ. payer, to pay.
ployevj to bend. nettoyer, to clean.
4th. Those in eler double their (T) :
amonceler, to heap up. c7«^<e/<?r, to unyoko.
chanceler, to stagger. ipeler, to spell.
""^^^^» ^^^ P"* horses to. renouveler, to renew.
rappeler, to recall, remember.
Except : tourreler, to goad, to torment ; diceler, to reveal, to
betray ; geler, to freeze; harceler, to harass; ;?c/er, to peel ; d£'
geler, to thaw ; which take a Q) on the e before the (/).
(See page 60, Part I.)
6th. Of all those ending in eter : Jeter, to throw ; caqueier, to
chatter, eackle; double their (t). All the others take a grave
accent oil the e before t, preceding («, es, ent').
cacheter, to seal. ddcacheter, to unseal. .
Jeierj to throw. caqueter, to chattel^
rejeter, to reject. projeter, to prefect.
6th. Those ending with ^^cr, ider, ever, ener, eser, as:
ahriger, to abridge ; cMer, to yield ; achever, to finish ; meiier,
to take, to conduct; peser, to weigh; change the Q accent ;
or if they bave none, take a grave 0) on the (e) before g, d, v,
n, «, before the unaccented terminations c, es, ent, erai, erais.
rigler, to regulate, rule, crever,
ahriger, to abridge. amener,
cdlibrer, td celebrate. peser,
compUier, to complete. dlever.
to burst,
to bring (along),
to weigh,
to bring up, lo
rai^e.
128
QBAMMAB.
89. The six remarks exemplified.
PRESENT INFINITIVE.
To rock, to eat, to pay, to spell, to throw,
Bercer, manger, payer, ipeler, jeter, .
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
BerfarU, mang{e)ani, payant, epelant, jetani,
PAST PARTICIPLE.
Berci, mange, paye, ipeU, jete.
to rule,
rigler.
to take.
m,ener.
rSglant, menant.
rigU,
mene.
Je
Tu
II
1
herce,
heroes,
beroe,
2
mange,
manges,
mange,
PPEESENT INDICATITE.
3 * . '^
paie, ipelle, jette,
paies, Spelles, jettes,
paie, ipelle, jette.
rigle,
regies,
rigle,
6
Kws berfons, mang{e)ohk, payons, ipelons, jetons, riglom,
Vcms bereex, mangez,
lis, hercent, mangent,
payez, ipelez, jetez, riglez,
payent, epellent, Jettent, riglent,
mhte.
mine.
mine.
menons.
menenez.
mhient.
1 8
Je berpais, mang{e)ais,
Tu berfais, mang{eym,
II berfait, mang{e)ait,
Nous bereions, mangions,
Vous berciez, mangiez,
lis berfaient, mang{e)aient,
jetais, rSglais,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
4 6
ipelais,
ipdais, jetais,
ipelait, jetaii, rSglait,
ipelions, jetions, reglioons,
epeliez, jetiez, regliez,
ipelaient, jetaieut, rSglaient,
6
menau.
menais.
menait.
m,enion»,
meniez.
menaient.
90. Hegular verb of the SECORD COHJVQAtlON.
Prbbent infinitivb, iV, choisiVf to choose.
Prkskut participlb, issantf choisissantf choosing.
Past farticiplv, if
choisif
chosen.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
Je chois is, I choose, am choosing, do choose.
Tu chois is, Thou choosest, art choosing, dost choose.
// cho4s it. He chooses, is choosing, does choose.
Nous chois issons, We choose, are choosing, do choose.
yih chois ireni, They choose, are choosing, do choose
/
Q&AMMAR.
129
1
IMPERFECT INDICATIVB.
take.
er,
mt.
hU
ns.
lez.
%t.
a.
».
U.
m».
z.
eni.
>ose.
isaais
issait
isaions
issiez
ismient
u
M
it
imes
ites,
irent
trai
iras
ira
irons
irez
iront
trats
irais
trait
irions
iriez
iraient
2. ia
3. isse
1. iaaons
2. isaez
3. iasent
CJe
Tu
II
Notia
lis
Je
Tu
II
Nous
Vous
lis
chois
chois
chois
chois
chois
chois
chms
chois
chois
chms
ahois
chois
' Je chois
Tu chms
II chois
Notts chois
Vaua ehois
lis chois
Jc
Tu
II
Nous
Voius
Ih
oh/sis
clxms
chois
duns
chois
chois
tssais,
issais,
issait,
issiom,
imez,
issaimt,
I was choosing, did choose.
Thou wast choosing, didst choose.
He was choosing, <fid choose.
Wfi were choosing, did choose.
Yoi were choosing, did choose.
They were choosing, did choose.
I
*
PERFECT INDICATIVE.
w, I choose, did chose,
is. Thou cbosest, didst choose.
it, He chose, did choose.
imesj "We chose, did choose,
ites. You chose did choose.
irent. They chose, did choose.
rUTUKB ABSOLUTE.
I shall or will choose. '
Thou shalt or wilt choose.
He shall or will choose.
We shall or will choose.
You shall or will choose.
They shall or will choose.
*! i*
trot,
iras,
ira,
irons,
tree,
iront.
m
CONDITIONAL PBESBNT.
irais. I would or should choose.
iraia, Thou wouldst op shouldst choose,
irait. He would or should choose.
iriotis, We would or should choose,
iriez, You would or should choose,
iraient, They would or should choose.
IMPERATrVB.
Chois
Qu'U chois
Chois
Chois
_ QuHls chois
IS
isse^
issons,
issez,
issent.
Choose (thou).
Let him choose.
Let us choose.
Let ye choose.
Let them choose.
(Idke the mbj.)
{Like tJw subj.).
tsse
isses
isse
issions
issiez
issent
' Queje chois
Que tu <hois
Qy! il chois
Que nous chois
chois
,Qu'lis~
o
PRESENT OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
That I may choose.
That thou mayest cljoose.
That he may choose.
Tliat we may choose.
rni.-i. _i
That they may choose.
iMes,
isse,
issions,
issent,
ill
130
GRAMMAB.
IMPERFECT or THE SUBJUNCTIVE
me fQueje chois iane,
issM Quetu (hm m«m,
it \Qu'U ekois it,
issiom 1 Quenauf ^hoia imam,
i»siez j Que^out choa issiez,
iamtt I Qh' Us vhoia issenf,
That I might choose.
That thou mightest choose,
f hat he mi^ht choose.
That we might choose.
That you mi^ht choose.
That they might choose.
The compound tenses are formed by adding cAowt, to the simple
tenses of Avoir, to hav« :
Conjugated like ilie model.
adoucir, to sofleQ-
to strengthen.
to aet.
to build.
to dewoljsh.
affermirf
agir,
dimoltrf
embelliry
ob6iry
pumr,
rigiVf
to embellish,
to finish,
to obey,
to punish,
to go vera.
91 • Hegular form of a yerb of the XEERD CONIVOATIOK.
PRBSBKT iNFiwiTiVB, evoiTj vecevotr, to receive.
PRBBKNT PARTICIPLE, ftro«l, Tccevant, receiving.
Past participub, Uj re$u, received.
The (c) of those in cevoir take a cedilla befoi« o, u.
rjt'BSt/ST inotcativb.
nwnt
wex
eivent
J5» rep oia,
Th, ref ois,
II ref oU,
Nou» reb won*,
Vout ree evez
11$ ref oivent.
J receive, am receiving, do receive.
Thou iTBceivest, art receiving, dost receive,
HeyeiBeives, is receivtog, does receive.
?^e receive, are receiving, do receive,
buf^ceive, are receivi]^, do receive.
'*'*«" receive, are recehii^, do receive.
imperfect indicative.
Je ree w^im,
Tm ree «»«{»,
/' Tie makf
Now rise fijumt,
Vottt f^ (sviex,
Il»
I was receiving, did receive
gou wast receivimr, didst receive.
He was receiving, did receive.
We were receiviii^, did receive,
^m were receiving, did receive.
simple
b.
eceive,
ire.
>.
e.
ve.
ua
«i
iAmes
utea
vrent
evrai
evraa
evra
evrons
evrez
evront
evrais
evrais
evrait
evrions
evriez
evraient
2. ois
8. oive
1. evons -
2. evez
8i oiveni
CJe tep w,
Tu rep Its,
II rep tit,
Nom rep vmes
Vom rep utes,
lis rep urent,
QUAHMAft.
Perfect indicative.
I received, did reeeive.
Thou receivedst, didst recdvtit
He received did receive.
We received, did receive.
You received, did receive.
They received, did recelvei
181
^Je
Tu
ifotts
Vous
lis
tee
rec
rec
rec
rec
rec
FUTURE ABSOLUTE!
^im, I shall or will receive.
evras. Thou shalt or wilt veGeiv«i
evra. He shall or will receive.
evrons We shall or will receive;
evrez. You shall or will receive^
evront, They shall or will receive;
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
'Je rec
Tu rec
II rec
Nous rec
Vous rec
lis rec
Qu'il
Hep
rep
Rec
Rec
^QuHh rep
evrais,
evrais,
evrait,
evHons,
evriez,
evraient.
OfS,
oive,
evotts,
oivent.
I should or would receive.
Thou shouldst or wonldst receivfli
He should or would receive.
We should or would receive.
You should or would receive.
They should or would receive.
IMt»ERATIVBi
Receive (thoti).
Let him receive. (Like thesuiff.)
•Let us receive.
Let you receive. t-v.'../^
Let them receive. (Likethsiutiji)
PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
Ot«M
oive
evions
eviez
oivent
usse
nases
ut
ussions
ussiez
QtMJe
Que tu
Qu' U
Que nous
Que vous
,Qu'ils
rep
rep
rep
rec
rtfi
oive,
oiyes,
oive.
eviez.
oivent,
That I may receive.
That thou mayest receive;
That he may receive.
That we maj receive.
That you may receive.
Tliftt they mdjr receive.
IMPERFSjE^T OP THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
^eje rep usse. That I might receive.
Quftu rep wstis, That thou mightest receive*
Qu tl rep tt. That he might receive.
Que nous rep u^one, that we might receive.
Que vous rep ussiez. That you might receive.
««p5»* ■sFfi':^
iT^a
132
qbammah.
There are very few regular verbs belonging to tbis conjugation :
apercevoir, to perceive. concevoir^ to conceive, to understand.
dieevoivy to deceive. pereevoir, to perceive, to collect taxes.
devoir, to owe, to be to, redevoir, to owe again.
The others in oir are irregular.
9a. Regular Verb of the FOUBTH CONJUGATION.
Prbsent iNFiNiTiVK, re, vendre, to sell.
Present participle, ant, vendant, selling.
Past participle, u, vendu, sold.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
■ vr-
§
9
om
at
OM
aU
aii
ions
iez
aient
M
M
it
imes,
ites
ireni
rat
rM
ra
rotis
rez
ront
'Je vend s,
Tu vend t, i
II vend
Nom vend otis.
Vans vend ez,
II* vend eiit.
I sell, am selling, do sell.
Thou sellest, art selling, dost sell.
He sells, is selling, does sell.
We sell, are selling, do selL
You sell, are selling, do sell.
They sell, are selliSg do seU.
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
vend
ms.
CJe
Tu vend ais,
II vend ait,
Nou8 vend ions,
Votu vend ie»,
lis vend aient.
'Je
Tu
vend is,
vend is,
II vend it
Nous vend tmes
Vom vend ties,
lis vend irent,
I was selling, did sell.
Thou wast selling, didst sell.
He was selling, did sell.
We were selling, did sell.
You were selling, did sell.
They were selling, did sell.
PERFECT.
I sold, did sell.
Thou soldest, didst sell.
He sold, did seU.
We sold, did sell.
You sold, did seU.
They sold, did seU.
FUTURE ABSOLUTE.
'Je vend rai,
Tu vend ras,
II vend ra,
Ifotts vend rons,
Votu vend rez,
lis vend ron£' "
I will selL
Thou wilt sell.
He will sell.
We will sell.
You will sell.
Hiey will sell.
ion:
and.
ite
'
rata
rais
rait
rions
riez
raient
2. s
3. e
1. ons
2. ez
3. ent
e
es
e
ioM
iez
ent
isse
isses
it
issiona
issiez
issent
QRAMMAB.
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
133
' Je vend rait,
Tu vend rait,
II vend rait,
Nom vend riont,
Vou9 vend riez,
lis vend raient.
I should or would sell.
Thou shouldst or wouldst sell.
He would or should sell.
We would or should sell.
You would or should sell.
They should or would sell.
Vend 8,
Qu'il vend e,
Vend
ons.
Vend ez,
Qu'ik vend ent,
IMPERATIVE.
Sell (thou).
Let him sell.
Let us sell.
Let ye sell.
Let them sell.
{Like the svhj.)
{Like the 8ubj.)
PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje vend
Que tu vend
J Qu' U vend
I Que nous vend
I Quevoita vend
(. Qu' ih vend
es,
f,
ions,
iez,
ent.
That I may sell.
That thou mayest sell.
That he may sell.
That we may sell.
That yoti may sell.
That they may sell.
IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTTVE.
Queje
Quetu
Qu' il
Quenma
I Que vott*
[ Qu' ih
u
vend
vend
vend
vend
vend
vend
taae,
issea,
K
issions,
isaiez,
issent
That I might sell,
That thou mightest sell.
That he might sell.
That we mi^t sell.
That you might sell.
That they might sell.
Conjugated like the model :
attendrcy to wait for. perdre, to lose.
difendre^ to defend. pendre, to hang.
deacendre, to come, go down, rendre, to restore.
entendre f to hear, understand, r^pondr^, to answer.
93.
BEXABXS OH TEE FIRST PER80H SIHGULAB OF 7EBBS TOED
INTESBjOATIYELT:
1st. Verbs of the first conjugation end with e mute ; but that
e mute becomes accented if followed bj the nominative of the
verb, as : VhanU-je ? Do I sing ?
ill
I ill
iti
mASK^AK.
2nd. For the second, it Would be ratber hard to say finU-jey
choNti's'Je ; so we njake use of est-ee que, before the pronoun and
verb, and we day , Jskt^ce ^je ckoisis f Da I ehoose ?
3rd. For the third we also say re^ois-Je ; but : Hgt'^e que Ja
regois ? Do I receive ? is fer better.
4th. For the fourth, we caonot say vends-Je f there being so
many consonants ; so we must say : Est-ci que je vends f Do I
sell ? but we can say regoU-fw f vends-tu f and so on, for all the
other persons.
Rkmark.— Bjr nidog wrci QVi-boMra ttaftitiia^ except Die SabstontWe and Trnperative
•nd any peraon of the four verbs givun, you caa make them interrogative wiUiout dia
placing the pronouna at all.
'BAJSSl'VlSi VERBS.
94. Passive Verbs as in English are coivfugated in French
with the simple and compound tenses of Etas, to be ; to which
is added any Past Partioiple of an active verb you ehoose to
make passive, as :
Je mis aimi de vottSy I am loved by you.
EUes ont 6t4pmieSj They have been punished.
Moreover, that Past Participle must agree in gender and io:
number with the nominative of the verb :
Nous avons dormij We have slept.
Nous sommes arriviSf We have arrived.
NSUTSB VEBBS.
Oaf. Neuter "Verbs in French are chiefly conjugated with
Avoir f but often with jE*r6 ; if with Avoir, the Past Parti-
ciple never changes ; if with Elrcj the Past Participle agrees
with the nominative of the verb.
The following are conjtigafted with Eire in their compound tenses :
atteff to go. ctllif gone.
arriver, to arrive. arriti, arrived.
d4c4dery to die, to be deceased, d^cidi, dead.
GRAMMAR.
ia5
I
deveniTf
to become.
devenu,
become.
entrer.
to come in.
entrSf
come it).
mourir.
to die, to load life
).moH,
dead.
naitrCf
to be born.
ni,
been born, boiti.
partirj
to set off, out.
parti,
setoff.
Tester,
to remato.
rests.
rcmaiDed.
tenity
to come.
venu,
come.
V
HEFLECTIVB VERBS.
96. Reflective or Pronominal Verbs are those wbieb are con-
jugated with two Personal Pronouns, as :
Je me, I myself. On se, One oneself.
Tu te. Thou thyself. Nous now. We ourselves.
Use, He himself. Vous voub, You yourself, or selves.
EUe
se.
She herself. lis se, They themselves.
97. The peculiarity of these verbs is, that th^ir compound
tenses instead of being conjugated with the auxiliary Avoir, are
always conjugated with Etre. When verbs are not reflective the
myself, &c., is expressed by :
Myself,
Thyself,
Himself,
Herself,
Moi-mime.
Toi-meme.
Lui-mtme.
EUe mime.
Ourselves,
Yourself or selves^
Themselves,
{
Nbus-mSmes,
Vous-mimet,
Eux-mimes.
Elles-memes..
98. SE LEVER.
Present infinitive, se lever,
Present participle, se levant.
Past participle, lev4^
Compound of the Inf. s'itre levi,
" Pres. Part. s*4tant lev4,
to rise, to raise oneself.
rising.
risen.
to have risen.
having risen.
136
GRAMMAB,
FSBBINT INDICATIVE.
[I rise.
/«
me
the,
Tu
te
Uvea.
II
se
Ihie.
Noxu
nou»
levons.
Vaus
vou$
levez.
lis
se
Uvent,
lUFEItFKOT.
[I was rising.
Je me levais.
Tu te levais.
Jl se levait.
Nous noiis levions.
Vom vous leviez,
lis se levaient.
i I
PERFEOTi:
[I rose, didrfse.
Je the Iwai:
Tu U levas;
Jl se leva.
Nous nous lev&mes.
Vdns voHs levdtes.
lis se levirerU,
FUTURE ABSOLUTE.
[I shall rise.
Je me iSverai.
Tu te Ih/eras.
Jl se Uvera.
Nous nous liverons.
Vous vous Iherez.
Jls se Uveront.
CONBITIONAI. PRESENT.
[I should rise.
Uverais.
Je
me
Tu
te
Uverais.
11
se
Uverait.
Nous
nous
Ihferiens.
Vous
Vous
Uveriez.
Ik
S€
leveraicnt.
PRETERITE INDEFINITE,
Je
m€
suis
Tu
f
es
II
«•
est
Nous
nlbus
sommes
Vous
VOUS
etes
lis
se
sont
[I have risen.
levS.
levS,
leve.
leves.
levesr.
leves.
PLUPERFECT.
Je
Tu
II
Nous
Vous
Jls
TO'
e
nous
vous
[I had risen.
etais leve,
etais levL
dait leve.
Hions leves.
eticg levSs.
Staient leves.
PERFECT ANTERIOR.
Je
Tu
Jl
Nous
Vous
lis
ttte
ie
se
fus
fus
fut
nous/Hmes
vo^ts f&tes
se fureni
[I had risen.
levS.
leve,
levS.
leves,
levis,
leves.
FUTURE ANTERIOR.
[I shall have risen.
Je me serai levi,
Tu ie seras leve,
II se sera levS,
Nous nous serons leves.
Vous vous serez leves.
lis se seront levis.
CONDITIONAL PAST.
Je
Tu
11
me
te
se
[I should have risen.
serats
serais
serait
serions
Notts nous
Vous vovs seriez
lis se seraieiu
levS.
kve.
live,
lives,
Uves,
kves.
»T»
.
GRAMMAR.
187
DfPEBATIVE.
Ijive-toi,
Qu'il se live,
Levoru-nons,
Zevezv-ous,
Qu'ih ae leverU, ■ Let them rise.
Rise.
Let him rise.
Let us rise.
Rise
I ve.
then]
FBESENT SUBJUNCTIVE.
[That I may rise.
Que je me live.
Que tu te liven.
Qu' il se live.
Que nous rums levions.
Que vons vous leviez.
Qu' Us se livent.
PEBFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je
Que tu
Qu' U
Que nous
Que vous
Qu' its
[That I may have risen.
me soia leve.
te
se-
rums
vous
se
sois leVe.
soit lei
soyoru lev
soyez leves.
soient kves.
IMPEBFECT.
Que je
Que tu
Qu' il
Que nous
Que vous
Qu' Us
[That I might rise.
me
te
se
nous
vous
se
levasse
levasses.
lev&t.
levassions.
levassiez.
levassent.
PLUPEBFECT.
[That I might haye risen
Que je me fusse levi.
Que tu te fvMes levis.
Qu' il se fut levis.
Que nous nous fussionsleves.
Que vous vous fusmz levis.
Qu' Us se fussent levSs.
ten.
REFLECTIVE AHD DiTEBROGATIVE.
99. S'ASSEOIB:
Present Indicative : Fst-ce queje m'assieds ? — See p. 49, No. 55*
PBESENT INDICATIVE.
isen.
w
assieds-
T'
ameds-
SI
assied-
Nous
asseyons-
Vous
asseyez-
B'
aaaeieni-
PBETEBITE INDEFINITE.
[Do I sit down.
[Have I sat do
je?
Me
mis- je assis ?
tu?
T'
ea- tu assis ?
a?
8'
est- il assis ?
nous?
Nova
sommes- nous assis ?
v<ms ?
Vous
etes- Vous assis f
Us?
Se
sont- Us assis i
188
GRAMMAR.
IMPKRFECT.
Jf'
T
8*
Nous
Votts
8'
T
8'
N<yu9
Vott9
8'
J/'
7"
8'
ITous
Vous
8'
[Was I sitting dowa ?
PLUPKKFECT.
atseyaw-
je ?
M'
etais-
tmeyai».
iu?
T
etah-
asseyait-
iU
8'
Stait-
asueyiona-
noun i
No'ua
etions-
cuseyiez-
vouii
Vtms
etiez-
aaaeyaient-
iht
8'
etaient-
[Had I sat down ?
Je
OMSM /*
tu
amn f
il
asais /
noxts
assis /
votts
etssiH ?
ih
assia ?
[Did I sit down ?
astia- je ?
aaaia- tu ?
aaait- il ?
cmimea- noxia ?
aaaitea- voua f
osairent-ila ?
PEaFKCT ANTERIOR.
[Had I sat down.
Me fua- je aaaia?
Te fua- tu aaaia f
^ fut- il aaaia?
Noua fAmea- noua aaaia f
Vom futea- vau» aaaia ?
8e furent- Ha aaaia)
FL'TdBE ABSOLUTE.
cuaierai-
aaaieraa-
aaaiera-t-
aaaierona
aaaiSrez-
daaieront-
[Shall I sit down.
FUTURE ANTERIOR.
Je?
tu?
il?
noua ?
Vous?
Ha?
Me
Te
8e
aerau
aera»'
aera-t-
Noua aerona-
Voua aerez-
8e aeront-
[Shall I have sat down ?
It- igt _.»'- 9
tu
il
noua
Vous
ila
aasis ?
aaaia ?
aaaia ?
aaaia ?
aaaia ?
aaaia?
JtP
T
8'
Nbut
Voua
8'
CONDITIONAL PRESENT.
[Should I sit down.
aaaierais- je ?
aaaierais- tu ?
aaaierait- il ?
asaieriona- noua ?
aasieriez- vous ?
asMeraierU- ila ?
Me
Te
8e
N^ov*
Voua
Se
CONDITIONAL PAST.
[Sould I have sat down.
aeraia-
aerais-
serait-
seriona-
seriez-
aeraients
je
tu
il
nous
Vous
ila
aaaia ?
aaaia ?
aaaia ?
aaaia ?
aaain ?
asais ?
100. A few tenses interrogativeley and negativeley ; and affir-
matively and negatively :
Je
Tu
21
Kous
Voua
fk
ne
ne
ne
ne
ne
ne
me
te
ae
nous
voua
H
[I do not rise,
leve pas ?
lh}ea
l^e
"levona
levez
Ihent
pas ?
pas ?
paa ?
pas?
paa ?
Je ne
Tu ne
II ne
Nouane
Voua ne
Ila ne
[I have not risen.
me auis pas leve.
'' ea pas hve.
«' est pas leve.
nous sommea pas lev',
vous Stcs pas hve.
se soil* pan Uv'.s,
QRAMMAB.
I8d
Ne me
Ne te
Ne se
Ne nous
Ne voiis
Ne te
Ihierai-
levertu-
levera4-
levir n?-
Icverez-
leveront-
[Shall I nbt rise t
tu
il
nous
vous
Us
pass
pas ?
pas ?
pas ?
pis f
pasi
N« m'
Ne e
Neif
Ne notts
Ne voils
Ne «'
[Had Inot sat doMm ?
(tai»- je pas assis ?
itaif- tu
Stait- il
etions- nous
Hiix- Vous
etaient- Us
pas assis ?
pas turns i
pas assis i
poB assis f
pas assis ?
IMFEftATIVIi XBOATIVE.
Ne
Qu*U ne
Ne nous
Ne vous
f assieds pas.
s' asseie pas,
asseyons pas.
asseyez pas.
Qu 'Us ne s' ttssemU pas.
Do not sit down.
Let hira not sit down.
Let us not sit down.
Do not sit down.
Let them not sit down.
s'adresseTf
se haigneTf
se diptcher^
s'enrhumerj
A LIST.
to apply oneself.se fdchert
to bathe. s'attendrey
to make haste, se riunir^
to catch a cold, se tromperj
to get angry,
to expeot.
to assemble,
to be mistaken.
IMPBIUHnrAI YIEIS.
101. Impersonal Verbs better called UNiPERgokAi,, so
named because only used in the 3rd person singular.
Inf.
arrivery
neigeVf
gelery
digeleVf
greler,
fallohj
to happen,
to snow,
to freeze,
to thaw,
to hail,
Pres. Part.
arrivantf
neigeanty
gelanty
digelantj
grelantj
Past Part
arrivSy
neigiy
geU.
ddgelS.
grili.
to be necessary, no Pres. Part. /allu.
11 arrivey
II arrivaity
II arrivuy
II arriveray
Jl arriveraity
ARRIVER.
It happens. 11 est arrivij It has happened
It bappened.
It happened.
It will happen.
It would happen.
140
QRAMMAB.
Qu*tl arnve. That it may happen.
Qu'il arrivdty That it might happen.
Its compound tenses are conjugated with Eire.
109.
Ilfautf
llfallait,
Il/allutf
ll/audrOf
ll/audraitf
QuHlfailU,
Qu'ilfaMtf
7ALL0IR.
It is necessary. 11 a fallu, It has been
It was necessary. [necessary.
It was necessary.
It shall be necessary.
It should be necessary.
That it may be necessary.
That it might be necessary.
PLEUVOIR.
103. Pleuvoirj to rain;^/cttyaw^,^/M.
Itjpleutf
11 pleuvaity
II pint f
II pleuvraj
11 pleuvraitf
Qu'il pleuve,
Qu'ilpMt,
It is raining.
It was raining.
It was raining, f
It shall rain.
It should rain.
That it may rain.
That it might rain.
Ilaplu, It has rained.
Y AVOIR.
104. Y avoir, there to be; y ayant, there being ; eu, been.
II 2/ ay
Ily avaity
^11 y eut
11 y aura J
II y aurait,
Qu'il y ait,
Qu'il y eut,
There is or there are.
There was or were.
There was or were.
There will be.
There would be.
That there may be.
That there might be.
II y a eu,
There has been.
fhf.T7^Tr°^^ r'^' ^'' conjugated according to the conjugation
they belong- to, but only in the 3rd singular. J^&auon
OBAMMAB.
141
FOBHATION OF THE TENSES FOB THE FOTJB
BEQULAB CONJUGATIONS.
(See pages 124-28-80-82.)
lOtl. There are Jive primitive tenses^ or tenses used or said to
form the others ; they are :
1. The Pbbsknt Infikitivs, forming two tenses.
2. The Prbsent Participle, " three "
3. The Past ParticiflBi all the compound tenses.
4. The Present Indigativb, forming one tense.
5. The Pbeteritb Definite, '* one "
106. The Infinitive Present forms the Future and Condi-
tional bj changing :
KR> IB, BvoiR, Ri, into :
1st eratf irai, evrm, raiy Future.
2nd eraiSf iraiSy evratXj rais. Conditional.
(See page 128.)
107. The Present Participle forms the three persons plural
of the Indicative Present, the Jmper/ect Indicative and the Pre-
sent SubjunctivCf by changing :
4;.'-; 1 U
PRBSENT INDICATIVE.
1st
2nd
3rd
lit 001^.
ANT,
ons,
ez,
ent.
atSf
es,
ions.
2ndeoqj.
IS8ANT,
tssoni,
issezj
issent.
3rd codJ.
KVANT,
evons,
eveZf
oiventf
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
usaut
evais.
SUBJUNCTIVE PRESENT.
tSSCf
isseSf
iisCf
issions.
oive,
oivesj
oive.
4th oodJ.
ANT, into
ont,
ez,
ent,
e.
es.
e.
«
iOTtS.
.^ V ^Jki-l
m
OIUMMAA.
$\:
*«, ifisirzy evieg., tea.
fntf ijufnt, of vent, ent.
108, Tbe ipAST Participle forms all compound tenses with
the help of Avoir and Mre :
fTaiparUy I have spoken.
Je SU18 icoutiy I am listened to.
Je me mulevif I hiave ^isen, got op.
109. The Prksbnt Indicatiitb, forms the Im,pen^tlve by
suppressing the pronouns of the 2nd person /singular, Jst and 2nd
pertion plural, used as nominatives :
2nd p. sing.
1st p. pi.
2nd p. pi.
2nd p. sing.
1st p. pi.
2nd p. pi.
1st codJ.
ons
e».
ons.
ez.
2nd ooDj.
iSf
issonSf
issez,
INTO
is,
tssons,
tsaez,
3rd conj.
OlSf
evons,
evez.
on,
evons,
evez.
4th ooqj.
ons, Vindicative.
ez, J
ons
ez
ns, I
'y )
Imperative.
* Rem.— -Verba of the first conjugation and others, ending withes in the
Present Indicative, 2nd person singular and vm, go ; drop the («) in the
Imperative, except before tiie words en, y.
IIO. The Perfect Disfinite fornja the Imperfecit Subjunc-
tive bj changiqg the followipg of the Preterite :
lit codJ.
Zaieovti.
SrdcoQj
4tb eonj.
AI.
IS,
US,
18, etc.,
into:
a3$e,
isse.
u^e,
iste,
aates,
tueSf
ussesj
isteit
at,
it.
Ht,
it.
assions,
tasions,
iiMtons,
issions.
as9iez,
issiez.
usstez,
issiez.
assent,
issent.
ussent.
issent.
By following exactly the rules given No. JW, and others, it will bo
Msy to iMra aU Mm r«gular .Fnuxch verbs.
OBAMMAB.
U3
i with
IBBEarjLAB VEBBS.
We call irregular verbs those that are in their primitiTe and
derivative tenses, not pi'eciselj like the four conjagations given
aa models, pages 124-28-80-32.
^e by
d2nd
ttve.
ative.
ia the
in the
June-
»:
riUbe
THE ALMOST INTARIABLV TKRHINAnoMS OF THE IP.REGVLAIl VERBS Ol" 2nD,
3rd and 4th ookjuoations.
(See page 121.)
They are : '
FOR THE PRESENT IlfDICATITB
Slug. (flometimen,)
1. S,
2. «,
3. t,
X.
PI.
onSf
ez,
entf ont.
Verbs of
one flyl
IsUe.
C, </,
FOR THE IMPERFECT INDIC.
Sing. rl.
FOR THE CONDITIOHAt.
Sing. PL
rions.
1. dig J iontf
2. aiSf ieZy
3. ait, aient.
FOR THE PRETERITE DEFlJaTE.
8bg. Fl.
!• 8f tneSf
2. Hj tes,
3. t, rent,
FOR TttB TUTUBK ABSOLUTE.
Slug. PI.
1. rais,
2. rats, riez,
3. rait, raient.
FOR THE IMtPERATIVE, (like the
PRESENT INDICATIVE.)
Sing. PL
1. ons,
FOR THE PBES. SVtH.
Slpg. PL
1. e, ions,
2. es, iez,
3.
ent.
1.
3.
rat,
ras,
ra.
rang,
rez,
ront.
FOR THE DIPERF. OF THE StHJ^.
Bing. PL
1. Uty tSlonf,
8%e8.
8. /,
Miez,
saeni.
REM.--Whatever may be the root of the tense given, knowing the first
singular, you simply add the remainder of the termination to the root.
Rem.— For example, take the futurey'*rai, I shall go ; were
It rega.ar, it should h^ af^#^|.»uppwi^g to psga liX, X^^^ ilO|>|
'
114
GRAMMAR.
bat being irregular, the all has been changed into i, and the
regular ending erai into rai ; therefore by following the rest of
fhp endings of the future we shall have :
*J* i raiy Nous
Tu i ras, Vous i
II i ra, Ih i
and this applies to all tenses and Terbs.
rOTMy
rezj
ront.
lORMAnOK OF THE TEN8E8 OF IREBOUIAR VERBS.
As with regular verbs, there are five primitive tenses : see
page 141. '
1. The Present Infinitivk forms the i?'M«ure and Conditional,
by changing the final r of the 2nd and 3rd conjugation, and the
re of the 4th, into :
^"*"™' Conditional.
raif
ras,
ra.
rons,
rez,
ront.
rats,
rats
rait.
'1
rions,
rtez,
raieni.
2. The Prbsbnt Participle forms the three persons plural of
the Indicative, the Imperfect, of the Indicative and the Present
Subjunctive ; by changing ant into ;
Ind. Present. Imperf. Ind.
1.
2.
8.
ons,
ez,
ent.
1. ais,
2. ais,
3. ait.
tons,
iez,
aient.
1.
Prea. Buy.
2. c«,
3. e.
tons,
tee,
ent.
3. The Present Indicative, forms the Imperative by sup-
pressing the pronouns used as nominatives as ;
tu
nous,
vous.
ons,
ez.
V into : <
«.
ons.
ez.
4. The Preterite Definite forms the Imperfect Suhjunctive
by changing its final s of tht; 1st singular into *' "^ ^ ' ■^''
145
1. «sc, ssionsj
o« /. SS€tlt *
ana always placing a C) over the vowel preceding the < of the 3rd
singular, an if there be none, over the vowel of the root.
*!, '^^l ^^^. ^^^"^^™ *'«'-«»8 all compound tenses with
tlie aid of Avoir and Mre.—See page 142, No. 108.
^KKMARKs.-The verbs Avoir and Etre are not comprised in the
above rules as they are given iu full, and greaUy deviate from
■ <*'t
IMPORTANT OBSEBVATIONS.
All through out the irregular verbs, as soon as the'word reg. or
jular occurs in the TableauG4nM, page 146, the pupil must
at once refer to the formation of tenses in irre^lar verbs
Whenever a tense can not regularly be formed from its primitive,
it IS given m full for the Present Indicative and Subjunctive, and
only the first person singular for the others ; for it shall be ea^y to
the learner knowing the 1st singular to go on with the rest of the
terminations which he must have learnt previously, orreferagain
|o his list of irregular terminations.
The Ban hitherto pursued in French Grammars, of giving the
irregular verbs at full length, has been in my candid opinioif ex-
tremely pernicious to beginners, because they have trusted te their
memory without caring whether they understood their verbs or
not, and after a day or two have forgotten them. I have witnessed
this same defect with advanced pupils.
If I lay a great stress on the irregular verbs, it is because they
are most important ; and I may say it is perfectly absurd for
teachers to make their pupils translate free French, who have not
earned their irregular verbs : therefore, thethirdpart or Reading
hook mil prove of the greatest necessity, till the pupil is sul
cienty advanced to undertake the task of finding readily in\
good Dictionary, the words he wantf, ^ ^
9 «
Ui
OKAHMAlt.
M
TABIMAU QBHBBAL OF ALL THS
BHOWING AT ONE OLAMCE THEIR
FIRST
PBIBflTIVi: XMXtSK.
• XRitynifji.
Au n, toffo.
TBMS1C8.
fiftw*
AbMlato.
J'i nL
hMU*>««M«* iWi'JaHiiM *i fcii
OomdRMwd
J'Iraif.
TJiN8&
ParUdple.
■U ant
PEEXT
tnd.
Betf.
. mt l tA BK g Oil THB IBBIOULAE TSBM OF TOE FdlM! COmvOATlOMl
1^ Ji^, Is cDbjtigiited in its ebittpound tenses witli the ani
iliary i;i()*«, so thiit the l^ist I^alrtieiple tbust agree tr ith the A6mi-
native of thi; verb in gender and in number : JSite M altie se
promehii^-^he is gone to take a walk.
J*ai 4tif ^p.f nsieans that I have goae and retamod ; bttt Je
««M aUif etc.j means that I have gone and not returned.
2. S'en aller; is conjugated Xikedtlet } and in its simple tenses
by ptaoing : jfe »n'eit, tu t'en, U «V», nous nous en, vous voua en,
tit i^erif before the simple tense otdlkf j and in interrogations,
by placing j>, /«, t% noitt, t>di«, t7«, after the verb. In com-
pound tenses, by placing/* m^en, etc., before the simple tenses of
I ^ii
gftlMM.
DEBIT
•rfaMi^iM*
RTOULARinES AND IltBEOrLARmES.
CONJUGATfOK.
J^nfji fMHBEB.
^'itlki AMD Bffit.
TSNSB.
Prwknt
■IIU, aUleB, imie.
•UfcMu, iM, alllsnt
•/« w' en vaw,
^ ^ en vas,
^^ ^ en -ya,
yok% vous dn dtteZf
I^ «' en vont.
*T{vI^jl'»IMITIVfi
• A -
^■^P«»- I Preterite
tli'e. Definite.
Je
Tu
11
Vout
lis
m' en
i* en
** <n
nous en
I'otM en
en
suts aiti,
es alUf
est aliif
sommes allis,
ites aUisj
8ont altis.
n wt A — - c#» aunt aties.
ll£M.--There are.at least 5000 verbs, if not more which h^
tenses from which they an fontted. pnmmw
The 1st conjugation has bnt three irregular verbs : alkr, which
aas been given, et,mj,er, and renvoj,er which an conjugated like
chanter P. 124, and are imgular only in the Future and Condi-
nontl rtea; Jtnvef rai, J'enver rail.
148
OBAMMAB.
SECOND
PRIMmVB TBNSB.
DSMYATITB TBMS8S.
PKIMITIVX
TENSE.
WKvr
INFINinVB.
fatnre
Absolute.
Conditiooal
Present.
Present
Partlciplei
Imperf.
Ind.
ACQUiB IB,
f n> OCQi9HT€m
'«o4iil«r tal.
fnqtwrtBis,
■eqnfo «nL
Regvkar.
Bdunin,
ioboO.
Regutar.
ReguUxr.
boom ant
d»
CoUB nt,
to run.
}e ooQr ra5.
Jeooor nis.
ooor ant.
do
CtTDLL IB,
togaiOur.
JaeneUtoral.
JeoaeiUenas
oorili ant.
do
Faiix nt,
to/aO.
Rtffviwr.
J?<gwl(ir.
fidUant
do
To r.
toihun,U>fl!faway.
do
do
ftayant
«o
Msira IB,
iolie,teUan untruth.
do
do
mentant.
do
HOUB IB,
to die. '
Jemournt.
jemonrnia.
monrant
do
Om IB,
to offer.
/&>^«tar.
RegtOar.
offr ant.
**';\
OulB,
to hear.
.foul raL
j'oul nis.
none. ,
nomff ^
Tin n,
toluHd.
je tiend nd.
je tiend nds.
tenant.
do-l
Vra a,
todotht.
Regular.
R^vJar
Tfitant.
do
■KfOilkrtXfK ON THK IBREOULAR VEEB8 OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.
In ibis way we see that the second conjugation of irre-
gular verbs is divided into ,^weZ{;6 principal beads of verbs from
which other derivatives are conjugated.
1. AcQUERiE, has conquirir, to conquer ; not often used, except
in the Future and the compound tenses.
2. Rkquerir, to request ; a law expression. ,^
8. S'bnquerir, to inquire ; often used in the Infinitive and
the compound tenses : je me sms enquia.
4. QuKRiR, rather old, moaning to fetch ; is only used in the
Infinitive.
5. Cueillir, to gather, has assaillirj to assault ; tresiailUry to
be started j accueilliry to welcome ; recuetllir, to collect j and
149
CONJUGATION.
.'V
ATITB 9XN8BS
Prewnt
SaltlunctiTe.
ioDB, les, Idrent.
do
do
do
do
do
menre, m, •, mon-
rlons, ies, meuxeat.
Secular.
None.
tienne, m, e, tenlons,
Ies, iiennent.
PRIM. AND DKB.
TflNSB.
PraMDt
IndicmtiTe.
DERIYA-
TIT*.
Imper»-
tire.
Mqvitn, kn, Uart, lUguUnr.
ons, ex, liiviit.
boas, bona, boot,
PLreg.
oonrBi n, rt.
caeiUa, ei, e^
pLrtg.
fkiix,z,t,
IiLreg.
je fois, full, fait,
pLng.
mens, a, t,
meun,n, rt, men-
roDs, «■, meannt.
J'offre, es, e;
S^rtg.
None.
Je tiena, 8^ t.
pi. reg. tienneat.
VfitS, Vltfl, T^t.
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
Regular.
do
PBIMITITB
TKNS&
Preterite
Definite.
DBB.TJSNB.
Imperfect
raltfanetiTe.
P. TENS
j'aoqnls.
JeboniUla.
jecooru s.
Je cndUI b.
je fldlU «.
Jeftalt.
jeme&tlg.
Jemonrtts.
j'offlri •.
j'ool B.
je tin 8.
je Ttl6 B.
Begidar.
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
Put
Purtidp.
acquis.
bouUU.
oonm.
coflilU.
MOL
M.
menU.
Dort.
ofTert.
ooL
tenu.
T^tn.
m
HsbtressatWr, to start, to be started, which aire conjugated m the
same way,
IRREGULARITIES IN MOST GRAMMARS.
6. AssAlLLiR, to assault, and tressailltr, to be started ; should
follow the exact conjugation of cueillir, as given in the Tableau.
Still, some grammarians make asBaiUiry and tressmUir regular
according to their Infinitives ; that is to say, they make their
Futures to be ye tressaillirai and fassaillirai instead of tressail-
lerai and assaillerai ;iike cueillerai, their Present Indicatives
ore :JecuetUefje tressaiUe,j'as8aille.
. 7. FuiR, to shun has s'enfuir, to run away.
8. CouRiR has :
accourtr.
to run to.
dueourir, to discourse.
~\counrj
to incur*
concourirj
parcourir,
secourh'j
to concur^
to run over,
to succor.
I"-
m
O&AltMAlL
9. BouiLUB, has rehauillir, to boil again. See toutttir,
Ebouintr, to bofi iiriy ; used ottTy iti Uie tttfinitite PfeMiit
and PiMt Participle, ibouilH, e,
^outttiTj itself is generally tiied witb/diVc :
Faiie$ houilUr PtttUf
MalMth«wlit«rbMl;
to. Mbntir, to lie, lias :
,
tnd&rmirf
to InU asleep.
partitf to set ont.
iendormirf
to &I1 asleep.
repartiff to set oat ag^n.
dormiTf
to sleep.
tentiTf to feel, [to reply
re$itntir,
to resent.
dimendi^f to belie.
Mortir,
togo.qut.
pressaait, to foresee.
resmrtirf
to go out again.
te rtp^Uf, to wp€iit.
consentir,
to consent
terendortnir, to fall asleep
destervir.
to clear tfie table, to do an ill office, [again.
to act against one.
11. Rkssortir, to go oat again ; is oonjnglited like mmiir*
Rettoriir, to be dependant upon, belonging to ; in that senseia
like chomr and consequently regular.
12. Rbpartir, to set off, out again ; ist just like /)art»r or
meiUir ; but ripartir, with the (' ) and meaning to share, to
divide, b regular like jSmV.
13. Oi-FRitt, to offer, has :
cottwnV, to cover. iouffrxr^ to suffer.
recouvrifj to cover again. ouvriTf io open.
dicouvriVf to discover.
All verbs ending With/nV, vrir, are conjugated alike.
14. TsiTiR, to hold, to keep :
8*ahsienirf to abstain ontoelf from.
^nireiemff to keep up, to ooavefid.
dlUHSfAiL
161
appaiiemr, to belong.
eontentTf to coDtftib.
maintenir, to maintain.
obtMtrf to obtain.
ret^iVj to iettiin*
MouttniTf to sustain.
>cn»V, to coihe.
cteveniTf
inlervinir^
parveniTf
se touvenir.
to become,
to intervene,
to succeed,
to aBtiei|Nlt^
to com6 backp'
to remember.
M reisouventr, to recollect.
'^. tmvenir, to agree, to suit ntbvenir, to relieve.
RftsiAK.— FmiV, <fetf<M{r, iwrp^ni*-, are genertdfy conjagated with Jh^e
in their compoudtd tenseSi
ConwutV, meaning to suit, takes avoir ; meanine to aeree
takes mti. ^
RiM.— It mm ha Wmarked tbat terbs hi entt double the (n)
wben followed by c, e», ent, unaccented.
15. Vbtir has $e titir, to clotbe Ofleeelf ; revUir^ to invest, to
putclothes on ; «e revUir^ to invest oneself ; m divUir^ to divest, to
take clothes off.
16. Hair, to hate; is a regular verb; it must be remarked
tbat It takes two dots or diserises (") over the't in all its conju-
gation, except on the three pertom sinffular of the Present Indi-
eatif and 2n<2 nn^te/a}* of the Imperative.
17. BAnir, to bless ; is also regular. It peculiarity is that it
has two Past Participles : bint, in its proper sense ; Unit with a
(<) in its figurative signiioation :
Figurative. / ^^ pain Unit Z)e rcdi* b^nite,
\ Holy bread. Holy water.
Proper.
{
Dteu a b^ni cette /amUle,
God has blessed that familly.
I
i
1
QBAMMAn
18. Flburib, to blosom, bioom ; is regular. Its peculiarities
are that it changes its root Jleu into Jlo in the Present Participle
and Imperfect Indicative only in a figurative sense.
Za vitte de Toronto florumnt en commerce et en sciences.
The City of Toronto flourishing in commerce and sciences.
19. OuiR is used in the Preterite Definite, Future, Conditional
Present and Imperfect Subjunctive ; also in its Past Participle,
OMl, m. or ouUy f. ; is obsolete in the other tenses or moods : it
means to hear by report ; or like entendre^ to hear by paying
attention to what is said. We say : je Vai oul dire, I have
heard it said.
Tu ouiras la messe lec^imanche, Thou shalt hear mass on Sunday.
20. Fkrib, means to strike ; rather obsolete, except in the In-
finitive in this phrase :
Nous nous empardmes de la ville sans coup firir.
We took possession of the town without striking a blow.
Firuy its Past Participle is very seldom used.
21. Saillib, to project ; only used in the Infinitive and Pre-
sent Participle, «ai7/an<.
Saillir, meaning to gush out, to spring up j has its Past Par-
ticiple sailli, conjugated with^wotV; its other tenses are obsolete.
Still, we say : Icseaux saiUissent, the waters gush out.
22. Gbsib, is not used any more in the Infinitive Present, and
means to lie down. Still, we say : il gXt.nous giasons yous gissez,
Us gisent, il gisaity gisant, lying down j ci-g%t, here lies.
23. Sb Mourir, to be dying, to be on the point of death ; is
conjugated only in the Present Indicative and Imperfect Indica-
tive. '
r«
GRAMMAR.
153
iFII
PBACTICAL LESSON,
ON THE FOUMATION OP THE TENSES.
As each primitive tense is placed close to its derivative tense or
tenses, by following the rules and terminations, at page 143 and 144,
the difficulties will soon disappear, •
Let us take Acquerir.
The InJiniHte forms the Future and Conditional ; therefore it
should be, by changing the letter (r) into rai, and the rest according
to No. 1, page 144 ; mqueHrai : not being so, it is given in the Ti*-
Ueau, and acquer becomes the root and rai the termination.
The Present Participle, acquerant, forms the three persons pliu^l
of the Present Indicative ; therefore according to No. 2, page 144
we change ant into ons, ez, ent ; then we shall have \equeronL
acquerez—TQgiiXav ; but we have acquidrent for the 3rd person plural
instead of acquerent ; it must then be irregular in that 3rd pi.
In the same manner, the Subjunctive Present is irregular in tlie
1st, 2nd, 3rd sing., and 3rd pL ; and regular in the 1st and 2nd pi •
because were it regular all through, it would be changing ant, into •
e, es, e, tons, iez, ent; acquer e, es, e, ions, ies, ent,- but it is ac-
quier e, es, e, ent; therefore the 1st, 2nd, 3rd sing., and 3rd
pl.^ are nTegular, not in the terminations, but in the root.
The Present Indicative forms the Imperative by suppressing its
pronouns used as nominatives ; it shall be simple enough to make
tu acquiers, nous acquerons, vous acquerez,
into : acquiers, acquerom, acquert^.
The 3rd persons sing, and pi. of the Imperative are always the
same as the 3rd persons sing, and plural of the Present Subjunctive,
The Preterite forms the Imperfect of the Subjunctive by changing
Its {s) of the first singular into sse, sses, t, ssions, ssiez, ssfht ;
havmg acquis, itnnust give acquisse, acquisses, atquU, aequissions.
mquissiez, acquissent.
The Past Participle forms all compound tenses by prefixing to it
either Avoir or Etre. So, we have, ^fai acquis, etc., j. suis
«»-TheRme8are preclse,and if followed mast work out alltho irregular verbs In
tlie rules are given in full for the Present Indicative and Subjunctive and ©nlv in th,.
l8t singular for the others, as is the case for aci^u'nr. "J"n"«T«. aad e^'y in the
m
m
154
GRAMMAR.
Ji \
\ w
1
I i
PBIJUTIVB TENSE.
INFINITIVE.
ASBi oia, to lit.
Ch ora, tofatt.
DfiOH OIB, to decay.
ECH oni, to/ott due.
Taiix oih, to le necetsary.
tiow oiu, to move.
Poxniv oiB, to provide.
Pout om, to be abU.
Pii£TAt OIB, to prevail.
Pe4v OIB, toforeue.
Bav ore, to Jcjiow.
Tax. OIB, to be woj-Wj.
VoiB, to»ee.
Voiiii oiE, to M»t«/», to l>« vtiUing.
Sb om, to«"<.
Si cm, to »Mi<, /<•
SOBSBOIB, to put off.
TABLEAU G^NifiRAL, Etc.—
THIRD
DERIVATIVE TENSES. PRIM. TENS
I
Future
Absolute.
J'anid ni.
none.
jed6oherrBi.
j'ocher rol.
il (kud ra.
Je mouT rai.
Regular.
je poTirnd.
je prftvand-
rai.
Regular.
je sau ral*
jo vaud rai.
je yet rai.
je Toud rai.
none.
il 8i6ra, Bi6-
ront.
Regular.
Conditional
Pre§ent
Present
Participle.
j'aniiraifl.
none.
je d6cbernii8
j'Acherrals.
il fiiudrait. I
je mouvraiB.
Reg.
je ponrrais
je prfiraud-
rais.
Regular.
je Ban rais.
je vaud rais.
je Ter rais.
je Toud rais.
none.
il si^rait, 8i6-
raient.
Regular.
awey ant.
none.
do
6cb6 ant.
none.
mouT ant.
pourToy ant
pouT ant.
pr6Tal ant.
pr6Toy ant
sach ant.
val ant.
voy ant.
Toul ant.
s6 ant.
s6yant.
sursoy ant
DElilV
lDip«rf.
Ind.
Regular,
none.
do
do
il fallait.
Regular.
do
do
do
{
do
aavalB, b, t,
ions, ioz,
aient
Regular.
do
do
none.
11 seyait,
ils 8«y aient
Regular.
^EEMARKS ON THE IBEEGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
1. AssEOiB, has s'asseoir, to sit down, lit. to sft oneself.
2. Dechoib, to fall ; as in this sense :
Jl est dSchu dans Vestime du puhlic^
He is fallen in the esteem of the public ;
it is conjugated with Eire or with Avoir.
3. MouvoiR, to move J has promoumV, to promote; and 6mour
voir J to move in a moral way.
t
GRAMMAR.
155
(ConiinitS.)
CONJUGATION.
ATITE TENSES
PreMOt
Babjuqctire.
Jtegular.
none,
dfichoie, m, e.
ddchoyions, les, ont.
(cboie, oieii, oie.
pi- reff oient.
qu'U lUlIe.
meuTe, ea, e, mou-
Tions, iez, meuvent.
Megular.
puisBe, es, e, pals-
siuns, iesi, eat.
Jiegular.
Regular.
JRegular.
Taille, es, e, Tallons,
ieis, vaill nt.
Regular.
Teuille, 68, e, von-
lioDS, iex, Teuillent.
nont.
do
surseoie, es, e,
BursoyioDB, ez, ent.
PKIM. A DER. T.
Present
Indlcatire.
assieds, da, d, as-
seyons, ez,^as8eleut.
none.
d^chois, s, t, d^
chojons, ez, oient.
6chol8, a, t,or6chet
^chfions, ez, ent or
il fttut. [oient.
mens, a, t, mon.
voDB, ez, meuvent.
pourrois, a, t, pour
Toyons, ea, oient.
peux, orpuis, penz.
peat, pouTons, ez,
pr6vaux, [peuvent.
aux, aut. pi. reg.
pr6vois, oiB, oit.
P<. reg.
sals, R, t, aavons,
ez, ent.
▼aux, aux, aut.
DER. TEN PRIM. TENS.
Impera-
llTe.
pi. reg.
vow. s, t.
pLreg.
veux. X, t, Tonlons
ez, veulent.
none.
iieied, ila silent.
jsurseois, eola, eoit,
loyons. ez. eolent.
Txegular.
none.
Regular.
do
none.
Regular.
do
none.
Regular.
do
Regular.
do
do
veuillez.
ncne.
do
Regular.
Preterite
Definite.
J'asfli B.
none.
Je d6cha a.
J'fichu a.
il fallut.
Je mu a.
je pourva s.
je pu 8.
je pr6valu a.
Je pr^vi a.
je su a.
Je valu a.
je vi 8.
je Toula 0.
none,
do
Je sursl a.
DER. TENS
Imperfect
SoJunctive.
R^ular.
none.
Rqfular.
do
qn'il faimt
Regular.
do
do
do
do
do
de
do
do
none.
do
Regular.
P. TENS
Past
Particlp.
chn.
d^chn. .
6chu.
falla.
mu.
pourvu.
pu.
pr6valu.
prfivu.
an.
valu.
vu.
voulu.
Bia.
none.
sursia.
4 PouvoiR has no Imperative ; but we use the Subjunctive in
its Stead. Fiiissiez-vous, may you.
5. Valoir has iquivaloir, to be equivalent ; and revaloiVj to
give the like for the like.
6. Voir has entrevoivj to have a glimpse of, and revoir, to see
again.
7. Vouloir, has for Imperative only the second plural veuillez.
The third conjugation, as it may be seen, is not very large and
nan oociilTr \\t\ L
if
i?'i
im
aHAMHiAft.
!
TABLEAU G^ldKAL, Etc.—
FOURTH
PRIMITIVE TENSE.
INFINITIVE.
Abboud se, to absolve.
Atteai Be, to uUracU
C\n RE, to beat.
Boi lie, to rfrmiV.
Bail ns, to bray.
Beui be, to roar.
CiBCONCi BB.to ciixumcise.
Cu) BE, to close, to ti'mt,
ConcLU BE, to conclude.
CouDDi E«, to conduct.
CosFi BE. to pickle, i}reiei-ve<
ConsaIt be, to be acquainted.
COOD BE, io tfW.
Cbaino ftB, to fear.
Ceo: b*. to believe.
CioIt rB, logrom.
Ml BE, <o «ay.
£cxo B6, to hatch, !o come to
IkiiRi !t5, to wri'e.
to (to, ma7.e.
to/j-y.
to reed.
ioeJtine.
DERIVATIVE TENSES.
Taturd
Absolute.
I Cktumtlonal
I Pr«Miit.
Regt'lar.
do
do
do
il braini, Us
biaironti
none.
EtQuiar.
jo cl6r.'.'.
Rfgulor.
do
do
do
do
do
do
PRIM. TEN. DERIV
Pre«ent
Participle.
light
Fai BE,
FBI B1,
Ll BE,
LVi BE,
Maddi eb, to curse,
lleh Rt, iopvti
Mood be, to grind.
JSAtr BE, to be born.
Nui RE, to /mrf.
do
il ^clora. Us
ecloront.
Keautkr.
je 'e raf.
noj u led.
Re'jutar.
do
do
do
do
do
do
Regular.
do
do
do
tlbr&iraU.nii
brairaieut.
none.
Regular.
je clOtttiB.
do
ilo
do
do
do
do
do
do
Itoperf.
Ind.
11 6(;T0nt{l,n<i
^('loriiient
RegiUar.
je le i-ais.
notuted.
Regular.
do
do
do
do
do
do
xImoIv ant.
none.
bat t not.
btit ant.
bttijr ant.
briiy ant.
dreonrhttttt
etos ant.
^Olte^u aut.
conduisaut.
coiifls ant.
onnnalss ant
eons ant.
crikisn ant,
<ji-oyarit.
croiss ant.
dis ant.
none.
6orhr ant.
CiiB ant or
fe sant.
none.
lis ant.
Inis :snt.
maudisB ant.
melt aut.
moui aut.
laabe mi.
I
nalEant.
Regtddr.
.none.
Regular.
do
tune.
11 brnyait,
il8 bruyKteiit
Regular.
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
fiotima.
RiyiAar.
do
noritt.
RegtUar.
do
do
do
do
do
do
QRAMMAK,
1^7
o.
(Co»«n"A)
CONJUGATION.
ATITE TENSES.
PRIM. & DER. T.
DER. TENSE.
PRIM.TBN
D.TEN
P. TEN.
Present
Pi-eaent
.Impetfttive.
Preterite
Imperf.
Past
SkilQuuctive.
IniUc»tiT.e.
Definite.
Sulj.
Particip.
Hfgulm:
absoas, ?, t.
pi. rcg.
Pfgular.
none.
none.
abeous-te
.ittraie, es, e,
none.
none.
do
do
Ttone.
attrayions, iez, t<at>
Hegular.
bats, 1 St.
pL reg.
Regular.
je baiil H.
Reg.
battu.
Itolre, es, e, Ijuvions,
bois, e, t, buvons,
Go
jebu c.
do
bu.
!ea, boivent.
ex, bolvent.
n brait, lis brn'i^nt.
qu'il braie,
none.
nr.ne.
do
none.
qu'ils br.Hlent.
none.
il bruit, ils bi-d<ent
do
do
do
do.
JRi-guJar.
jo cirooncis, 8, t,
pLreg.
Jlegtilar.
je circonci s
Reg.
cirooncis
do
c)os, 8, t.
tl.rtg.
Co
none.
none.
cloB.
do
C0QClU8, H, I.
pl.rf0.
do
jeconclus.
Reg.
coneln.
do
conduis, s, t.
P^reg.
conns, 8, t.
c'o
je con Jaisis
do
conduit.
do
do
je confl s.
do
confit.
pl.rq/.
c^o
connals, s, t,
pi. reg.
do
je connn n.
do
connn.
do
couds, 8, d.
pi. reg.
do
jecoiui 8.
do
oousn.
do
crams, s, t.
pi. reg.
do
je cralsnl 8.
do
cr&fni.
do
crota, 8. t.
pl- rrg.
do
J9 c»u 3,
do,
crq.
«0,
crols, cvoU, c>-ol.t,
pl. reg.
dp
je CI fi s.
<Jp
crfl.
do
dis, dip, djt, diiions,
dUes, disent.
dp
W^\--
«io
^t-
nol used.
il 6cl0t, il!> gdosent
qu'il dolose,
none.
none.
6c'l0E.
E'QuU','.
ficris, R, t.
pl. reg.
qu^lB 6eIos<»p,t.
Regular.
j'6crivl 8.
Reg.
«crit.
fasse, es, e,
fais, 8, t, fesons
do
jefi 8.
do
fliit.
fdssioiis, iaz. eot.
fiiites, font.
noTie,
fiis, B, Lnopi.
ncm.
now.
none.
frit.
Jifffuhr.
ils, lis. lit.
pl. reg.
Rfgulcr.
jo In s.
Reg.
1u.
Co
luis, lufs, inlt.
pl. reg.
do
none.
noHt,
luL
€o
maudiM, s, t.
do
je niAudi, H,
Sfffi
maudit.
•
pl. reg.
(?.>
metR, mets. m^t,
pl. reg.
do
jp Mil H.
do
mis.
€"0
niouds, d% ".
pl reg.
do
je nioniu 8,
do
ifioulu.
'^ft.
nais, 5, i.
pl. reg.
«o
ja TisquI s.
do
Be.
do
nuis, nuig, nuit.
pl. rttg.
do
je noiai 8.
do
nni.
158
GRAMMAR.
TABLEAU GEI^ERAL, Etc.—
FOURTH
PRIMITIVE TENSE.
DERIVATIVE TENSES.
PRIM. TEN.
DERIV
INFINITIVE.
Future.'
Absolute.
Conditional
Present.
Present
Participle.
Imperf.
Ind.
PaIt St, to graze.
Regular.
Regular.
paisR ant.
Regular,
Plai re, to please.
do
do
plais ant.
do
Prend be, to la7:e.
do
do
pi-en ant.
do
IvEPAtT EB, • to feed.
do
do
repaiss ant.
do
HisouD BE, io resolve.
do
do
resolv ant.
do
Ri RE, to laugh.
do
do
ri ant.
do
Sdffi BE, tobesi^fflcient.
do
do
suflSs ant
do
Suiv BE, io follow.
do
do
suirant.
do
Tbai be, to milk.
do
do
tray ant.
do
Vainc be, to conquer.
do
do
▼ainqu ant.
do
Viv RE, to live.
do
do
viv ant.
do
ill
BEMARKS Oy THE IBEEGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.
1. DissouDRE, to dissolve ; is like absoudre.
2. Instead of attraire wbich can only be used in the Infinitive,
generally we use of attirer, same signification.
3. Battre has for compound :
ahattre, to pull down. rahattre, to abate.
combattre, to fight. se d4battre, to struggle.
d4battref to debate.
4. ExoLURE, to be excluded ; like conclure,
5. CoNDUiRB has for compound :
construire, to construct. introduire, to introduce.
d6duire, to deduct. produire, to produce.
f/>/'nn/Ju/iii'/> fft r>annntiin*t.
GRAMMAR.
169
{ContinuL)
CONJUGATION.— (Confe'nweJ.)
ATIVE TENSES.
Present
Subjunctive.
Eegrdar.
do
prenne, es, e, prenions
iez. ent.
Regtilar.
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
PRIM, ft DBR. T.
Present
Indicative.
pain, fi, t.
pi. reg.
plai>3, 8, t.
pi. re.g.
prends, ds, d, pre-
nons, ez, prennent.
repais, s, t.
pi. reg.
vesouB, s, t.
pi. reg.
ris, ris, rit.
pi. reg.
suffls, 8, t.
pi. reg.
suis, 8, t.
pi. reg.
trais, B, t.
irf. reg.
Taincs, g, c.
pi. reg.
vis, 8, t.
'^.reg.
DERIV, TENSE
Imperative.
PRIM. TEN
Regular.
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
Preterite
Definite.
none.
je plu s.
je pri a.
repn s.
je r68ola s.
je ri 8.
je suffl 8.
jesuivis.
none.
vainqnis.
v6cu s.
D. TEN
Iniperf.
Sul-j.
none.
Reg.
do
do
do
do
do
do
none.
Reg.
do
P. TEN.
Past
Particlp.
pfL
pla.
pris.
repiL
r6<iOUB.
ditsolneil
r68oIu,r«
BUffl.
soivL
trait.
Taincu.
T^CU.
instruire,
cuire.
to destroy. riduire, to reduce,
to instruct. traduire, to translate,
to cook ; generally used with faire.
CoNNAiTRE has paraUre, to appear ; reparaitre, to re-appear ;
disparaitre, to disappear ; reconnaitrey to recognise, reconnoitre.
Rem.— Verbs ending with ai<r<?, preserve the (') over the i, when fol-
lowed by the letter t.
6. CouDRE has for compound ; recoudrey to sew again ; di-
coitdre, to unstich.
7. Craindre has :
2)eindre, to paint.
eleindre, to put out.
feindre, to feign.
astreindre,
attemdre,
plaindref
oc jjculuurc.
to bind, to sub-
to reach, [ject
to pity.
to complain.
'!«!--
160
GRAMMAR.
1,
m
€
li
It must be remarked that verbs ending with eindre, aindre, or
sowire, take s, s. t in the place of f/.s, f/s, // ; in the three per-
sons singular of the Present Indicative.
8, AccROiRE, used only in the Infinitive, ;is : Fai«b accroire
to make one believe what is not the case.
J>. CroItrb has for compound : iUcroxtre, to decrease : accroi-
Ire, to increase.
Crilf Past Participle of croitre, takes a circumflex accent in the
masculine to distinguish it from cm, believed and em, raw, not
cooked. Some tenses and persons of croitre and croire, are exact-
ly alike, the (") alone shows the diflFerence.
10. Dire, to say, has retlire, to say again ; but
contredire, to contradict, midhe to slander.
didire, to disown. pridire, to foretell.
interdlre to interdict ; are just like dire, except that ins-
tead of difes in the second person plural of the Present Indicative
nnd Imperative, they have the regular ending, d/sez : so we
would have : vous contredt'sez, you contradict, etc, like the Pre-
sent Participle, confredisant.
11. i^cRiRE has the following like itself :
to circumscribe,
to describe,
to inscribe.
circonscrtre.
to prescribe.
proscnre,
recrtre,
somn't're,
iransrrire.
to proscribe.
d^crire,
tnscrire,
prescrire,
12. Faire has :
contrefaire^ to niiraio. snihfaire
defaire to undo. aur/aire,
or/aire, to do again.
13. Lire, has elire, to elect : rclire. to read aaain.
14. Mbttre, has for compound ;
admettre to admit. permetfre, to permit
commetfre, to commit. promeitre, to promise
to write again,
to subscribe,
(o transcribe.
to satisfy,
to overcharge.
GRAMMAR.
161
10 submit,
to transmit,
to put off, or
[again.
compromeitre, to compromise, soumeffre,
s'enfrrmettre, to intermeddle. trausmeUre.
omcUip, to orait. remctlre,
se dimetlre, to resign, to put out of joint.
15. MouDBE, has for compound ;
Jiemoutlre, to grind again, wheat, etc ; inondrc, to grind
knives, razors, etc.; remoudre, to grind again.
16. llENAiTRE, to revive, to be born a-ain ; has do Past Par-
ticiple and therefore no compound tenses.
.Yaifre is conjugated with Ulre ; Ex. : Je suis nS, I was born.
17. I'i.AiRE has : dej>Iaire, to displease ; /«iV^,to hold silent:
."e taire, to be silent.
Til takes a circumflex accent in the masculine singular only, to
distinguish it from fu, thou.
18. Prendre has :
apprendre, to learn. entreprendre, to undertake.
comprendre, to understand, se m6ijrendre, to mistake.
disapprendre, to unlearn. surprendre, to surprise!
reprendre, to reprove, to take back.
These verbs take (nn) when followed by e, cs, ent, unaccented.
19. Kesoudre has. two Past Participles : r4solu, 9-Ssous, m.,
risoute, t : risous^ signifies dissolved ; risolu^ resolved.
20. Hire has sourire, to smile.
21. SuivRE has ^OMr«Mii;re, to pursue; s'ensuivre, to be the
consequence ; which is generally used unipersonally.
22. Traire has :
aJjsfrai'rfi, to abstract. rcntratro,
distraire, to distract. retraire,
extmirej to extract. sonsfrm're,
-o. V AiNCRE, has convaincre, to convince.
to darn,
to redeem,
to substract.
4
162
GRAMMAR.
24. VivRE has : revivre, to revive ; survivre, to survive.
Remark. — Every one of these verbs, if the master thinks proper,
should be written in full, so as to make the learner practice the rules for
the formation of tenses, and give him an early knowledge of the irregula-
rities of these verbs, which are generally neglected too much, even by
those who are considered advanced pupils.
IRREOULAR PLACE OF PERSONAL PR0N0UX8.
lU^" "We Icnow that as a general rule the French require the personal
pronouns used as regimens to precede their verbs ; — See page 63-4, 111,
the following are an exception to the general rule :
25. AUer, to go; venir, to come ; courir, accourir, to run to;
penser, songer, to think of ; mer, to aim at; itre, to belong;
and reflective verbs governing the dative and genetive.
EXAMP LE
Je vats d luij
11 vient d nous^
Je vise d, elle,
Je souge d elle,
Ce livre est d, nous,
Je m'adresse d eux,
I go to him.
He comes to us.
I aim at her.
I think of her.
That book is ours.
I apply to them.
Nous accourHmes or courHmes d lui, We ran to him.
PARTICIPLES.
111. 1st. The Present Participle always ends with ant ; it
never changes in its termination. Example : P. Pres.
Ces demoiselles charrnant tout le monde par leur douceur et
leur affahiliti.
These young ladies charming every body by their gentleness
and aflFability.
There are some adjectives that end with ant, and called for
that reason verbal adjectives ; they may agree in gender and in
number with the nouns they qualify.
GRAMMAR.
163
Verb. adj. Ces demoiselles charmantes et agriahles se font
aimer de tout le monde.
These charming and amiable young ladies make themselves to
be loved by every body.
2Dd. Past Participles have different terminations, and agree
like Adjectives ; but no Past Participle conjugated with Avoir
caninanycircumstance whatever agree with the nominative of
the verb. Again, if conjugated with Eire it will agree with
the nominative of the verb, provided the verb is not a reflective
one.
Bes en/ants gdtiSf Spoiled children.
EXAMPLES with Avoir :
J*ai vu cette dame^ I have seen that lady.
La dame quefai vue, The lady whom I have seen.
Etre :
Ulles sont arrivies, They have come.
Reflective.
Elles se sont amusies, They have enjoyed.
lis se sont plu, They have pleased (to) each other.
ADVERB
o.
These adverbs should be committed to memory , yet without tax-
ing the young learner too much with them ; for it is more to give him an
idea of aU those little words which make French reading an iaanrmoxmf
able difficulty to the young student.
113. ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL EXPRESSIONS OF TIME.
A jamais,
A I'avenir,
A Vimpromste,
A Vinstant,
Alnrs,
A prenent,
Apris-demain,
A tout jamais,
AujourcPhui,
Auparavant,
AussitSt,
for ever.
in future.
unawares.
Immediately.
then, at that time.
now.
the day after to-mor-
for ever. [row.
to day. .
before.
{mmediately.
Jadis,
Jamais,
Jusqu'd present,
Jusqu'ici,
La veiile,
L^autrejour,
Le kndemain,
Le surlendgmain,
Longtemps,
Lors,
Mainienam,
formerly,
never.
I until now.
the eve.
the other day.
the next day.
the third day.
a long time,
then.
now.
-I
li
I
164 GRAMMAR.
ADVBHB8 AND ADVERBIAL EXPRBSStONS OF TIMB.
Autrrfr.is,
Avant hier,
Bien lard,
JhmlSt,
pa,
Dans veu,
jyavatice,
JH bonne heure,
JHjd,
J)«main,
De nouveau.
Depui* longten}ps,
JHpuUjttit,
Dt redief,
Derttiartment,
Df-i d prioent,
i>e.< demain,
D6»ormait,
De temps en iemps,
Detixfoit,
Dorinavant.
Enfin,
Hier, -
Incestamment,
Incontinent,
rormeily.
ihe day beSore yester-
yery late. [day.
soon.
bere.
in a short time.
before band.
early.
already.
to-morrow. ,
anew aeaio,
since a long thue.
Binoe a Khoft time.
over again.
lately.
from this time.
from to-morrow.
hereafter.
from time to time.
twice.
henceforth.
in ebort, at last.
yeaterdii^.
shortly.
iaooQtii^ntly.
M'lint iSl,
Nngvlreox .'.
Nuitammmt.
Parfoit,
Pus encore.
Plus snuvent.
Plvi t6t,
Prfsentement.
^arement,
Kicemment.
Sans cesse,
SimMtUaUmenl,
smt,
Snuvent,
Sur le champ.
Tantdt,
Tard,
Tot ou tard,
'fovjotirs,
Tmtt de su^te.
Tris lard.
Trap lard,
ITnefot,
rue.
not so soon.
ere wliilo.
by niftbt.
s(>metimes.
not yet.
oftener.
sooner.
presently.
8om«tlmei|.
seldom.
reeently.
inceRsingiy.
simultanepasty.
so soon.
often,
iuiniediately.
by and by.
late.
soon or late.
Ml ways.
.tf, once.
\ery late.
i 00 late.
once.
qWckly.
113. ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL BXPRESSIOI^S OF PLACE OR
SITUATION
A las.
down.
A c6L6,
beside.
Ailleurs.
elsewhere.
Alentmr,
around.
Arriere,
b.v.kward.
A ierre,
down.
Aupris,
near.
Aux environs,
in the environs.
jJien loin.
vei-y far.
fd e2 Id,
ty6ans,
liere anl there.
here within.
Ci,
here.
Depd ddd.
fiom here, Ironi ihere.
DecOtS,
a Hide.
Depths,
oear.
D'en bos.
fiom below.
D'en iMut,
fi-om above.
Dessout,
under.
Dessus,
ujjon.
D'ici,
"rom hATs.
D'lra,
from wlieie.
En,
from then.
Jin arnire.
Itehind.
En 6<is,
below.
En defa.
on this side.
En dedans.
within.
En /taut.
rp stairs.
En delicrs.
without.'
Jei,
here.
Jcirbas.
hero below.
Jci-dessus,
Jci-pres,
Jusqu'iei,
Jusque Id,
Jusqu'oil,
Ld,
Ld bos,
Z4 dedans,
fjdrdissus,
j'jd-liaui,
Loin,
Nuileparl,
OH,
J\ir ddd.
Par en has,
iSir en uaut.
Par id,
Par Id,
Par cH,,
J'artout,
P)-Ss,
Pri'! d!ici,
Pioche,
Oudquepn.t,.
Titul aupres,
Tout crmtre.
Toutdu long,
Tirut le long,
Vis-dvis,
i',
here above.
near here.
as for as here.
.OS far as tbeie.
how far.
then.
yonder.
within.
Ihere upon.
\ip stairs.
far.
nowheve.
where.
on the othet' side.
downward.
np\frard.
this way.
that way.
through wbeie.
everywhere.
near.
near here.
near.
somewheie.
<iuite near.
just hy.
till the w.-ty,
all along.
oppo ite,
thither.
GRAMMAR.
165
■tii
114.
ADVJCRB8 OV ORDER AND RANK.
AlafiU,
A la fin,
A la fois,
Ala ronde,
A Cavance,
Attemativement,
April,
Auparavant,
Avant,
Ciraprii,
Conjuiimmt,
lyabord,
Defond en comble,
Defront,
De la vUme mattiire,
Be rang,
DemiU,
En dernier lieu,
Enfin,
In a i-ow.
in th<) end.
at onco.
aronnd.
before hand.
alternatively.
after.
before.
before.
hereafter.
confnsedely.
at first.
ftom top lo bottOlb.
iu (W>nt.
In the same way.
in a row.
one after another.
in the last place.
at last.
Enfoule,
Enordre,
En premiey lieu,
Efnscmble,
Entuile,
FareiUtmmt,
Parordre,
Pele-mele,
Premieremeni,
Putt,
Sens desms deiaout,
Semblablement,
Sant deoant derrUrt,
Saudain,
Stuxetsivement,
Tout d rebourt,
Tout,
Tres,
1)1 a crowd.
In order.
in the flrst pliice,
together.
afterwards.
likewise.
in order.
helter«kelter.
firstly.
then.
topsv-tnrry.
similarly.
the hlud foremOat.
suddenly.
sncoessively.
quite the wrong aide
quite. [out.
very.
110.
ADVERBS OF QUAKTITY AND COMPARISON.
Ahondamment.
Absolument,
Aimi,
Aasez,
Austi,
Atdanl,
Beauyjup,
Bien,
Oombien,
Oomme,
DavatUage,
Encore,
EntUremetU,
Environ,
Exdusivement,
Extremtneni,
Jibrt,
Guere,
A h«n Murcfii,
A demi,
A foiton,
A Venvi,
A Vinfini,
A peu de chose pris,
Apeupres,
A gut mieiix mUtun,
Au moins,
Auplut,
A vilprix,
Dememe,
De mieux en mieux,
Deplus,
In abondance,
Ir^niment
Jifldiocrement.
absolutely.
thus.
Mieua.
enough.
Mains,
as.
BusaMement,
asmnch, ntatijr.
/Vu.
much, many.
Pie,
much, many.
Plus,
how mucb^many.
PlutCt,
08.
PresqtUi
more.
Quasi,
again.
Que,
altogether.
QudguCf
about.
Si,
exclusively.
SkffisamnunU)
extremely.
Tant,
tery.
iVtfp,
little, few.
cheap.
Du moinSf
by half.
Dutout,
plentifully.
NimoinSf
in emulation.
Mplus,
infinitely.
Pbu beaucoup,
very near.
i^dpeu.
nearly.
Pour le mains,
in amulatlott.
Pour te plus.
at least
Taut ioU peu,
at most
Troppeu,
at a low price.
Tout d fait,
Uitewise.
2'outaupius,
better and better.
Vhpeu,
moreover.
infinitely.
indifferently.
better.
lesi«.
Indifferently.
litUe.
worse.
more.
rather.
almost.
almost.
than.
about, however.
so.
sufficiently.
so much, many.
too mnch, many.
at least,
not at all.
neither iesq.
neither m6fe.
not much,
little by little,
for the least,
for th« most,
ever so little,
top little,
quite,
at most,
a Httld.
166
ORAM M An.
P
116.
A la mode,
A la hdte,
A regret,
A tort,
A travert,
Autrement,
Avec soin,
Bien,
Oonjointement,
Oanttamment,
117.
Certei,
D'accord,
9ui,
Samdoute.
118.
Nepat,
M point,
Non,
119.
Pmt-Ure,
lao.
Oombitn,
Ormment,
Ifotl, ■
Ou,
ADVERBS OF MANNKB AND QUALITY.
in the fashion.
in haute.
regretfully.
wrongfully.
through.
otherwise.
with care.
well.
conjointly.
constantly.
De biais.
Ensemble,
ErprU,
Gratii,
Ineoffnitii, (g foU),
Ingtammeut,
Lenteim^it,
Iteme,
I'ele-meJe,
TdlemetU,
Adverbs of affirmation.
of course,
agreed,
yes.
undoubtedly.
Smt,
Volordieri,
Vraim^nl,
aslant.
tofroJher.
en I .'irpo89i
^riiis.
iacogLita
instantly.
slowly.
even
helter-skelter.
so much.
belt sa
willingly.
truly.
ADVERBS OF NEGATION.
not.
not at all.
no.
NuUenuTd,
Point du tout.
■ not at all.
ADVERBS OF DOUBT.
perhaps. Toulefois,
Cependant,
ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION.
how much, many.
how.
from where.
where.
JPar&A,
I^aurquoi,
Quand,
however,
however.
what way.
why.
when.
FORMATION OF ADVERBS.
131. When a masculine Adjective ends with a vowel, merit is
added to it ; as : aisi, easy, aisiment ; poll, polite, poliment ;
except impuni, with impunity ; which makes impuniment; and
heau, fine ; nouveatt, new ; mou, soft ; the adverbs of which are
formed from the feminine by adding ment to it, as : beau, helle-
mentf finely ; /om, follementy foolishly.
2nd. If the masculine adjective ends with e mute, then ment
is simply added to ; as : horriblef horriblementy etc., except :
aveugle, blind, aveugUment,
commode i handy, commod4ment,
QRAMMAR.
167
opiniutrimentf
uniform^ment ;
which
opinidtre, obstinate,
uniforme, uniform,
have the e mute accented.
Traitre, treacherous ; make^fraitr easement.
3rd. If the adjective in the masculine ends with a consonant,
the adverb must be formed from the feminine by adding ment to
it ; bon, honne, good ; honnement ; haut, haute, high ; hauie-
ment ; excerpt gentil, gentil, which makes gentiment ; And the
following :
commun, common,
confuse, confused,
precis, precise,
profond, profound,
which change the e mute of the feminine into an (^) accented for
the adverb.
communiment,
con/usSment,
prScisement.
profondimeni.
4th. Adjectives ending with ant or ent form their adverbs by
changing ant or ent into amment, emment, as :
nigligent, negligent, nrgligemment,
ohligeant, obliging, ohligeamment ,
except : lent, slow ; prisent, present ; viMment, vehement ; the
adverbs of which are ; lentemcnt, prisentement, v4himentement ;
and these : nuitam. lent, by night; notamment, with notice ;
sciemment, willingly ; which are formed from adjectives not in
use now.
f
168
GRAMMAR.
PREPOSITIONS.
133. Prepositions which can only be followed by a substantive,
a Pronoun or an Infinitive, are :
d| to, at.
cUf of, from.
opr^s, after,
entre, between, among.
pour,
far,
sans,
voi'i.
for.
by.
without.
here is, here are.
sans voir, without seeing, j^^^*"'' '"*^h for mo.
133. Those that can only be followed by Subst. or Pvon.
avec, with. nivers
chez, at the house of. sflon,
dermis, since. parmi,
vers, towards, (direction.) malgr4,
towards (concerning pcr-
[sons.
according to.
among.
stir,
suivant,
pendant,
dhs,
contre,
dans,
sous.
upon.
according to.
during.
from.
oulre,
iJerrihre,
hormis.
since,
against,
in.
under.
par devers,
devers,
durant, during.
in spite of.
besides,
behind,
except.
l>ar deta, on the othev side.
pardessus, above.
par-devant, in fVont.
par-derrilre, from behind,
before, (at law.)
near, (in the neighborhood of) ; and
touchant, touching.
joiynant, adjoining. r/)wrcrna«<, concerning.
nonohstant, notwithstanding, vn, as, since, considering.
moyennant, by means of. attendu, Id.
Eiiample : Depuis son retour, Depuis luijusqu^d eux.
Since his return. From him to them.
134:. Prepositions that can be followed by a Substantive, an-
other Preposition with a Substantive or an Infinitive are ; prbs
near } hormis, except ; hors, out of j excepti, except.
Example : Pres Paris, Near Paris.
Prls de Paris, Near Paris.
Pr^ de sortir. Near going out.
GRAMMAR.
169
au-
t^S, Prepositions that can be followed by a Substantive, an-
other Preposition followed only by an Infinitive : avant, before;
sau/j except Example : Avant de sortir, before going out.
130. Prepositions or prepositive expressions which always
require after them the Preposition (cfe) and a Substantive ;
such as :
aupr^Sy near.
au-deid^ on the other side.
au-dessouSf under.
au-dessus, above.
such expressions composed of the Preposition d and a Substan-
tive.
lis alUrent au-devant du Roi,
They went to meet the King.
127. Prepositive expressions whose Prepositions which accom-
pany them, can be followed by a Substantive or an Infinitive :
au-dehors,
au-dedan»y
autouTy
au-devant,
without,
within,
around,
before ; and all
hin, far
/ante, for want.
d force, by dint.
Ihutc de pdturage,
Fauie de lefaire,
d moinsy
avjprlSy
unless,
near.
For want of pasture.
For want of doing it.
IMPOHTANT EEMABK.--The PrepoBltiouB whicli govern verts, govern them In ihe Tiifi-
nitJve ; the only exception ]8 tn which requires the Present Participle, a, de, en, are
alMaysrepeated where they have to be used. ,<=», mo
CONJUNCTIONS.
niy
ou,
qucy
Sly
or,
done,
car,
toittefois
H
arid.
neither,
or.
that, than.
if.'
now.
then.
for, because.
however.
comme,
lorsquBy
maisy
pcurquoi,
pw'sque,
quandy
quoiquBy
parce que.
as.
when, at that time.
but.
why.
since.
when.
although.
because.
Tiili
1(1
170 QBAMMAB.
^4, is an advert), wben meaning yes, or io.
The other conjanctions are such as are eomposed of one cm:
several words followed by the conjunction y««.
INTEBJECTIONS.
198. The inteijectiona which express admiration, astonish-
ment, are :
ah I
ha!
oh!
ho!
6!
heu!
ah!
ha!
oh!
ho I u
o!
lackaday !
etth!
eh!.
h6!
ha, ah !
oh!
ho!
laokaday t
ha!
ha!
ah, ah !
oh!
ho!
tarare ! fiddlestick.
139. Those expressing pain, affliction, arc :
ha!
oh!
ho!
ohl
aie
ahi!
Mias !
hold!
ah!
oh!
eh!
ouf!
130. Of derision, distrust, irony :
oui-dd- ! yes, indeed ! hum !
ah ! ah ! horn !
ouais ! Mess me !
131. Of aversion, contempt :
Ji ! pshaw ! hah !
Ji done ! for shame ! baste !
pouah ! pshaw ! hou !
zesi i nuaicsiiuii ;
oh!
oh!
alas !
stop !
hum !
hom !
hah!
nonsense !
hoo I
GBAMMAB.
171
130. For calling, questioning, sounding :
M hi'en I
hem!
hem !
ho!
eh!
well!
hem !
hein I
oh!
hold !
oh Id :
heim !
8t!
stop !
at there !
heim !
St!
133. To impose silence :
chut! silence! si! st ! paix! silence I
134. Of encouragement or otherwise :
tout heau !
ho\7, ho !
allons !
come !
morbleu !
zounds !
mhh'icor^e !
mercy !
JOieu !
God!
pesie !
pflftgue !
gd!
cotae ! Duwl
bon !
good !
courage !
fefrne /
courage !
Btand 1
pla%t-il !
del !
if you j)iease I
heavens I
so !
come!
[fiJJD OP fax SECOND PART.]
TROISIEME PARTIE.
LECTURE.
ii
The four followin;5f remarks sliould
(1.) For the sound of each vowel see page ix — a, e, i, o, u, y,
(2.) For the diphthongs au, eau, ai, ei, oi, oy, eu, cm;
(3.) Generally speaking, consonants at the end of French
(4.) ., es, (mute) terminations of words, arej silent, unless the
also silent.
CONTE MORAL, INS
a'SANHOT ET COLIN.
1. Plusieurs persornes 0*'/^nes de foi ont vu Jeannot et Colin,
dans la ville d'Issoire, en Auvergne, ville fameuse dans tout
Tunivers par son college et par ses chaudrons.
2. Jeannct itait fils d'un marchand de mulcts ; Colin devatf
le jour k un brave liboureur des environs.
5. Jeannot et Colin 6taient fort jolis pour des Auvergnats ; ils
s'aimaient beaucoup et ilaient tons les deux dans la meme
C'cole.
4. Lo temps de leurs etudes Stait sur le point de Jinir, quand
un tailleur apporta k Jeannot un habit de velours, avec une veste
de Lyon de fort bon goiit ; le tout 4lait accoropagn6 d'une lettre
de Monsieur de la Jeannoti^re.
5. Colin admira I'habit ct ne fut point jaloux j mais Jeannot
prtt un air de superiority qui affligea Colin.
6. D^s ce moment Jeannot ViHudia plus, se regarda au miroir
et miprua tout le mondo.
THIRD PART.
READING
II
U,Vy
always be consulted when reading.
— which sound should never be departed from.
see page xi.
words, should not^e pronounced. See page xii.
word has but one syllable, as : de^ des ;—ent, 2d pi. in verbs is
TRUCTIP ET AMUSANT.
JEANNOT AND COLIN.
Many persons worthy of belief have seen Jeanne xnd Colin in
the town of Issoire, in Auvergne, a town famous in the whole
universe for its college and its cauldrons.
2. Jeannot was the son of a dealer in mules ; Colin owed
his life to an honest farmer of the environs.
3. Jeannot and Colin were very pretty for Auvergnais ; they
were very fond of each other, and both were at the same school.
4. The time of their studies was on the point of drawing to a
close, when a tailor brought to Jeanaot a velvet coat, with a very
tasteful Lyons vest ; the whole were accompanied by a letter from
Monsieur de la J eannoti^re.
5. Colin admired the coat and was not at all jealous ; bat Jean-
not assumet^ an air of superiority which grieved Colin.
6. From that time Jeannot ceased to study ; he looked at
himself in the glass and despised every body.
Hi
SOB
MHHI
174
LEOTUBB.
7. Quelquo temps apr^ un valet de chambre arriva en poste
et apporta une seconde lettre a Monsieur le marquis de la Jean-
noti^re ; aUtait un ordre de Monsieur son pere de faire venir
Monsieur son fils h Paris.
8. Jeannot monta en chaise en tendant la main h, Colin, aveo
un sourire de protection assez noble.
9. Colin sentit son n6ant, Qi pleura. Jeannot ^ar<i< dans toute
la pompe de sa gloire.
K). Colin toujours le meme, icrivit une lettre de compliments
k son ancien camarade, pour le congratuler. Le petit matquilB
ne \mfit point de r6ponse ; Colin en/M< malade de douleulr»
1.1. Le p^re et la m6re donnlrent d'abord un gouvemeur an
jeune marquis ; ee gouvemeur qui itait un h^mrne dm bel air, ct
qui ne savait rien, ne put rien enseigner k son pupille.
1 2. Monsieur, voulait que son fils apprit le latin, madame ne
le voulait pas. lis prirent pour arbitre uh auteur qui 4lait e6l6
bre par des ouvrages agr^ables.
13. U fut pri<3 h diner. Le maitre de la maison commenga
par lui dire : Monsieur, comme vous savez le laliii, et que vous
ites un homme de la cour —
14. Moi, monsieur, du latin ? Je n'en sais pas un mot, ripon-
dit le bel-esprit : II est clair qu'on pai^e beaucoup toietiX sa
langue, quand on ne partage pas son application entre elle et l6s
langues 6trang6res.
15. Voyez toutes nos damts, elles ont I'esptit pltis agr^ble
4|te les hommea ; leurs iettres 9ont dcritea aveo cent fois plus de
grace ; elles Wont de sup^riorite sut nofts que parce qu'^HeiJ fi«
iavemi {MUs le latin.
16. Eh bien ! n'avais-je pas raison t dit madame, je veux que
mnn fils soit uo homme d'esprit, qu'il ftmdme datis le tnonde ; vit
yifm votjez que s'il mvait le latin il scrait perdu. — J'oMe-t-on —
s'd vous p^aW la com<§die 6n latin ? Flaidi-i-on en latin qttand
or* a lin proc^ ?
READING.
176
■ ii
4
7. Sometime after this, a servant arrived in a post chaise, and
brought a second letter to Monsieur the marquis de la jeanno-
fci^re ; it was an order from Monsieur, his father, to bring his son
to Paris.
8. Jean not got into the chaise, holding out his hand to Colin
with a patronising smile.
9. Colin felt his insignificance, and wept. Jeannot left in all
the pomp of his glory.
10. Colin, always the same, wrote a complimentary letter to
his former comrade, to congratulate him. The little marquis did
not give him an answer ; whereupon Colin became sick with
sorrow.
11. The father and mother immediately provided a tutor for the
young marquis ; that tutor, who \»as a fashionable man, and who
knew nothing, could not teach anything to his pupil.
12. Monsieur wished that his son should learn Latin; Madame
did not wish k. They took for arbiter, one who was celebmted
as the authot of aome pleasant works.
18. He was invited to dinner. The ma&ter of the house began
to say to him : Sir, as you know Latin, and as you are o man of
the court —
14. I, sir, Latin ? I don't know a word of it, replied the wit.
It is evident that one speaks his own language much better when
he does not divide his attention between it and foreign languages.
15. See al) our ladies, they possess a more agreeable wit t'aan
men ; their letters are written with a hundred times more ele-
gance. They have a superiority over us just I . •• ise they don't
know J atin.
16. Well I was I not right ? huia Madame. I wish my son to
be a man of wit, — that he ma^ succeed in the world j and you
see if he knew Latin ho would be ruined. Do people, I pray you,
play comedy in Latin ? Do they plead in Latin when they have
a law suit.
176
LECTURE.
17. Monsieur, ibloui de ces raisons, passa condumnation, et il
fut conclu que le jeune marquis ne perdrait pas son temps k con-
naif re les auteurs classiques ou Strangers.
18. Mais q\i'aj[)prendra-t-i[ done ? car il faut encore qu'il
sache quelque chose ; ne j)ourrait-on pas lui montrer un peu de
geographic ? A quoi cela lui »crwiVa-t-il? ripondit le gouverneur.
19. Quand Monsieur le marquis ira dans ses terres, les postil-
ions ne saurontWa pas les chemins ?
20. Vous avez raison, r4pondit le p^re ; mais j'ai entendu
parler d'une belle science qu'on appelle, je crois, I'astronomie.
Quelle pitie ! repartU le gouverneur ; se conduit-on par les astres
dans ce monde ?
21. Faudra-t-i\ que monsieur le marquis se tue h cdlculer
une Eclipse, quand il la trouve dans I'almanach, qui lui enseigue
I'dge de la lune et celui de toutes les princesses de I'Europe ? .
22. Madame fut enti^rement de I'avis du gouverneur. — Le
petit marquis Stait au comble de la joie ; le p^re 6tait tr^s-
mdScis.
23. Qvie /audra-t-i\ done apprendre k mon fils ? disait-il : k
itre aimable, ripondit I'ami que Ton consuUait, et s'il sait les
moyens deplaire, il saura tout ; c'est ce qu'il ^owrra apprendre
ians se donner la moindre peine.
24. On voit bien monsieur que vous ^tes I'homme du monde le
plus savant, interrompit madame ; mon fils vous devra toute son
education.
25. Je m^ imagine pourtant qu'il ne serait pas mal qu'il s^t
un peu d'histoire. H^las, madame, ^ quoi cela es^il bon ? Qu'im-
porte k monsieur votre fils que Charlemagne ait r^gn^, et que son
arri^re petit-fils, Louis II ait 6t6 b^gue.
26. Rien n'est mieux dit ! s'ecria le gouverneur : on diouffe
I'esprit des enfanls sous un amas de connaissances inutiles ; mais
de toutes les sciences, la plus absurde c'est la geometric.
27. Cette science ridicule a pour objet des surfaces, des lignes
et de points, cini nexif^ient oas dans ia nature.
KEAOINti.
177
tune ID stmdjing cl«8si«al or foreign authofs.
tb ng Could you not teach him a lUtle Geography f Wh.t use
wiU It fee to him ? retorted the tutor.
*l..^' "^^u^ f """^T ^' "'^'^^^ ^^*« ^ ^»*«> will not the
the postilions know the roads ? j • ««
hpfnVi'^"'" "!l!^^ r^^^"^ *^ ^'**''' 5 ^* I have heard of a
beautiful science whicA people calf, I beUeve, Astronomy. What
folly? answered the tutor; do people conduct themselves by
the stars in this world ? ^
21 Shall Monsieur the marquis weary himself in calculating
^ncdipse, when He can find It in the almanack, which teaches
him theage of the moon, and that ef all the Pf incesses of Europe
22 Madame was altogether of «ie opinion «f the tutor,
^c httle marquis was in the highest spirits ; the fether
was very doubtful.
23. What, lien, must my son be taught? said he. To be
agreeable responded the friend whom they consulted; and if he
knows the means of pleasing, he will know everything; that
he can learn without giving himself the least trouble.
24. Oi« sees weH, sir, that you are the most learned man,
in «ie world, interrupted the mother, and my son will owe all hi^
«ducation to you.
r**f * J- ^' .^T^*^' *^ *'* '^'^"^ not be bad if he knew a
little History. Abs ! Madam, of what use is that ? What matters
U to your son if Charkmange did f«gn, or if his gneat g««d.
son. Louts II., was a etammwer.
nJ!i ^?f *"^. ^,°'''^ *' '^' P'^°* ' '""'^^'"^'^ *^« *"tor ; people
smother the mtellect of children under a heap of useless fnow-
9? '^r^l^ff l^^ ''^°'''' ^' "^^^ ^^««"^ i« Geometiy.
27. That ridiculous science has for its object, surfaces, lines
i " • -■-— «^- aXSi, ^AiSi iu <UH4tro.
i
I
178
LEOTUBE.
28. Monsieur et madame n'entendaient pas trop ee que le gou-
verneur voulait dircj mais ils/ur«n< enti^rement de son avis.
29. Enfin, apr^ avoir examine le fort et le faible des sciences
Mfut d^id4 que monsieur le marquis apprendrait k darner,
30. Madame la marquise donna k Muper aux beaux esprits de
Paris. La tSte da jeune homme/M< bientSt renvers^e ; il acquit
Y art de parler aans b* entendre j et se per/ectionna dans I'art de
n'^^re propre k rien.
31. Quand son p^re le vit si eloquent, il regretta vivement de
i.e lui avoir pas fait apprendre le latin, car il lui aurait achet6
une cbarge dans la robe. La m^re, qui avait des sentiments plus
nobles, se chargea de «oWici<er un regiment pour son fils.
^2. En attendant il rf^pen«a beaucoup pendant que ses parents
B^ipuisaient davantage k vivre en grands seigneurs.
33. Une jeune veuve de quality, leur voisine, qui n'avait
qu'une fortune mediocre, voulut bien se risovdre k mettre en
stLret^ les grands biens de monsieur et de madame la Jeannoti^re
en se les appropriant, et en ^pousant le jeune marquFs.
34. Une vieille voisine proposa le mariage ; les parents 6blouis
de la splendeur de oette alliance, accepih'ent aveo joie la proposi-
tion. Le jeune homme allait ipomer une femme qu'il adorait
et dont il itait aim6 ; les amis de la maisoa Vea/dlicitaient ; on
allait ridiger les articles.
35. Un matin qu'il iiait aux pieds de la charmante <5pouse,
arrive tout effar^, un valet de chambre de madame : Voici bien
d'autres nouvelles, dit-ll ; des huissiers dSminagent la maison de
monsieur et de madame ; tout est saisi par les cr^ancieri*.
36. Voyons un peu, dit le marquis, ce que o'est que 5a, — Oui,
dit la veuve, allez punir ces coquins-lk, ailez viie. II y courty il
arrive k la maison. ; son p^re ^tait d^jii emprisonn^. Sa m^re
4iait seule, sans secours, noyde dans les larmes ; il ne lui restait
READING.
179
28. Monsieur and Madame did not entirely comprehend what
the tutor meant ; but they were altogether of his opinion.
29. At last, after having examined the arguments for and
against the sciences, it was decided that Monsieur the marquis
would learn to dance.
30. Madame the marchioness gave suppers to the wits of Paris.
The head of the young man was soon turned. He acquired
the art of speaking without understanding himself, and perfected
himself m the art of being fit for nothing.
31. When his fether saw him so eloquent, he regretted much
not:having made him learn Latin, for he should have purchased
for him admission to the Bar. The mother who had grander
ideas, undertook to solicit a regiment for her son.
32. In the meantime he spent his money extravagantly, while
his parents squandered still more in living like great people.
33. A young widow of rank, their neighbor, who had only
a moderate fortune, was willing to condescend to place in safety
the great wealth of Monsieur and Madame de la Jeannoti^re, by
appropriating it to herself and marrying the young marquis.
34 An old neighbor proposed the marriage ; the parente daz-
zled by the splendor of that alliance, accepted the proposition with
joy. The young man was going to many a woman whom he
adored and by whom he was loved , the friends of the house con-
gratulated him about it ; they were about to draw up the articles.
35 One morning as he was at the feet of his charming be-
throthed a servant of his mother came in all scared : I bring you
unexpected news, exclaimed he ; some bailiffs are clearing the
house of your father and mother; every thing has been seized by
the creditors. •'
36. Come let us ^ee, said the marquis, what this is. Yes, said
the Widow, go and punish the scoundrels, go quick. He ran
thither, he arrived at the house ; his father was already in goal.
His mother waa alon* «/;*ii.-^4. k^i^ l^al-j ^.^
, TTiii^nr^v irsrp, ystiicu !u lears j tuere
■m
m
XiZCTVJU.
que le souTenir de m fortune, de aa bcaisttt^, de ses fautee, et de
ses folles d6]>ensQ8.
67. Apvte que le fils out loogtemps pieui^ ayeo la m^re, il lui
dtt enfiu : ae noos disetpironB pas ; eette jenne veuve m*aime
^perdument ; elle es^ g^n^reuse plus que riche; je riponds d'elle.
38. II retowme chez die : Quoi 1 c'««< tous monsieur de la
Jeanuoti^e ; que venex-joriB Jatre ici ? ahaHdonne-t-on ainsi sa
m^re I tiUez ehea oette pauyre femme, dites-hii que yai 'besoin
d'une femme de chambre; et que je lui donnerai la pr6f^rence.
^. Le iBAiquis /ut pr^ de %*6vanouir ; il fut traits h. peu
pr^ de lu^me par tous ses amis, et apprit mieuz & connaitre le
monde dans une demi-journ€e que dans tout le reste de sa vie.
40. Comme il Stait plong4 dans la douleur, il vit avancer une
ehaise roulante, k Tantique, espece de tombereau convert, suivi de
quatre efaarrettes ^oormes, toutes charg^es. II y avait dans la
ehaise un jeune homme grossidrement vdtu ; sa petite femme
bruue itaii eahot^e k odt4 de lui.
41. La voiture n*allait pas comme le char d'un petit mattre :
le vojageur evi tout le temps de contempler le marquis immobile,
abtm^ daBR sa douleur, — Ah I mon Bieu, s'Ajna-t-il, je crois que
e*««< Ik JeaBHot ; k ee nom le marquis Ihve les yeuz, la yoiture
43. Le petit homme HQfait qu'un saut, et court embratser sou
aneien camarade : Tu m'as abandonn^, dit Colin ; mais tu as
beau Stre grand seigneur, je t*aimera{ toujours. Jeannot, confus
et attendri, lui conta en sanglotant, une partie de son histoire.
43. lis rQnt tons trois k.pied,sttivis da bagage : (^'i^tH^e teio
que tout cet attirail, vous appartient-i\ ? — Qui tout 69( k meft et k
out femme. Je suis k la tSte d'une bonne ipanufa^uie de fer
^tam^ et de cuivre.
if44. ^'aS ^pQus«$ la iUe d'on riohe mSgoelant en vAtensiles d4-
naaan.irfla ftuie o>mnds 6i aUX t^eti^ - BOSS iXQiisi&HtS bsauCQUn -
\
UEADINO.
m
wmaiDed to her nothiag bu the remombtanoe i Ur fort«i!«,
beauty, faults, and foolish eztravagaace.
37. After the sod had wept long en©agh mm hi» mother, ho
Mid to her at last : Let us not despair ; tha^ yottng widoir i»
passionately fond of me ; she is eten more ^B«n>w thaa rich,
I answer for her. .
38. He returned to her house : Wha* I Is that you Monsieur
de la Jeannoti^re ? what do you come here for t do yott ibm
abandoB your mother ? Go to that poor troman, tell her that I
have need of a chamber maid, and that I will give her the prefer
rence.
89. The marquis was near fainting. He was troated in mnoh the
same way by ail hie friends, and learned to kaow better wha4 the
world ia, in half a day than in all the rest of his life.
40. As he was plunged in grief, he saw advaflding m ftiitiqtld
chaise, a species of covered waggon, iblk>w«d by four stttpendous
oarts all loaded. There was in the chaise a young maa coarsely
ehid > his little brunette wife was jolted by his sidei.
41. The carriage did not speed like the ehariot of * «bp > the tra.
veller had ^cnty of tim;e to contemjdate the iiiar<jtii«, ffiotionless'
and sunk in grief. Ah ! good gracious cried he, I think that is
Jeannot. At that name the marquis raised his eyes ; the carriage
stopped.
42. Th^ little man mad« but one leap aB<i van to emb^ce his
former companion : Thou hast abandon^ mey said C<Jiii -, but
though thou bo a great seigneur^ I will always love thee. Jean-
not confused and moved, related to him, sobbing, a part of kia
history.
43. They all three weiit on foot, followed by the Itiggage.
What is all thit equipage ? Does it belong to you ? Yes, all ia
mine and my wife's. I anb at the head of a profitaWe tin aad
copper manufactory.
44. I have married the daughter of a rich dealer in utensils
usexUx to the great and small ; we work muvb; God blesses usf
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
fe
{r
^(2
1.0
I.I
11.25
^ii^ IIM
S ■? Ilia
us
Itt
u
IM
2.0
1.8
14 11.6
PhotDgrapliic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
\
<^
'^
\
\
"%
V
■<*A
o^
u
^
^<^
182
UECTURI.
Dieu nous binU ; nous la.'avons point chang^ d'etat, nons somme$
heureuz, nous aiderons notre ami Jeannot.
45. Ne 8oi» plus marquis ; toutes les grandeurs de ce monde ne
valent pas un bon ami. Tu reviendrasvM. pays avee moi, je t'op-
prendrai le metier ; je te mettrai de part; et nous vivrons gaie-
ment oii nous sommes n^ci.
46. Jeannot tout eontoBBeseatatt partag^ enire ladouleur et la
joie, la tendlresse et la honte ; il se disait tout bas : Tons mes
amis du bel air m'ont trahi, et Oolin que j'at m4pris4 vient seul
h mon secours.
47. Useniit qu'il nepourrait ahandonner sonp^re et sa mdre,
le monde n^avait pas encore 4touff§ ie germe de son bon nature!.
48. Nous auron$ soin do ta mdre, dit Colin ; et quant k ton
pdre, qui est en prison, yentenda un peu les affures ; ses cr^n-
oiers Toyant qu'il n*a plus rien, a'accommoderont pour peu de
obose, — -je me charge de tout.
49. Colin Ji< ,tant qu'il tifa le pSre de prison. Jeannot re-
touma dans sa patrie aveo ses parents, qui reprirent leur pre-
miere profession. II ipmua une soeur de Colin. — ^Et Jeannot le
pdre, Jeannotte la mdre, et Jeannot le fils, virent que le bonbeur
n*e»t pas dans la yanit^.
SOTTBD COMXE ITN POT.
60. Vers les cinq beures du soir en hiver, un cavalier ^arrUa
h. une b6tellerie qui 6tait pleine de voyageurs.
51. II entra k cbeval dans la cour, et appelant I'aubergiste de
toutes ses forces : tenezj (2«V-il,aye2; soin demon obeval et le menez
h> r^curie.
52. Nous ii*avbn» pas de place, dit Taubergiste, I'^curie «« pleine.
Ottl, oui, rSpliqua le monsieur, &isant semblant de ne pas en-
tendre, }epetuerai kvous domain. — ^Mais je vous tSphle qu'il n'y
a pas de place. — DonnezAni de Tavoine, et autant de foin qu'il
en pourra manger, dit le voyageur j et laissant son cbeval, il so
ditigea aossitdt TOrs la maiiOu.
BEADING.
188
We have not changed our station, we are happy, we will aid our
friend Jeannot.
45. Be no longer a marquis, all the pomp of this world is not
worth a good friend. You shall return home with me, I will teach
you a trade ; I will take you into partnership, and we will live
happy where we were born. '
46. Jeannot confused, felt divided between sorrow and joy,
love and shame. He said to himself: All my fashionable
friends have betrayed me, and Colin, whom I have despised,
alone comes to my help.
47. He felt he could not forsake his father and mother ; the
world had not yet stifled the germ of his better nature.
48. We will take care of your mother, said Colin, and ae to
your father, who is in prison, I understand business ; his credi-
tors seeing that he has nothing more, will readily oome to terms }
I shall manage it all myself.
40. Colin succeeded so well that he got the father out of prison.
Jeannot returned to his birthplace with his parents, who resumed
their former condition. He married a sister of Colin ; and Jean-
not the father, Jeannotte the mother, and Jeannot the son vnder-
fitood at last that happiness does not consist in vanity. I
BEAP AS A POST.
50. About five o'clock, one winter's evening, a gentleman on
horseback, stopped at an inn which was full of travellers.
51. He rode into the yard, and, calling the ostler very loud,
said : there, take care of my horse and put him in the stable.
52. We have no room, said the ostler, the stable is full. Yes,
yes, replied the gentleman, seeming not to hear, I will think of
you to-morrow morning. But I tell you, there is no room. Ay,
&y, give him oats, and as much hay as he will eat, said the tra-
veller; and leaving his horse, he made his way into the house.
SSBH
ll
53. 11 faut (qu'il [$oit fou ^it Taubergiste. Jq crois qn'il ert
sourd dit le garyon d'^curie ; en tons cas il /aut avoir som de £|oq
cbevali nous en serions responsables.
54. Notre yojageur enfy>a done daqs la maison, et la femme de
rkubergiste Itii r^6ta oe que son vam lui avail Mjli dit, qi»'H
Stait impossible de le hger.
55. li lai cria k V^ourdiff -j^ de compKments, pas de o^4-
monies, je vousjprtV, madamei vos logemeots seront assez bops.
Je ne auis pas difficile ; yous n*avez que /aire dej»orlerf je s^ia
si sourd que je n'entendrais pas un canon.
56. Alois il prit une ebaise ei se mil aopr^ da feu, cotaaae
s'il eUt 6i6 cbea lot
57. Veyaiife qn'^ »*j ai^oH pas moyea de se dibarritnef* de lui,
TlM^r^Sle efc sn femme conMJtlir^a/ enfin ft, I«i kdnerpauef la
iioife sur une eWiM^ t« que ta«s lea litt 6laimt oooopds.
58. Pen de temps apr^ il jpassa dans h c^mnbre &h cdt^, et
ToyttUt le diner ser?i, il se mit k table. Ob eut beau lui eHer
dans Ua oreitieS) quee'^toi^ an diner d'amis, et qne ces messieors
ne reeevctient pas d'^tranger : il peenH eontprmdrs qo'on voukiit le
^r# jp&Mer su faaait de la tal^, et i«mMeiant ks eontires de
leur politesse, ripondit qat*il se trouvait tr6i-bien o^ il itait.
59. Comme il n*j avail pas moyen de lui rien /aire tntendrey
on le ^atMa tranquille. Apr^ avoir fait un excellent dtner, iiy«/a
une pi^oe de deux francs sar la table pour son repas ; mais la
femme de I'aubergiste la repoussa aveo d^&in, en disant : Quoi I
Est-oe que tous p^sen que deux francs vont payer un dtner
oomme le vOlire.
60. Oh I je vous dettumde pardon madame, rSptiqua-i-\\^ jo v€u»
absolument jjoyer mon diner ; }q remercie ces messieurs deleur
poHtesse, mais je ne soujffHrai pas qu'ils joaiVn/ pour moi.
61. Alors regardant h. sa montre, il »ortit de la salle, souhaita
une bonne nuit h, tout le mpnde, et s'en aUa droit ^ une obain->
bre-k-coucher.
BSAX^IUQ.
18&
63. He must bo » &ol> said the ostler. I thbk be is dfikf,
replied a stabie boy ; but ct aU event*, ve miiet take care of hie
horse, we sball be responeible for it.
64. Our traTeller now entered the house, and thelandlady told
him as the ether had done, that it was impossible to lodge him.
55. He cried lond enough to stun her r No compliments, no
oeremonj, I beg; Ma'am ; your accommodations wilt be veiy good ;
I am easily satisfied, and it is quite useless ibr yon te speak, for
I am so deaf that I cannot hear a cannon.
50. He then took a chair and seated himself by the fire, as if
he had been at home. Finding no means of getting rid of him,
the landlord and his wife determined to let him pass the night on
the chair, as the beds were all engaged.
67. Shordy after, passing through the next room, he- saw Ae
dinner served, and immediately Uking a chwr, he placed himself
at the table ; it was in vain they bawled t« him as loud as pos^
sible, that it was a private party, and that they would not
receive a stranger ; he appeared to thmk that they wished to give
him the top of the table, and thanking them foy their politeness
he said ho was very eowfortaWo where ho ww seated.
58. Finding they eoold not make him undentand, tiiey let
him remain; and alter eating a hearty dinner, he threw a two
fifano pieoe on the table to pay Ibt his repast ', but the landhkly
pushed it away with disdain, saying : what I do you suppose thai
two franei will pay £ar suoh a dinner aa you^ have eaten.
6d. Ohll beg your pardon. Ma'am, wpKed he, I insist on
paying Ibr my own dinner ; I thank these gentlemen for tfieh'
politeness, but I will not suflfer them to pay for me.
60. Then looking at his watch, he went out of the room, wish-
ing them all good night, and soon found his way to a bed room.
61. The company after having laughed heartily at his apparent
itupidity, sent a servant to see where he was gone.
186
LBOTURB.
82. Aprte s'l/re bien moqa^s de sa pr6ieodae stupidity, ha
voyagears envoylrent une domestique pour voir oil il itait vXXL
63. Elle revint bientdt en duiant qa'il avait pris posseaeioa
d'ane de leurs ofaambrea. lis convinrent done tons, d'aller en-
semble Ten /aire sortir par force ; mais quand ila /went pr^ de
la porte ils Ventendirent se barricader aveo les meubles, et dire,
se parlant ^ Ini^mSme :
64. Que je mU malheureuz ! n'importe qui pourrait en/on-
cer ma porte sans que je pusse V entendre ; ccs messieurs $ont
peut^tre honnites ou ne le sont pas ; et comme yai de Targent,
je ne veux pas courir nsque de h perdre. '
65. Non, je ne me couclierai pas, ni je n'iteindrai ma cban-
delle ; je vei7^at toute la nuit aveo mes pistolets arm^s, etsi
quelqu'un/aif mine d'entrer, je tirerai sur lui.
66. Aprds avoir entenda oela ils nepenalrent plus k le dihger ;
il se coucha etpassa la nnit fort tranquillement; laissant le mon-
sieur, qui avait pris le lit, en chercher un autre ailleurs.
67. Le lendemain matin, il descenditf alia chercher son oheval
hi l'6curie, et le conduisit 5. la porte ; les voyageurssV^ten^ d6j&
rassemblbi^ pour se moquer encore de lui.
68. Aussitdt qu'il/i«f mont^ h, cbeval, il Jeta au gar^on trente
sons pour son cbeval et sa cbambre, et quelques sous k Tauber-
giste ; ensuite cbangeant de ton : Messieurs, dtt-il je vous
remercie de la politesse que vous m'avez faite ; j'ai k demander
pardon k I'un de voui^, d'avoir pris sa cbambre ; mais oomme
on a refus^ de recevoir un de mes amis, bier au soir, et qu'il a
pari6 vingt louis que je ne pourrais trouver de logement ici ;
yai fait le sourd ; je vous laisse kjenser si yai bieu rempli mon
rdle.
69. Ilpigua des deu:^, et les laissa dans r^tonnement.
BEABINO.
187
62. She soon returned, saying he had tdken possession of one
of their bedrooms. They then agreed to go, all together, and
turn him out by force ; but when they approached the door, they
heard him barricading it with furniture, and talking loudly to
himself They listened and heard him say :
63. What a misfortune is mine ; any one might break open
my door, and I should not hear;it. Those gentlemen may be all
honest men, and they may not ; therefore as I have some money,
I will not run any risk ; no, I will not go to bed, nor put out the
light ; I will sit up all night, with my pistols cocked, and if any
one should enter I will shoot him directly.
64. Hearing this they made no attempt to dislodge him ; and
he went to bed and passed the night very quietly, leaving the
gentleman who had engaged the bed to find & lodging where he
could.
65. The next morning, he came down, went to the stable for
his horse, led him to the door, by which time the company were
assembled to have another laugh at him.
66. As soon as he was mounted, he threw to the servant thirty
sous for his horse and his lodging, and also some sous to the
ostler ; then, changing his manner, he said: Gentlemen, I thank
you for the politeness you have shown me ; I have to beg pardon
of one ofyou for having taken his bed ; but one of my friends
was refused a lodging here last night, and he has betted twenty
louis that I could not procure one ; I played the deaf man ; so I
leave you to judge if I have done it well,
67. He then spurred his horse, and left them in amazement.
18»
LECTURE.
68. Lowqu© le IntroQ SntfefflrlaDd Stait 2k St. P£iier§lK>«tg) i
p98s4datt no tris-joH petit oWcn, <iae Pimpdrttrice C«thetine «<l-
mtV<ut beauctmp : e'dtait h moitidre d«s ehoeecr qtTiih M offUt
69. EUe remercia afEeetneosente&t ie Hroft, aec^a le ein'Iitt>
le nomma SutheirlaiMi^ et en /!< BJMi ekiea &¥Drl.
70. lift panvM peiite bdte momgea taot da ftiaitidues, et jprtY
si peu d'eacerctce <|a'elle ea ereta bieatdti.
7L L'imp4mttioe atmatif tellemetit oe petit animal qa'eUe r^^
a^lul de le/a«r# empaiUerf e% medre §6VA venre. *-., i,fw i ; ji< h J
72. Le lendemain matin do&c, elk numdki ub de set offitaers^.
et lui dU en frasQais : allez tout de saite chercher Sutherland
pour le/aire emptiiRer. ^
73. L'offioielF end que rlmp6ratrice avait dit " empaler /* et
sans penser au obien, il a^/a tout droit obex le baron, dans la sup-
position que celui-ci avail oommis un crime abominable ; et tui
dU: Monsieur, il^M« que tous me sutviez k I'instant.
74. Sutherland quelque peu surpris d'un ordre pateil, e(t sup*
tout de la mani^re dont il itaif annonee, en demaitda Fexpliea"
tion t Monsieur, r4pomdit I'offioier^ il ne m'a^mrti0»t pas d-ap-
pnc/enddr les ordres de Sa MajtMt6 ; j«i tx'ai qxk'k lee eoeicnfer^s .
75'. Lea ordifea dd Sa Majesty I s'^rta le baron^ qioels ord!re»
peut^We avoir dosn^ Ik men igaid ? jje sm» &Mh€frip(mdit Tof-
fieier, de yous apprendre qu'elle vieut k rinsttnt dft me danner
I'ordre positif de yova/aire empaler ; je n'o^eruit d^sob^ir.
76. Gfand Bieu ! B^Satia Sutherland, <^'<ii-je dontf faH pom
offenser Sa Majeste ? Cek ne tne t^ardeysSf Mottdiettr;
77. Au moihg, dit Suth^land, avant qne je ntbitse mon sttpplice,
condmsez-moi au palais que yentende ma condamnation de la
bouche de Sa Majesty, et que j'en sache la cause ; car je vous
asmre, monsieur, sur mon bonneur, que je n'at fait, dit, ni m€me
pens6 quoi que ce soit centre Tlmperatrice ou toute autre per-
Sonne. II doit y avoir quelque m^prise.
READING.
189
et
BABO V SVTOBBMiro.
68. Baron Satheriaod when at St. P«t«Mrb«i^, pnnmwriJ a tery
hwidsoBBe {Mig dog, ivbicli tlNs Bwfirew gr^j admured ; be
could not do less than mako liMHr a fMrweat «f H.
69. She graeionslj thanked Uae Baron, accepted ibe dfg, gave
Win. Uie «wDe of Sutherland, anj atade him h«i favourite l»p-dog.
70. He was fed with so many lu^wes, a»d twk m tittle ei:er-
ewe, that the poef thing soon died.
71. The Empress was so fond ef the little animaji, th«t sbe 4o-
temined to have bim stuied and p«t ii^to a glass eaae.
72. Oa the momiiig after bis death, «he said ia Fnineli to one
of her officers : Go directly, take Sutherland, and see hiia situlfed
'"•'empmller.
73. The offioer tboaght «he said emptUer^ and «Qt thinkipg of
the dog, he went immediatley to the \mm'M homo, supposing he
had eomuiitted some heinous eriwe, and«(^ : Bvf, you must fol-
low me immediately.
74. Sutherland not a little surprised at such summons, and
particularly at the manner in which it was announced, demanded
some explanation ; but the officer replied : Sir, it is not my duty
to criticise the orders of Her Majesty ; my duty is to see them
executed.
75. The orders of Her Majesty I exclaimed the Baron ; what
orders can she have given with respect to me ? I am sorry, replied
the officer, to inform you that she has just given me peremptory
orders to see you immediately empaled, and I dare not disobey.
76. Good God I cried Sutherland, me empaled ! what have I
done to oflFend Her Majesty ? That is not my business, sir.
77. At least, said Sutherland, before my punishment, conduct
me to the palace that I may hear my condemnation from her own
mouth ; for I assure you, sir, as a man of honour, that I have
neither done, said, nor even thought anything against the Em-
press or anyone else; therefore, be assured there is some mistake.
100
,>'
lOOTURB.
78. L'offioier Tojint lo baroo si oonvainou de ion iDnoc«noe,
prii ear lui de le conduim an paiaii.
70. AuMitdl que Soiherland iBptrfut Via^mincB, il B*ieria :
CommMt aiJB en !• miAheiir, Madame^ de vqiu offemery pow
m*expoHr k nn chfttimeiit anasi oniel. «^
8(K Catheriiie 9»iniU k Ibtegardevy ev M tounuuit yen I'offi-
der : Qa'«t<-o6 que oela imU dire, moimeux, oar je ▼ons attme,
je n'y ctrnprendg rien da tout.
81. Yotre MajesM, rSpondU VtMnnet, ne m'a-i>e]l6 pas donn6
I'ordre de^tVe empaler Sutherland? ' r- it^^ilf- *
82. Oatlierine 4daia de rtre, eft ikuldCdt qa'eU»« pai'parkr :
Monueor Soiherland, tUt-eih, ne toiib tdamws pas, vona n'aves
rien Ik cratndre.
83. Ensnite, a'a^eas^nt k Fofficier : Imbecile que lojmitesf
Q**it le petit earlin Sutherland que je Tons aiwM dit de/atre em-
paiUeTf et non pas empale.
84. lie baroB es( om^nement )^D un dea deiDi<»ni qui pout'
rait inujiginer quelque chose contre moi.
^
ITN.
-ua. wju •
BXADINO.
191
ir
i6
B2
»-
yentared to oondnct Urn to th« ptlie*.
Ae «»ld .perfc, «.d : Don'tbod^ied U„,n, ,o« h.« nothing
h f ■ r"^ T*'"*' *° "" "*««' = Y«» ""PW man, she «ud.
84. Th. baroB i., I am .nw, one of the last men who wonld
imagine anything against me.
THK END,